■ ; .. THE DUTCH LANGUAGE, LITERATURE, AND GRAMMAR. ALPHABETS. MOESO GOTHIC. A. C. 400. MODERN GOTHIC. A. C. 900. A e v g»n n K \ M II o K S T D a- x ;h or x 3 a IS f> or c- 3D b $ it % X It h € I M m ft » # <•&, <) C t ® u m v £ x 2e 3 * ANCIENT ROMAN B.C. 486. A B C D E F G t U M N O r Q R s v X MODERN ROMAN. A. C. 500. A a B b Ccch D d E e F f H h Iiij JFJ K k L 1 M m N n O o P p Qq R r S s T t U u Y v Ww X x Yy Z z ITALIC. A.C.1501 ITALIC WRITING. A.C. 1501. *4 a B h C cch I) d E e F f Gg- H h Ii ij K k L I M m JT.n O o P p R r S s T I IT u r v X x ry z % 3/ a M / G? c cA & ■ i (StDSt^ISEr^So Page. PREFACE XI. INTRODUCTION XIII. DUTCH GRAMMAR . . . . , 1. DUTCH ORTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNCIATION . . . — Letters — Alphabet 2. Sounds of the Letters 3. Sounds of the Single Vowels — Sounds of the United Vowels 5. Sounds of the Single Consonants 7. Sounds of the United letters ch and ij 12. General Observations on Dutch Pronunciation , Accent , and Spelling 13. DUTCH ETYMOLOGY 16. Derivation of Words — Primitive or Simple Words — Compound Words 17. Division of Words or the Parts of Speech 19. Articles — Nouns 20. Declension — Gender — Masculine — Feminine 21. Neuter 22. Nouns common to two or more genders 23. Formation of the Feminine of nouns 24. YI CONTENTS. Page. Number 25. General rules for forming the Plural — Case 29. Nominative — Genitive — Dative 30. Objective — Declension of the Article .... * — Declension of the Article and Noun ......... 31. Observations on the Cases of Nouns 32. Praxis on the Union of an Article and Two or More Nouns 33. Adjectives 34. Derivation and Formation of Adjectives — Declension of Adjectives 35. Observations on the Declension of Adjectives 36. Degrees of Comparison 39. Declension of the Comparative and Superlative of Adjectives 41. Numeral Adjectives . 42. Cardinal Numbers — Ordinal Numbers 43. Praxis on the Union of an Article , a Noun, and an Adjective — Pronouns 45. Personal Pronouns 46. Declension of Personal Pronouns 48. Declension of Personal Pronouns with zelf — Possessive Pronouns 49. Declension of Possessive Pronouns 50. Demonstrative Pronouns 52. Declension of Demonstrative Pronouns ........ — Declension of deze, dit; die, dat; gene) deceive; dezelfde — Relative Pronouns 57. Declension of Relative Pronouns 58. Interrogative Pronouns 59. C N T E N T S. VII Page. Praxis on the use of Pronouns 61. Verbs — Conjugation of Verbs 62. Moods 63. Participles 64. Tenses — Number 66. Person — Auxiliary Verbs 67. Conjugation of zullen — hebben — zijn or wexen . . 69. worden 71. Verbs Active 74. Regular Verbs — Conjugation of the Reg. Verb Active leeren . , . . . — Formation of Moods and Tenses 76. Irregular Verbs 79. Conjugation of the Irregular Verb bidden ...... 86. Verbs Passive 88. Conjugation of the Verb Passive geleerd %ijn .... 89. Reflective Verbs 92. Conjugation of Verbs Reflective — Neuter Verbs 94. Conjugation of Verbs Neuter 95. Impersonal Verbs 96. Verbs used Interrogatively and Negatively 97. Conjugation of Compound Verbs — Praxis on the use of Verbs 101. Adverbs 103. Praxis on the use of Adverbs 106. Prepositions 107. Particles — VIII CONTENTS. Page. Initial Particles 107. Terminational Particles 109. Principal Prepositions 110. Praxis on the Prepositions 112. Conjunctions 113. Praxis on the Conjunctions 114. Interjections 115. Praxis on the Interjections fc 116. DUTCH SYNTAX 117. Sentence — Explicative Sentence — Interrogative Sentence — Imperative Sentence 118. Simple Sentence — Compound Sentence — Concord 119. Government — Rule I. Concord of Article and Noun .... 120. „ II. Omission of the Article — „ III. Ellipsis of the Article 121. IV. Two or more Nouns referring to one ob- ject 122. „ V. Two or more Nouns referring to different objects , 123. w VI. Concord of Adjective and Noun . . . 124. „ VII. The Adjective and Noun w r ith xijn or worden 125. „ VIII. Adjectives governing certain Cases . . — „ IX. Adjectives requiring certain Prepositions . 126. „ X. Ellipsis of the Adjective 127. „ XI. Ellipsis of the Noun 128. „ XII. The Comparative degree requires dan . — „ XII I. The Superlative degree and the genitive or van. nit, or onder 129. Rule XIV. r> XV. n XVI. it XVII. 11 XVIII. 11 XIX. ii XX. r> XXI. ri XXII. » XXIII. n XXIV. n XXV. r> XXVI. ii XXVII. ii XXVIII. ii XXIX. n XXX. n XXXI. ii XXXII. ii XXXIII. ii XXXIV. r> XXXV. ii XXXVI. •>•) XXXVII. 11 XXXVIII 11 XXXIX. V XL. ii XLI. ii XLIT. ii XLI1I. C O N T E N T S. DC Page. Cardinal numbers require the noun in the plural — Al followed by de — Concord of Personal Pronouns .... 130. Ellipsis of the Personal Pronoun . . . 131. The Indefinites men , ietnand , niemand — The Reflective Pronoun s>ich .... 132. Concord of Possessive Pronouns ... — Ellipsis of Possessive Pronouns . . 133. Concord of Demonstrative Pronouns . . 134. The Pronouns degene , diegene , and het- gene 135. The Pronouns deceive and de&e ... — The Pronouns dusdanig and %oodanig . 136. Concord of the Relative and Antecedent — The Relatives die, welke , wie,and wat 137. Interrogatives and .Answers 139. Interrogates wat and welke .... — Concord of Verb and Nominative . . . 140. Ellipsis of the Nominative ..... 141. First, Second, or Third person as Nomi- native — Singular and Plural as Nominative . . 142. Tense — Mood 144. Infinitive Mood — Participles 145. Two Verbs .... - — The Verbs ssijn and w or den . . . 147, Verb and Possessive Case 148. Verb and Dative Case , — Verb Active and Objective Case . . . 149. Verb Neuter and Preposition .... — C N TENT S. Page. Rule XLIV. Position of Subject, Attribute, and Object 150. „ XLV. Adverbs 151. „ XLVI. Prepositions govern the Objective . . . 153. „ XL VII. Conjunctions 154. „ XLVIII. Conjunction and Indicative Mood . . . 155. „ XLIX. Conjunction and Subjunctive Mood . . . 156. „ L. Conjunctions requiring other Conjunctions — „ LI Power of Conjunctions in Sentences . . 157. „ LII. Interjections 158. PROSODY 159. Het Fort Erfprins aan den Helder , . 162. Opkomst, Bloei , en Verval der Letteren 166. De Kokosboom 168. Huig de Groot — Prosodie 170. De Batavieren 172. Het Eiland der Batavieren 174. Geschiktheid van Europa voor Zeevaart en Handel ... — Geschiktheid van ons Vaderland voor Zeevaart en Handel 176. De geschiktheid der Nederlanders daarvoor 178. De gewigtige gevolgen van Schoolonderwijs 180. Invloed van Eigenbelang op de juistheid onzer waarnemingen 182. Het betrachten der Deugd 184. Kwaadsprekendheid 192. APPENDIXES Appendix I. Dutch Titles of Royalty, Nobility, Civil and Military Rank , with their Abbreviations as used inCorr espondenoe, and News-Papers 196. ,, II. On the Pronunciation of some Foreign Words 208. „ III. Rules of Punctuation 209. „ IV. On the Use of Capitals . 212. PREFACE. To fill the place which appeared to form a hiatus in the list of works on the Dutch language, led to the pub- lishing of this compilation ; and we hope , herein , in some measure at least, to have furnished a summary exposition of the materials , the powers , and the peculiarities of this language. It being a matter of interest and curiosity to acquaint ourselves with the origin and progress of any art or science on the study of which we enter, whether for the gratification of the fancy , the expansion of the intellect , or as necessary for the occupations of life, so it is presumed that the sketch of the origin and progress of this language, and the notice of the most eminent Dutch writers, as comprehended in the introduction, will not be deemed here out of place. As the Dutch language is little taught in English schools, we have not deemed it necessary to introduce here themes or exercises for translation, as is commonly met with in school grammars] but have rather given copious illustrations to the rules , and annexed in suitable places a praxis on the preceding rules, which, whilst they exhibit the structure of the lan- guage and Us genius, may be used also as reading and translating exercises ; and the praxis on the Dutch grammar may be em- ployed for the same purposes by the more advanced student. XII PREFACE. The eontents of this compilation are comprised under Four General Divisions: 1. An exhibition of the letters and their powers, or Dutch Orthography : 2. An exhibition of the materials of which the language is composed , and the various modifications of which those materials are susceptible in com- position, or Dutch Etymology: 3. The principles for combi- ning these materials in the proper construction of sentences or significant propositions , or Dutch Stjntax: and A. Illustrations of, or a Praxis on the foregoing. The Orthography and Inflections as fixed by Professor Siegenbeek , and Mr. Weiland , have been strictly adhered to, whilst the opinions of polemics on some particulars of the Dutch Grammar have been passed over; in cases how- ever where the orthography or inflection is dubious or mani- fold , that form has been chosen which appeared to be of most general adoption. In short , precision has been obser- ved with a due regard to brevity , and minuteness of detail without falling into prolixity ; and in the quantity of illustra- tions a regard has been paid to copiousness without rendering the work too voluminous. ROTTERDAM, January 1842. ijvtu on JJCTIOJV. CONTENTS : l Reason and Language. — 2 Origin and Pro- gress of Language. — 5 Language of the Antediluvians. — 4 Dispersion of the Posterity of Noah — 5 Peopling of Europe by the Japhatic race. — 6 Celts, and Celtic Language. — 7 Sclavonians and Sclavonic Language. — 8 Teutoni , and Teutonic Language. — 9 Scandinavians and Scandi- navian Language. — 10 Upper and Lower Teutonic. — 11 Cjesar and Tacitus first notice the Batavians. — 12 Salic Francs, Frisons, Saxons, and Batavians. — 15 Salic Code. — 14 Origin of the Dutch. — 15 Gothic, and Roman Alpha- bet. — 16 Frison and Frankish Language. — 17 Lex Fri- sionum. — 18 Succession of the Dynasties of Holland. — 19 Collection of Laws by Sibranda. — 20 Frison, the Lan- guage of the Court of King Ethelbert. — 21 Existing spe- cimens of ancient Frison and Flemish. — 22 Fall of the Roman Empire. — 23 Revival of Learning in Europe. — 24 Present Flemish and Dutch Language. — 23 Dutch Pro- vincial Dialects. — 26 Literature and Language of the Netherlands in the 13 th. century. — 27 — 14 th. Century. — 28 — 13 th. Century. — 29 — 16 Century; division of the Netherlands; Hooft modifies the Dutch Orthography. — 50 — 17 Century; Orthographical peculiarities. — 51 — 18 Century. — 52 — 19 th. Century. — 55 Flemish Language and Literature. — 54 Siegexbeek's spelling. — 53 Popula- tion speaking the Language of the Netherlands. 1 . Reason and Language are so intimately blended , that the former may be considered as the matter and the latter as the instrument bv which the mental facul- XIV INTRODUCTION. ties are called forth and rendered apprehensive: they are those characteristics of human nature which elevate man so pre-eminently in the scale of created beings. Language , then , as the instrument of rational inter- course between man and man , demands our first and especial study; for the cultivation of language, taken in its widest extent , is no other than the cultivation of thought and right reason, and the most efficient manner of communicating our ideas, our designs, our sensations, and our actions to others , either by speech , or by signs as in writing and print. 2. The origin of language must then be coeval with or must immediately have succeeded the developement of reason or the mental faculties, and its advancement to- wards perfection progresses with the advances made in the arts and sciences and in the culture of our social affections. o. In the earliest ages man had but few wants; his habits were simple ; the arts of life, except the primitive stages of agriculture and the chase, may be supposed scarcely to have existed , or could have been cultivated only as far as the simple pastoral habits of life demanded and suggested; whilst the various objects in nature and art , as they presented themselves , would naturally re- ceive a name, purely arbitrary, and as suggested by chance , or by an analogy to some other name previously created. In such a state of society language could make but little progress, and could not advance beyond the mere names of the comparatively few objects in nature which presented themselves , and the names of such ideas and inventions as would arise in such a mere pastoral life. These names must have been subjected to continual changes and sometimes even to falling into utter oblivion , circumstances incidental to a language maintained only by oral transfer. Such we may suppose to have been the case with the language of the Ante- diluvian race, whose language was probably the Hebrew or a primitive form of it. It falls only to the part of a refined and generous people, advanced in the arts and sciences, to mature and enrich a language. The Gre- cian and the Roman nation, both excelled in this par- ticular ; and in later times , the modern western Euro- INTRODUCTION. XV pean nations , in consequence of their cultivation of learning and the arts, have brought their languages to an advanced state of refinement; and of these the English language , from the wide diffusion of it, the advancement which this nation has made in the arts and sciences, seems to have become richer in words, and of more extensive use than perhaps any other language , ancient or modern. 4. As Noah and his family were the only human beings saved at the Universal Deluge, so it is to be inferred that this language remained the only one on earth down to the Babel dispersion, about which period the descendants of Noah spread out in different directions. The Mosaic history, as also that of other ancient histo- rians, agree in confirming that the posterities of the three sons of Noah, Shem, Ham, and Japhet, seem to have extended over the following parts of the globe : that of Shem over Southern Asia : that of Ham over the countries stretching south from the Euphrates , as Arabia, Palestine , Egypt , and the continent of Africa : and the peopling of Europe is ascribed to the posterity of Japhet. The language of the Shemetic race was the Hebrew, with their dialects Chaldee , Syriac , Arabic &c. ; and are characterised by being written from right to left. Of the language spoken by the posterity of Ham little is known , but it is supposed by some to have been that now spoken by the tribes of Middle and Southern Africa. The language spoken by the descendants of Japhet , is ge- nerally supposed to have been the Sanscrit, or a dialect of it ; and is considered as the root of the European languages , the Greek , Latin , Celtic , Sclavonic , and Teu- tonic. 5. The time when , and the part where the descen- dants of Japhet passed over from Asia into Europe is not clearly ascertained. They appear to have entered Europe about ten or eleven centuries before the Christian era, in three distinct streams of population; and those people known under the name of CELTS or CELT.E were pro- bably the first who entered Europe , and must have crossed the Kimmerian Bosphorus between the Black Sea and the Sea of Azoph. They extended along the south Wes- tern regions of Europe, having been impelled forward XVI INTRODUCTION. in that direction by later emigrants , Ib'e Gomerians or Teutoni. They inhabited the countries of Spain, part of Gaul, and crossed over into Britain. 6. The language spoken by this people , is called the CELTIC, from a part of ancient Spain, in Caesar's time, having been called CELTIC IBERIA ; and a great part of Gaul , in his time, was called GALLIA CELTICA. That the CELTI entered Britain from Gaul is inferred from the relative situations of these countries and from the analogy of the language of the ancient Britains with that of Celtic Spain and Celtic Gaul. 7. The Second Great Stream of inhabitants which entered Europe from Asia , comprehends the Sclavonian or Sarmatian nations. They appear to have entered Europe some centuries subsequent to the entrance of the Celti. They occupied the Eastern Parts of Europe as Bussia, Poland, Eastern Prussia, Moravia, Bohemia, etc. These people gave rise to another class of European languages , as the Bussian , Polish , Bohemian , etc. 8. The Third Stream of European population which entered Europe, probably in the same part as the Celti, but at a period subsequent, settled along the banks of the Danube, and extended in a southern direction, along the Bhine, forcing the Celts forward before them in a south western direction. In Caesar's time , these people were called TEUTONI or GEBMANI; and in later ages , they were known under the name of GETjE or GOTHS. The language spoken by these people is called the TEUTONIC , or INBO-GERMANIC ; and is divided into two Great branches, the Scandinavian and Germanic. 9. The Scandinavian branch includes the Icelandic, Danish, Norwegian, Sweedish, Finlandish , etc. — 10. The Teutonic is divided into Upper and Lower. The First Subdivision, the UPPER TEUTONIC is that spoken by the Moeso-Goths, the Allemanni , and the people of Austria , Bavaria , and Upper Saxony, called the Moeso- Gothic, the Ailemannic, and the High German. These na- tions having mixed less with their northern neighbors the Scandinavians, their language bears less analogy to that of these people than the Lower Teutonic. The Second Subdivision was the LOWER TEUTONIC , or that spoken by the, Anglo-Saxons, Frisons, and the nations INTRODUCTION XVII extending throughout Western Germany to the Rhine, and into France as far as Ostend. These languages are known under the names of ANGLO-SAXON , LOW GERMAN , FR1SON, FRANKJSH, BATAVIAN , and FLEMISH. From what has been said, the roots and cognate dia- lects of the modern Dutch language may bo exhibited thus: GOTHIC , 1NDO-GERMANIC , or TEUTONIC. Scandinavian. Upper Teutonic. Lower Teutonic. Icelandic. Danish. Swedish. Norwegian. Pictish. Lowland Scotch. Moeso-Gothic mannish. Anglo-Saxon, Fri- Ali- son , Batavian , Flemish, Low-Ger- man, Frankish. Flemish and Modern Dutch, being cognate languges, with their Modern German. provincial dialects , the Frison , Guelde- rish , Overysselish , etc. Such is the received opinion as to the arrival and di- rection taken by the three great streams of population from Asia in Europe; and also as to the nations which sprang from them. War, pestilence, and famine, would , with the lapse of time , tend to detach and further separate one tribe from another, and would consequently give rise to the existence of new distinct tribes or na- tions ; and , in the course of ages as new objects and ideas presented themselves , each tribe would give them a name according as chance or ingenuity might suggest ; and thus form a new dialect or language differing more or less from the parent one and from that of their neighbors. In this manner may be traced the origin of the TEU- TONIC LANGUAGE, and of the various languages or dia- lects which have taken root from it. 11. Julius Cesar, as appears from his Commentaries of the invasion of W T estern Europe by the Romans under his command , first extended his conquests to these parts, about fifty years before the Christian era; this elegant. 2 XVIII INTRODUCTION. writer speaks of a people , called BATAVI , located to- wards the mouth of the Rhine , between the Waal and the other northern branches of that river , and they seem to have extended from Dordrecht to about Haarlem. These Batavi emigrated into these parts from the country of Hesse, in middle Germany, about 100 years before the Christian era ; and probably their language partook more of the Lower than of the Upper Teutonic, but of this no proofs are extant : these people first fell under the Roman dominion and subsequently became incorporated with the Franks in common with the Frisons; the former never afterwards existed as a distinct nation, but remained intermixed with the Frisons , Franks , and Lower Saxons. Tacitus , a Roman historian , who was made gover- nor of GALLIA BELGICA, in the reign of the Roman Emperor Vespasian , about sixty years after Christ, next gives some account of the inhabitants of this part of Europe. He found them divided into various petty tribes , living in a rude state ; but represents them as being hardy and brave in war. The early history of these people, as well as their language, is of course in- volved in the darkness of that age, and continued so until about the thirteenth century , on the revival of learning in Europe. 12. A race of people, composed of Frisons, Saxons, and Bataves , came into notice , in common with another nation of Europe called Salian Franks who were origi- nally a tribe in a part of Germany now called THE FRAN- KISH KREIS ; the latter subsequently extended their con- quests over the district now known under the denomina- tion of the North and South Netherlands, and the countries stretching south of them , as France , part of Spain , the greater part of Germany, Italy, etc. 13. These Franks, having brought the Frisons, Saxons, and Batavians under their subjection, and all having a resemblance of manners, and possessing the same sense of liberty , having formed themselves into one formidable body or state, framed, about the middle of the fifth Cen- tury, the SALIC CODE. This code took its name from the river YSSEL , on the banks of which they were chiefly settled. This code was probably written in the Low Teutonic dialect, however, it has been handed dowjQ to us in INTRODUCTION. XIX the Latin language only , but a close examination of it , leads to the conclusion, that it was originally written in a Lower Teutonic Dialect. 14. The conquests of these Franks, in Lower Saxony, Friesland , and the country of the Bataves , their intermixing with these nations, who all spoke dialects of the Lower Teutonic , laid the foundation of the language of the Netherlands ; but it was not till the thirteenth century that it became cultivated and known as a written language. Of these dialects the present Dutch partakes more of that of the Bataviaa into which the Frison , Lower Saxon, and Frankish, as being of cognate origin, will have flown ; but much is here left to mere conjecture, as suf- ficient data do not exist to enable us to trace with pre- cision the etymology of all the words constituting the present Dutch. » The remnants of a remote antiquity in Holland," says Mr. Bowring, » are few and scattered. It has been in all times a country — the dispositions and the habits of whose people have been quiet as its inland waters , yet easily affected by external circumstances — too weak to be the arbiter of its own fate — and too closely emmed in by mightier nations , not to feel every shock which agitated them. The ebb and flow of its (early) political vicissitudes swept away most of its (earlier) national traditions. Of all the Teutonic branches the Nether- landers have preserved the smallest portion of the old po- pular literature." 15. The Alphabet of these Frisons and other Lower Teutonic tribes was a modification of the so called Moeso- Gothic , which was a modification of the Greek ; first introduced from Greece amongst the Goths, the tribe or nation of Eastern Europe and Western Germany, by one Bishop Ulphilas , about 400 years of the Christian era. Ulphilas modified these letters to a form suited to the genius of those rude and warlike people. These letters, in the course of ages underwent other various modifi- cations by the different Teutonic nations, according to the arbitrary whims of the writers, and the nature of the materials on which they wrote. Next followed the universal adoption of the Roman character , which is also a modification of the Greek , and the Greek is a modification of the Phoenician, which XX INTRODUCTION. is admitted to be the most ancient written language known. When the Romans made their alphabet , is not satisfactorily ascertained, but was probably two or three centuries before the Christian era. There are no documents remaining of written ancient Frison , nor of any other of the Low Teutonic dialects ; in which particular they remained behind-hand with their neighbors the Moeso-Goths ; however, as has already been adduced , the Salic Law , is supposed to have been written in the Frison dialect, and it is also natu- rally to be inferred that it was written with a Moeso- Gothic character or a modification of it. It was during the dark age between the fall of the Grecian and the Roman empire , and the revival of learning in Europe in the thirteenth century, that the adoption of the Roman character throughout Western Europe superceded the Gothic, and became general. Owing to the turbulent state of society in that period , little attention was paid to literature , and that little was exclusively confined to the Christian Clericals and their disciples , when all the writing that was made, was in Latin, with a Roman character, first on parchment, and later, on paper which was brought into use in the fourteenth century. Johannes Amerbach , a celebrated swiss printer of Bazel , first introduced into these parts the adoption of the present ROMAN and ITALIC LETTERS, about the commencement of the sixteenth century. Aldus Manutius , a printer at Venice , invented the ITALIC CHARACTERS, and from these are formed the pre- sent writing characters , which are the Roman altered to admit of being more easily and conveniently joined. The present German characters , and Modern Gothic , and so called Old English, are all more modern modifications of the ancient Gothic of Ulphilas which appear some- what to resemble the Phoenician , the alphabet of the Shemetic languages or those used by the Hebrews, Chaldeans, etc. The Roman and Italic characters partially continued in use in these parts down to the invention of printing , which has led to a uniformity in the form of these letters, and their universal adoption in Western Europe, and they are not likely to undergo any modifi- cations for the future. INTRODUCTION. XXr 16. The Frisons opposed the domination of the Franks. They remained an independent state about two centuries having the whole extent of the Netherlands under their dominion, but were subdued about 794 , by Charlemagne who , having made himself sovereign of the nations of the western continent of Europe, favored and encouraged the language of the Franks, it being that spoken by a great portion of his subjects. After the decease of this monarch the language of the Franks continued to be in favor with the court of France , for a considerable period. Under the reign of CHARLES-LE-CHAUVE it gave way for the ROMANA RUSTICA or LINGUA ROMANA , a dia- lect of the south of France , derived principally from the Greek and Latin. 17. Charlemagne, in the year 798, caused a collection of the common laws of the Frisons to be made, which collection exists at this day under the name of LEX FRI- SIONUM. These laws were originally written in Low Teutonic, as is proved by the laws themselves, though there are no existing copies of them in this language. The intestine wars , which agitated and ravaged the countries of Europe during a series of years , swept away the productions of science. 18. After the death of Charlemagne his empire became divided among his successors; and the Feudal lords or Counts rendered their estates hereditary. The Northern division of the Neth erlands , which then formed a part of Higher Lorraine , fell under the domin- ion of Thierry who assumed the title of Count of Hol- land and Zealand , and Lord of Friesland. This dynasty continued till the end of the thirlheenth century, when it was transferred to the House of Hainault, which conti- nued till the middle of the fourteenth century, when the governement of Holland was transferred to the Empe- ror Lewis of Bavaria. This dynasty ended with the death of Jaqueline in 1436. After the death of Jaqueline the government of Holland was resigned to John of Burgundy. The Burgundian dynasty continued till the death of Mary, only daughter and successor of Charles , surnamed the Rash. Mary married with Maximilian of Austria, and, on her death, the House of Austria succeeded the dynasty of Burgundy. Philip II of Austria married the daugh- XXII I N T R D U C T I N. ter of Ferdinand King of Arragon and Castile, in 1494; whereby the Netherlands became united to the Spanish dominions. The Spanish dynasty ended with the peace of Muoster in 1648, when the Provinces of Friesland, Holland , Zealand, Utrecht, Gelderland, Overijssel , and Groningen , raised themselves into the Republick of the Seven United Provinces , under the dynasty of the House of Nassau, with the title of Stadtholder. North-Brabant, and Limburg, were added subsequently. 19. Some laws successively promulgated in Friesland, about the end of the tenth century , were collected into a Code in the beginning of the thirteenh century, by one Sicranda. These laws belong to the flourishing period of the Frisons, about which time the country extending from the Weser to Ostend was known under the name of Friesland. Some of these laws were made at a very remote period , and previous to the time of Charlemagne , and even some of them seem to have existed previous to the Salic Law. Though this Code was not written entire- ly in the dialect of the Franks, still , the collection made under the name of the LEX FRISIONUM is met with throughout. 20. There are many proofs that this Frison dialect was a language generally and extensively cultivated du- ring several centuries. Ethelbert, an Anglo-Saxon King, and descendant of Hengist, who reigned over Kent in Great Britain about the end of the sixth century, during his reign , caused a code of laws to be drawn up, men- tion of which is made in the annals of Savilian. This code has a remarkable analogy to that of the LEX FRI- SIONUM ; and the language is the Frison dialect of the fourteenth century; so that there can be no doubt but that this Frison was the language of the court of Ethelbert, and leads to the conclusion that it was the language spoken by those northern invaders of Britain, called Angle-Saxons, but who, with much probability, were for the most part Frisons, with their neighbors the Angles, and Anglo-Saxons. 21. The most ancient existing documents of the Nether- lands Teutonic dialect , which is now the language of the Netherlands, is a map of Brussels of the year 1229, and another of Middleburg of 1254. The language employed in these documents is pure, harmonious, and of an entire ] X T It D U C T I N. XXIH formation. On a comparison of the language of these two documents with the language spoken at present in Hol- land and Belgium , the former will be found to differ more from them, in its orthography, than the latter. About this time, 1254, King William, Count of Holland and Zea- land issued a proclamation to the citizens of Middleburgh, on the Island of Walcheren. All Government orders of this nature had been previously written in Latin. This and a charter of Brussels A. D. 1229, are the most ancient written documents of this nature extant, and the lan- guage will be found to differ little from that which is spoken in the Flemish Provinces at this time. Copy of the Charter of Brussels A. D. 1229. 2[c Ifeinrie fit her gratten <8>atb§ Xfertagge ban 25ra- nant/ <£nbe ift Ifetnric snn cubfte mm ini baen ucont hit ggefccifte alien bengencn hie ntt sun en hie nafca- menbe sun/ bat hit abcrmib3 braeben rabe onfc^ man- nen en bee preucnen en bee gef tannic ban 23mefele m)tn caren gefificn gefet fiinnen 23rttcfelc fit traitinen enbe fit tttt aii|\: manne enbe gemeenieec ben caerteren ban 25ruefelc ^efen care te gauben am gemeine arfiare enbe barbane mee^ in bese manierem Modern Dutch. Ik Hendrik , bij de gratie Gods , Hertog van Braband , en ik Hendrik, zijn oudste zoon , wij doen u weten dit geschrift aan al degenen , die nu zijn , en die nakomende zijn , dat wij , ten gevolge van den wijzen raad onzer man- nen en der schepenen en der gezworenen van Brussel , deze keuren hebben gezet binnen Brussel , door trouw en door eede onzer mannen , en gemeenlijk de Poorteren (Burgers) van Brussel deze keuren te houden tot alge- meen nut en voortaan meer op deze wijze. Literal Translation. I , Henry , by the grace of God , Duke of Brabant , and I, Henry , his eldest son , we make (to) you known this wri- ting to all those who now are , and who are to come , XXIV INTRODUCTION. that toe , in consequence of the wise counsel of ovr men , and of the sheriffs , and of the sworn of Brussels , have es- tablished these statutes , in Brussels , through the fidelity and oath of our men, and commonly the burghers of Brussels , to keep these statutes , for general use , and for the future more in this wise. Charter of Leiden A. D. 1294. W# jflorcn^/ a5rabc ban Hatlanbt/ ban ^elant/ enbe Here ban Brieslanb mafcen cont alie ben gQenen / tie befen Brief Mullen £ien/ of jjaren iefen / bat itu geu- fien ggegQeben ifttttggere tien ^enmaftere/ enbe Ifon- ftanfe §imn urobe^/ berbgaff margljen^ Xant>i in egfjin- baem/ bi lignjjen altenast be^ 25urt§ ban %eiben/enbe bat bnrfeibe Xanb gebet Daniel ban ben l^atbe guite gfjefefjonben / a(^ bat gn 't gelb ban on^ te lene* aBgeggeben airmen fcjjrtbet bite enbe negljentig* Literal Translation. We Florens , Count of Holland , of Zealand , and Lord' of Friesland , make known to all those who will see this let- ter , or hear it read , that we have given to Rutghere the Shoemaker , and Constance Ms brother , two and a half acres of land , in possession , which lie nearest the castle of Leiden , and this aforesaid land has Daniel van den Warde given up , so as he held it from us in fief. Given , as men date , four and ninety. From the foregoing sketch of the Origin and Progress of the Frison , showing it to be a dialect of the Lower Teu- tonic , it is also rendered obvious , that this, in common with the Lower Saxon , Frankish , and Batavian , was the indigenous language of the Low countries or Netherlands ; the dialects of the neighboring nations , flowing into it ac- cording as the inroads of one on the other, gave rise to an intermixture of the people and their respective dialects. The present language of the Netherlands is allowed to be the most perfect of any of the Teutonic dialects. 22. After the fall of the Grecian and Roman Empires, » those two great theatres of human glory , " about the INTRODUCTION. XXV end of the fourth century of the Christian era , succeed- ed the Gothic Age, so called from those rude and war- like people the Goths and Vandals, the latter compre- hending the ancient inhabitants, the Kimbrian or Scan- dinavian nations of the North of Europe. This so called age continued for the space of a thousand years. These Goths and Vandals, under their leader Alaric , A. C. 410 having expelled the Roman invaders from their territories, pursued them to the very seat of their empire , overpowerd the city of Rome , annihilated her institutions and government, and spread devastation over the wide extent of her vast dominions. With the fall of the Roman Empire , Lite- rature , and the Arts and Sciences , ceased to be cul- tivated in Europe ; and a state of predatory warfare and barbarism succeeded an advanced stage of civilization. During this period some remains of learning were indeed retained, and partially cultivated by the devotees of Christianity ; but from the rude and agitated state of the politics of those times , all the learning was confined to the precincts of their monastaries ; it is to these cleri- cals that we are indebted for the preservation of most of the productions of the learning of the Greeks and Romans. 23. In the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries , learning again revived in every state of Europe ; since which pe- riod , these nations , particularly England , France , Ger- many , and the Netherlands, have produced men of learn- ing and genius equal to those of antiquity. The inven- tion of the art of printing , by Laurens Koster of Har- lem, in the fifteenth century, contributed in a remarkable degree to the promotion of learning and the diffusion of knowledge throughout every part of the civilized world. Mr. Bowring , an elegant writer as well as a man of much literary taste and judgment , makes the fol- lowing judicious remarks on the character and opinion of the Dutch, as inserted in the FOREIGN QUARTERLY REVIEW for April 1829: » The susceptability of the Dutch who are , according to common parlance , natu- rally cold and phlegmatic to the opinions of others, and their disposition to avail themselves of every testimony which they imagine will serve to set their literary cha- racter right with the world, have led them to cling with XXVI INTRODUCTION wonderful tenacity to the sometimes indiscreminating praises of a few writers who have , as they think , ho- nored them with particular notice. The fact is simply this , that the Dutch have paid their fair and full contri- bution to the great intellectual treasury. They have paid it in their own way , and with their own. It is not that this merit has been denied them — but inquiry respec- ting it has seldom been made — the Dutch people only require to be better known in order to be more highly thought of." Of the few works in the English language on the Dutch language and literature , we only know of the three following : John Bowring's BATAVIAN AN- THOLOGY : Bosworth's ORIGIN OF THE DUTCH : and the Essay above quoted which first appeared in the Foreign Quarterly and has been subsequently reprinted in Hol- land ; these three little works are interesting for the facts and opinions developed on the subject. Of Dutch gram- mars , in the English language , we know of two only that are worth mentioning : Van der Pijl's DUTCH GRAMMAR , Dort : and Hazendonks DUTCH GRAMMAR , London. Of DUTCH AND ENGLISH DICTIONARIES, the first published was compiled by W. Sewell , 2 Vols. 4°. Amsterdam, 1670. Next followed Holtrop's , 2 Vols. 8<>. Blusse and van Braam , Dort , which is the most elabo- rate and the best that has yet appeared. Other works of this nature , in a more or less compressed form, have subsequently appeared , the best of which are, Bomhoff's DUTCH AND ENGLISH DICTIONARY, 2 Vols. 12. Thieme Nymegen; and that of Hazendonk, in 1 Vol. 12. London. 24. The language which is at present spoken throughout the Old or Northern Netherlands , and known under the name of the DUTCH LANGUAGE , differs somewhat from that spoken by the Belgians, which is known by the name of tbe FLEMISH LANGUAGE; this difference will be recognized on a comparison of the specimens of the writers of the thirteenth century to the present time; and. the change in the two languages will be found to have been chiefly produced about the commencement of the sixteenth century, in consequence of a change in the politics of the Northern and the Southern Division of these provinces. 25. There are met with in the Netherlands, as in all INTRODUCTION. XXVII other countries , provincial dialects differing more or less from!} the language spoken and received as that of the people at large , and which is the language of the Court , the Metropolis , and the Learned. The dialect of the peasantry of the province of Friesland partakes more of the ancient Frison , whilst that of the peasantry of Guelderland and Overijssel retains much of the an- cient Low-Saxon intermixed with the Modern Dutch ; the dialect of the Southern provinces of Belgium bordering on France becomes mixed up of Flemish and French , and constitutes what is now known under the name of the Walloon , a French paiois. 26. Here follows a list of men of learning and ge- nius of this country , who have distinguished themselves by their literary writings , and purity of language ; from which it will be seen that Holland , taking into consid- eration her small extent of territory and her popula- tion , is not behind any of her neighbors in the pro- duction of men of learning , either in point of number or measure of genius. THE THIRTEENTH CENTURY. Jakob van Maerlant, a Flaming, surnamed the father of Netherlands literature, born in 1235, died about 1300. His works consist of Rymbybel, Historia Scholastica of Comestor; Spieghel Historiael, Universal History; der Na- tueren Bloeme , Natural History ; Wapene Martyn and Ver- keerde Martyn, dialogues between Jacob and Martin. Maerlant frequently refers to earlier Netherlands poets, but their works have not been handed clown to us. Melis Stoke, a Hollander, lived in the latter part of this century ; Rymchronyk , history of the events of his own time. Gheraert Lienhout , or Broeder Gheraert , Natmir- kunde des Heelals , treatise on physics and natural history. Jan van Heelu , Rymchronyk , being a history of John I , Duke of Brabant. The writings of J. van Maerlant are the earliest authentic literary productions in the languages of the Netherlands, the following specimen exhibits the style and spelling of that period. XXVIII INTRODUCTION. €nbe amtrat it diamine fien Mti gaeoej Ifjerte fiitiaic gen/ 3£ie tiit ^ietfdje *Mcn iefen / 3£at £i mn£ genafciidj hiefen; €noe lefen gin in ^amicjj inaart/ ^at in §££ itf 0nn;e5aart/ jl&en maet om tie rime £on&en Migfeltikz tougge in ftonnen. irc Modern Dutch. En daar ik een Flamender ben, bid ik hen die dit Hollandsch zullen lezen , dat zij genadig zijn jegens mij ; en als zij lezen eenig woord dat bij hen ongehoord is, men weet , dat om aan den rijm te komen , men moet zoeken gemengde taal in boeken. Translation. And as I am a Flaming , I graciously pray those ivho may read this Dutch , that they be merciful unto me ; and if they read any word which they have not (before) heard , (it is that J we must seek in books for a mixed language to get at the ryme. The following is a specimen of the same century, from Melis Stoke. Mtn £cgreef htt3ent ^ebenticg en sef e %U ^ieoeric gatioe grate tengjjene^fe/ 3£at lantr te jjeboene ineoe^ aigahe^/ ^at grabe jf taren^ mas £nnsr baoer* In Modern Dutch. Men schreef in (het jaar) duizend zes en zeventig , dat Die- derick zeer verlangde terug te hebben al het land dat hoorde aan den Graaf Florens zijnen vader. Translation. They write in one thousand and seventy six (1076) that Thier ry ^ a 9 re at desire to have all that land back which belonged to Count Florens his father. INTRODUCTION. XXIX The writers afore-mentioned are the only ones whose productions have been handed down to us, though van Maerlant frequently refers to earlier poets, but of these no M. S. remains, with, however, the exception of the celebrated poem Reinaert de Vos , one of the most po- pular works ever published ; who the author of this poem was does not appear to be indisputably established , but is generally allowed to have been Willem van Utenhoven, a Flemish priest. It was written about 1230, in the Flemish of that century, and of which M M. S S. are still in existence, one of which is at Stuttgardt, another at Antwerp, and another in England. THE FOURTEENTH CENTURY. 27. In this century the productions of literature are still scant, whilst the orthography will be found to be much the same as that of the former. In this century lived : Lodewijk van Velthem, a Flemish priest. Spieghel Historiael, being a continuation of van Maerlant's Uni- versal History, down to 1316. Niclaes de Klerk, who wrote Brabandsche Geesten, being a history of the Dukes of Brabant; born in 1280, died in 1330. Johannes Dekens. Dietsche Doctrinael , a didactic poem on morals. Hendrik van Aken, Hoe dichteren dichten selen, a poem on the art of poetry. Claes Willems. Der Minneloep , an erotic poem. Down to this period the works of all the fore-mention- ed writers were written in verse. 3£ien oese ftmeroen niet en gfjenaeggen ^ie mag gem tanneren ?aften traeggen/ €n laten nit liet onggefanggen/ 3£ae? en i£ nnemant toe ggcahtanggen (Ce ie£en fcinggen Die gi taect; €n £efte? tae^ ic gefiue ggemaeftt 3£at£ apt berficteren al ggenaen SPeggeenre tie gem fiet netflaen. Claes Willemz. XXX INTRODUCTION. In Modern Butch. Hij (aan) wien deze woorden niet genoegen (doen) mag zich tot andere zaken voegen , en laat dit lied onge- zongen , daar niemand gedwongen is iets te lezen dat hij laakt, en inderdaad lietgene ik gemaakt heb is gedaan om verbeterd te worden door diegene die net beter verstaan. Translation. He whom these ivords do not please may apply himself to other matters , and leave this song unsung, as no one is forced to read things wMch he contemns, and indeed what I have made , is made to be improved by those who better under- stand it. THE FIFTEENTH CENTURY. 28. This century was also barren of literary interest, the Netherlands at this time being much oppressed by civil wars. It was at this period that the Kamers der Rede- rijkers , Chambers of Rhetoricians , were first instituted , suggested from habits of association , and from the existence of like institutions in France. Philips de Schoone was a member. However, from a passion for foreign literature which prevailed at this time , they introduced a number of words from the French, and rather corrupted the language and injured the taste of the people, than improved the one or the other. It was at the close of this century that a Dutch translation of the Old Testament from the Vulgate was made , and is a specimen of purity of language ; the first edition was printed at Delft , in 1477. The discovery of the art of printing by Laurens Jansz. Roster of Haarlem, was also made in this century, which must be considered as an important event in the history of literature. The following writers belong to this period: R. Agricola, born in Groningen , in 1455, died in 1485. Poetry. Hendrik van Alkmaar, made a collection of fables. A. de Rouere. Chronyk van Vlaandren, history of Flan- ders; Rhetoricale Werken, poems on various subjects. INTRODUCTION. XXXI Willem de Weert. Die nieuwe Doctrinad and Spiegel van Sonden, being- poems on morals. Jacob Vilt. Poetry. The following is a specimen from one of the above writers. jH&aa^ ggeen (&fe?) en ejjfo & at rEC B t ^ saanbe/ 3£an be menfcjje/ tiie upinacct geeft tfiaanbe 3£e litjcgaem recgt ten gcmeitaaert ^taenbe/ 3£u3 tnaert taet recgt bat in gem fiacnue qSbenein^/ oat gem altaaf? betmaenbe ^nn ggebrec: £0 bat gn bat £paenbe* Jacob Vilt. In Modern Dutch. Maar er is geen dier , dan de mensch , dat regt gaat, en dat het ligchaam regt opwaarts staande houdt naar den hemel, dus het ware goed dat gepeins ontstond bij hem, dat hem altoos vermaande van zijn gebrek, zoo dat hij het spaande. Translation. But there is no animal that walks erect except man , who holds his body standing erect towards heaven. Thus it was indeed good that reflection arose in him , which always admo- nished him of his defects, so that he weaned himself of them. THE SIXTEENTH CENTURY. 29. We are now arrived at an important epoch in the lan- guage and literature of this country ; a comparison of the number of writers in this century , with that of the three previous ones, will prove what a considerable advance- ment must have been made. The bursting forth of the reformation , the throwing off of the dependance of the Netherlands on Spain, and the consequent division of them into two states , gave rise to the existence of two distinct sects and nations , under the denomination of the DUTCH or NETHERLANDS REPUBLIC OF THE SEVEN UNITED PROVINCES, and that of FLANDERS or THE FLEMISH PROVINCES. This separation led to the formation of a XXXII INTRODUCTION. new orthography and construction of the language , dif- fering more and more in progress of time from that of the Flemish, as will be exhibited in the specimens which follow. In 1574, the University of Leiden was established. Here follows a list of the most eminent writers of this century : Anna Byns , surnamed the Brabant Sappho , born at Antwerp in 1520. Referynen , poems on various subjects. Matthys de Casteleyn. Const van Rhetoriken , a trea- tise on poetry. Edewaerde de Deene , Waarachtige Fdbulen der dieren , being a collection of fables. Jan Fruytiers. Christelyke Onderwysinghe and Eccle- siasticus , being sacred poems ; Korte Beschrymnghe , enz. being an account of the siege of Liege in 1574. Philips van Marnix , van St. Aldegonde. Byenkorf, the bee-hive, a satire; Davids Psalmen, the Psalms of David; Vriendelyke Vermaninghe and Trouwe Vermaninghe , exhor- tations to his country-men. Jan Baptist Houwaert. Pegasides plyn en Lusthof der Maegden , an erotic poem ; Onderwysinghe , a moral poem ; De vier Uiterste van den dood , an elegy. Karel van Mander. Levens der Schilders, lives of pain- ters ; der grondt der edel vrye schilderkonst , a treatise on the art of painting ; de Olyfberg and de harpe of des her- ten snarenspel, being sacred poems. Dirk Volkert Coornhert , born in 1574, Gebruyk en misbruyk van tydelyke have , a moral poem. Roemer Visscher , surnamed the Martial of Holland , born in Amsterdam 1547 , died 1620. Anna Visscher, born in Amsterdam, 1584, died 1 651. Poetry. Maria Tesselschade Visscher , sister of Anna Visscher. Poetry. Hendrik Laurentz Spieghel , born in Amsterdam, 1549, died 1612. Hertspieghel , being a collection of didactic poems and elegies. Cornelis Kiliaan , born in 1537, at Duffel in Brabant , died in 1607 ; author of a Latin and Dutch Dictionary. In this century lived also the Theologian Erasmus ; the learned Vossius, and Arminius, who wrote in Latin only. The following are specimens of the Flemish and of the Dutch language of this century. INTRODUCTION. XXXIU <£en cleen ganbeftin toufbe 3nn meester enb $eece/ aBuitjlteertebe met bnfifielen feeere/ 3£anfenbe/ fnriimjjenbe 3^2 nlnfant/ $n fireefct/ cutfte/ leete/ en txaetelbet feere. Edewaerd de Deene. In Modern Dutch. Een klein hondje toefde zijnen meester ea heer , net kwispelstaartte met dubbelden keere , dansende en sprin- gende zeer aardig ; hij streek net , kuste , lekte , en troe- telde het zeer. Translation. A little dog amused his lord and master, he wagged his tail from side to side , dancing , and jumping very prettily; he stroked it , kissed , licked , and fondled it very much. The following is a specimen from a North Netherlan- der of this same century. Wat fiaet gem '£ merely brnfjeib bfens 3iel isl seficmben dEet bun^ent aenclebenbe baotlmte £anben * Wat ^dja'et aa% be cncfce 3ief be£ licgaem^ uanben* c Biet ; gu nranrt met snn mttitni clun^ter^ eerintfc/ Mtti ban menigg 3at met fteten£ ban gout negeerlncfe / 3£er bcamen fionen£ eeren gun /ben banger tat ^cganbem Dirk Volkertz. Coornhert. In Modern Dutch. Wat baat des werelds vrijheid aan hem wiens ziel is gebonden met duizend aanklevende doodelijke zonden? Wat schaadt 00k der rijke ziel des ligchaams banden? Niets ; hij pronkt eerlijk met zijn meesters kluisters, meer dan meenig zot met ketens van begeerlijk goud , de boeijen der vromen eeren hen, den vanger tot schande. Translation. What avails the liberty of the world to him ivhose soul is bound with a thousand cleaving mortal sins? tohat also do the XXXIV INTRODUCTION. hands of the body injure the rich soul? Nothing; he shows off, honored with his master's fetters more than many fool with chains of coveted gold , the fetters of the pious honor them, to the shame of the imprisoner. THE SEVENTEENTH CENTURY. 50. We now leave the Flemings and the Flemish language, it being in this century that the Netherlanders, intirely threw off their allegiance to the King of Spain, and erected themselves into the REPURLIC OF THE SEVEN UNITED PROVINCES, and appropriated to themselves a govern- ment, new laws, manners, and customs, and in short, a new language, which is no other than the Flemish modified to their own notions and views; it is this language, the DUTCH, the language of the North Netherlanders, that we shall now exclusively treat upon. It was Peter Cornelis hooft , who , after having travelled through France and Italy, and acquired a perfect mastery over the language of the Netherlands, laid the foundation of the present Dutch language. Here follows a list of the brightest Dutch literati of this century. Jan de Rrune, born 1585, died 1658. Poetry. Laurens Reale , born at Amsterdam in 1583 , died 1 637.— Poetry. Gerbrandt Rrederode , born at Amsterdam in 1585 , died 1618. — Poetry. Dirk Rafael Kamphuizen, born at Gorkum in 1586, died 1626. — Poetry. Pieter Cornelis Hooft, surnamed the Dutch Taci- tus, born at Amsterdam in 1581 , died in 1647. Ne- derlandsche Historien, a History of the Netherlands; Gheraardt van Velzen and Bato , tragedies; Granida, a drama. Joost tan VoiNdel , surnamed the prince of Dutch poets , the Shakespeare of Holland , born at Cologne in 1587, died 1679. Author of tragedies, odes, satires, and other poems. Jacob Cats , surnamed the modern Ovid , born at Brou- wershaven in 1577, died 1660. Didactic poetry, Tales, Fables, etc. Jakob Westerbaan , bom in 1590, died 4670. Poetry. INTRO)) II C T I N XXXV Anna Maria Schuurmans, born at Cologne in 1607, died 1678. She spoke fluently ten languages, ancient and modern. Jan Krul, born in 1602, died 1644. Poetry. Jeremias de Decker, born at Dordrecht in 1609, died 1666. Lof der Gierigheid, the Praise of Avarice, a satire; besides which he made some epigrams and elegies. Jan Vos, born at Amsterdam in 1620, died 1662. Poetry. Emanuel vanMeteren, born at Antwerp in 1535 , died 161°. Wrote a History of the Low countries and nations bordering upon them. Daniel Jonktjjs, born — died 1654. Poetry. Daniel Heins , born at Ghent in 1510, died 1655. Litera- ture and Poetry, known also as a Latin writer by the name of Heinsius. Kasper van Baerle, born in 1584, died 1648. 2 Literature and Poetry ; known also as a Latin writer by the name of Barlaeus. Konstantijn Huijgens , born at the Hague in 1596, died 1687. Koornbloemen, consisting of moral poems and sa- tires; Sneldichten , Epigrams. J. Antonides van der Goes , better known by the name of d'Antonides , born at Goes in 1647, died 1684. Bellona aan Band, Bellona in Fetters, an ode; Be Ystroom, the River Y, an epic poem; Trazil, a tragedy. Thomas A rents. — Poetry. Katharina Lescaille , born at Amsterdam in 1649, died 1711. Lijkrede op de Ruiter , an Elegy on the death of admiral de Ruiter. Johannes Vollenhoven , surnamed Guldenmond, golden mouth, born at Vollenhoven in 1631., died 1708. Leerrede- nen, sacred discourses; Mengeldichten , poems on miscella- neous subjects. Reinier Anslo, born at Amsterdam in 1622, died 1669. Poetry. Geraerdt Brandt, born at Amsterdam in 1626, died 1685. Historie der Reformatie, History of the Reformation; Leven van de Ruiter, van Hooft, van Vondel, Life of de Ruiter, of Hooft, and of Vondel. Huig de Groot, better known by the name of Grotius, born at Delft in 1585, died 1645. Theology and Poetry; also celebrated as a Latin author in Jurisprudence. "'XXXVI INTRODUCTION. Lucas Rotgans, born at Amsterdam in 1654, died 1710. Willem de Derde, William III of Orange Nassau, an epic poem; de Boere Kermis, the Fair, an heroic comic poem ; Scylla , ^Eneas , and Turnus , tragedies. Jan van Heemskerk, born at Amsterdam in 1597, died 1656. Poetry. The following specimens will exhibit the Dutch Ortho- graphy of this period, which will be found to differ from that of the present century in these particulars; l . the final t is used for d , as in uitgezondert for uitge- zonderd , excepted; 2. the y for i and ij; as in heymelyke y for heimeUjk :, secret; 3. the aa, ee, oo for the long a, e, o final; as in, verstaaken for verstaken , stopped, onwee- tend for onwetend , ignorant; oopen for open, open; 4. the h after g; and the z for s; as in, zommighen for sommigen, some; 5. y was used for ie , as in yder , for £e$er, every. Het arm ooweetend volk (weenigen uitgezondert die ongerust in de Spaansche trouw, zich hier en daar, aan heymelyke oorden, verstaaken) vergaadert in 't Raadthuys; de Spanjaarts claar voor : en zag men zeekeren Geestely- ken, met zommighen van hun, al een wyl, op en needer wandelen. Deez , toen alles te hoop (gekomen) scheen, komt der weerlooze troepe verkundighen , dat zy veygh waa- ren , en op hun gewisse te denken hadden. Maar het aanzeggen, bearbeyden, en sterven, was een ding. Men rukt de groote poort oopen; leydt eenpaarlyk aan, en schiet af , plompverlooren in 't hondert ; met een gillen en schreeuwen , dat yder 't hart deed sluyten , en de haairen te bergh staan. Dat wort , by die van binnen schichtigh beantwoort , met een kryten en kermen, zuch- ten en janken, om steen en staal te vermurwen. Wer- waarts ook zy zich keeren , de wanten staan pal , en de doodt in de deur. Voorts vlieght de vyandt, tot het kerkjen in , als verwoede wolven , den tsaagenden drom , met deeghens en daggen, op 't lyf. — En werden alzoo omtrent vierhonderd burghers, booven een goedt getal soldaaten, onder een dak, om hals geholpen. P. C. HODFT. Translation. The poor ignorant people (few excepted , who having no confi- I N T RODUCTIO N. XXXVif deuce in the faith of the Spaniards, concealed themselves here and there in secret comers) , assembled in the council-house ; the Spaniards there before it; and there was seen a certain cler- gyman , with some of them , for a time , walking up and down. The former, when they were gotten together, comes and announces to the defenceless croud , that they are in danger, and must think of their consciences. But to an- nounce, to prepare, and to perish, was a matter. They force open the great door; level (their muskets) at the croud, and fire , at random ; with a screaming and crying , that every heart ceased to beat, and their hairs stood on end. That was frightfully answered by those inside, with a weeping and groaning, sighing and howling, that it was enough to melt stone and steel. Whithersoever they turn, the ivalls are fixed, and death is at the door. Then the enemy rushes into the chapel , like raging tuolves , sword and dagger in hand , upon the bodies of the screaming multitude. — And there were about four hundred citizens , besides a great number of sold- iers, killed under one roof. The Seventeenth Century is considered as the Augustan age in the history of the Literature of the Netherlands. This age, says the learned Professor Siegenbeek, » was so glorious to the Dutch nation that it would be difficult to discover in the history of any other people , a period of such resplendent fame and greatness. " THE EIGHTEENTH CENTURY. 31. In this century many men of learning and genius appeared. Slight or no changes were made in the ortho- graphy in this period , the language remaining, for the most part , as modified by Hooft , and continued so to the adoption of the spelling fixed by Siegenbeek, at the commencement of the present century. Here follows a list of the most eminent writers. Jan van Broekhuizen , born 1649, died 1707. Poetry. Lambert ten Kate, born at Amsterdam in 1674, died 4 732. Aenleiding tot de kennis van het verhevene deel der Nederlandsche sprake , Introduction to the knowledge of the sublime of the Dutch language. Hubert Kohnelisz. Poot , born at Abswoude near Delft in 1689, died in 1735. Veldzangen, pastorals; De Moan by Endymion ; De Verlicfdc Venus , amorous poems. XXXVIII INTRODUCTION. Elizabeth Kolaert-Hoofman. Schouwbnrg der ver woes- ting , an elegy on the instability of wordly affairs. Arnold Hoogvliet , born at Vlaardingen in 1687 , died 1765. Abraham de Aartsvader , the Patriarch Abraham f an epic poem. Lukretia van Merken , born at Amsterdam in 1722 , died 1789. Nut der Tegenspoeden , a moral poem on the advan- tages of adversity ; David and Germanicus , epic poems ; Beleg van Leyden , a tragedy. Pieter Langendyk, born at Amsterdam in 1685, died 1756. The Drama ; author of several comedies. Simon Styl , born at Harlingen in 1751 , died 1804. Op- komst en Bloei der Nederlanden , a philosophical view of the origin and prosperity of the Netherlands ; also a lyric poem on the same subject; de Myteleners , a tragedy. Justus van Effen , born at Utrecht in 1684 , died 1755. Hollandsche Spectator , Dutch Spectator. B. Huydecoper, born at Amsterdam in 1695, died 1778. Proeve van Taal- en Dichtkunde , Specimens of the Art of Language and Poetry. Willem van Haren, born at Vriesland in 1662, died]i708. Friso, an epic poem; de Vrede , a lyric; Leonidas, an ode. Onno Zwier van Haren , born at Leeuwarden in 1715, died 1779. De Geuzen , The Beggars, a poem. Jan Wagenaar , born at Amsterdam in 1709, died 1775. Vaderlandsche Historic , history of the mother-country from the latest period down to the middle of the 18th century, in 21 Vols. Historic van Amsterdam, History of Amsterdam. J. C. Baroness de Lannoy, born at Breda in 1758, died 1782. Beleg van Haarlem , Leo de Groote , Cleopatra , tragedies ; also some odes , and satires. J. Nomsz , born at Amsterdam in 1758, died 1805. Willem de Eerste , Prim Maurits , epic poems ; Maria van Lalain , and Numa Pompilius , tragedies ; also some comedies. Jacobus Bellamy , born at Flushing in 1757 , died 1786. Vaderlandsche Gezangen , patriotic songs ; amorous poems , and odes. Pieter Nieuwland, born near Amsterdam in 1764, died 1794. Orion , an ode ; an elegy on the death of his wife, and some Anacreontics. Hieronymus van Alphen, born at Gouda in 1746, died I N T K O D U C T I N, XXXIX 1803. Dichtkundige Vcrhandelingen , treatises on poetry ; Schoone Kunsten en wetenschappen , on the theory of the Fine Arts and Sciences ; Gedichten voor kinder en , Poems for Children , the Watts's Hymns of Holland. Van der Aa , born at Zwolle in 17 18 , died 1792. His- tory , and Natural Philosophy. J. D. van Lennep, born at Amsterdam in 1724, died 1 771. Literature ; Philology. J. F. Martinet , born in North-Brabant in 1729 , died 1794. Natural History; Physics. Dirk Suits, born at Rotterdam in 1702, died 1752. Poetry. The following is a specimen of one of the prose writers of this century. Ons Land , alom doorsneden met wateren , rivieren , poelen , en meiren , krielt , waar men zich wende , van kleine vaartuigen , waarop de boeren Schippers zyn. Zy onderhouden door dat middel de gemeenschap van alle Sleden, en Dorpen ; en, hoe onmatig deze vergelyking ook inoge schynen , daartoe wordt in verscheidene op- zigten dczelfde vaardigheid , zo niet hetzelfde beleid vereischt , dat men van nooden heeft om op eenen Zee- togt geen nutteloos gezel te zyn. Geen Nederlandsche boer , die ten minsten niet van loeven en laveeren weet ; weinigen , die niet geleerd hebben een vaartuig te be- stieren , te gissen hoe veel winds het voeren kan , tegen wind en stroom te roeien , dwarrelwinden te voorzien , of zich te redden uit een onverwacht gevaar van zinken of vergaan. Velen onder hen, in hunne geboorteplaats deze zaken lang genoeg van tydverdryf en spel byge- woond hebbende , kunnen de verzoeking niet wederstaan, van ook eens op den ruimen Oceaan te zwerven, alwaar zy dan gemeenlyk voor al het overige geene tnge leer- lingen zyn. Ik kan niet nalaten hierby le voegen , dat onze taal ook de kenteekenen draagt van onze gemeen- zaamheid met de zeevaart : vooral onder 't gemeen , en in den dagelykschen wandel is zy voor het grootste deel eene taal van zeelieden. Wy wenden H over dezen of geenen ooeg , zoeken eene ree , iverpen ons anker , klampen elkander aan ooord , haken naar het voonverp onzer be- tjeerte , enz. Wy komen mot erne zee aan land , of dryven XL INTRODUCTION. op Gods genade. Kortom , geen uur op den dag , dat wy niet varen of bezig zyn met ons gety te kavelen. S. Styl. Translation. Our country , everywhere intersected with waters , rivers , pools, and lakes, abounds, withersoever one turns, with small vessels , of which the peasants are captains. By this means they maintain an intercourse between the cities and villages , and , however inconsistent this comparison may seem to be , there is in many respects the same dexterity required if not the same management that is necessary in an experienced shipmate on a voyage. There is not a Dutch peasant who has not learned to steer a vessel , to guess how much wind it can carry, to row against wind and stream, to foresee whirlwinds, or to extricate himself from sudden danger of sinking or per- ishing. Many of them having followed this long enough as pastime and amusement , cannot withstand the temptation , of once roving on the wide ocean, where, in every respect, they are generally clever apprentices. I cannot omit observing by the way that our language bears also the signs of our familiar relations with navigation , particularly with the lower class • and in our familiar intercourse , it is in a great measure a language of navigators. We direct it over this or that bow, seek a |roadstead , cast our anchor , board each other's vessels , hook on to the object of our desires , etc. We come with one sea on shore , or drift at the mercy of God. In short not an hour of the day that we do not go by water , or are busy suiting ourselves to our tide. THE NINETEENTH CENTURY. 32. The following list embraces the most distinguished writers whose works have appeard between the latter past of the eighteenth century and the present time. P. van Winter , born 1745 , died 1807. Poetry. Elias Annes Bqrger, born in Friesland in 1785, died 1820. Theology. Jan Frederik Helmers , born at Amsterdam in 1767, died in 1813. Be Hollandsche Natie , an epic poem ; Bardenzangen , Lyric Poems ; Het Haarlemmer Hout , Har- INTRODUCTION. XLI lem Wood , an elegy ; Lof der Zeevaart , A Eulogy on the Nautical Art. Joan Meerman , born at the Hague in 1753, died 1825. Jurisprudence , Statistics , Literature , History, Biography. Arend Fokke Simonsz. born in Amsterdam in 1755 , died in 1812. Literature , he wrote generally in a satir- ical or numerous style. A. Loosjes , Pz. born at Harlem in 1761 , died 1818. Maurils Lijnslager ; HUlegonda Buisman ; Susanna Bronkhorst, etc. Romances in which the manners and customs of the Dutch, at different periods, are depicted; Jakoba van Beijeren , etc. historical romances. Martinus Stuart , died in 1826. Romeinsche Geschiede- nis , Roman History ; Essays ; Leerredenen , Sermons ; Be Mensch zoo als hij voorkomt , Man as he is Found. D r . van Woensel , Travels in Turkey , Natolia , and The Crimea ; Rusland beschouwd , political economy and manners of the Russians. Haafner , Travels in the East. — C. de Jong , History ; Travels in the Mediterranean and the East. — Rijnvis Feith, born at Zwolle in 1755, died in 1826. De Ouderdom , Old Age ; het Graf, the Tomb, epic poems ; Thirza etc. tragedies; Fanny, etc. romances; odes, treatises. Brieven aan Sophie , a controversy against Kant's doctrine. (Vrouwe) Madam K. W. Bilderdijk, died in 1830. Poetry. Willem Bilderdijk, born at Amsterdam in 1756, died 1831 ; one of the most learned men and one of the most voluminous writers of his time ; his works are com- prised in about 150 volumes 8°. containing poems, essays, history , Dutch grammar , etc. N. G. van Kampen, born at Harlem in 1776, died — Geschiedenis der letteren en wetenschappen , History of Lite- rature and the Sciences ; Lotgevallen der dichtkunst , history of ancient and modern poetry ; over de Heldendichten, essay on epic poetry. J. Kinker, born at Niewer-Amstel in 1764, died in — Wy'sgeerige algemeene Theorie der Talen , General and Phi- losophic Theory of Languages; poems on various subjets: Verlossing en Herstelling van Nederland y Liberation and Restoration of the Netherlands, a lyric poem. XLII INTRODUCTION. J. H. van der Palm, born at Rotterdam in 1763, died 1840. Author of various sermons; Funeral orations, Es- says etc. Nederlands Herstelling , Restoration of the Nether- lands , an essay; he made a translation of the Bible. G. Bruining. Philology. — J. Immerzeel , Jr. , born at Dordrecht in 1776 , died 1841. Poetry; Fiction: Hugo van 't woud, Hugo of the Wood, an elegiac poem; Be Moederliefde , Maternal Love. (Be Vrouwen,) Mesdames Bekker-Wolf en Deken. Willem Levend; Sara Burgerhart ; Cornelia Wildschut, ro- mances; Wandelingen door Bourgondie, a descriptive poem. — H. van Wijn. Historische en Letterkundige Awndstonden , and Huiszittend Leven , criticisms on the history , litera- ture, and customs of the Netherlands. — Samuel Isc. Wiselius, Polydorus; Adelaide en Mathilde: Jon; Alcestes; Malek-Adhel; Prins Karel; tragedies. Het Herder suurtje , the shepherd's hour, an erotic poem. — H. H. Klijn, born at Amsterdam in 1T73. Lyric poems Tragedies; Odes; Elegies. Barend Klijn, Oldenbarneveld ; Heldendood van de Ruiter, Lyric poems; Montigne , a tragedy; Odes : Elegies, etc. Witsen Gysbeek, Literature, Phylology, Poetry. Woor- denboek, Biographical Dictionary; Eer en Eerzucht, Honor and Ambition , a satirical poem ; Epigrams. J. A. Weiland, scribleriana , numerous essays. — Mathijs Siegenbeek, born in Amsterdam 1774. Gram- mar. Verhandeling over de Nederlandsche Spelling, Treatise on Dutch Orthography. Jacobus Scheltema, born atFranekerin 1767. Literature; History; Philology; Staatkvndig Nederland, Biography of Netherlands States-men; Peter de Groote , relation of the residence of Peter the Great in the Netherlands; Rusland en de Nederlanden , the influence of Holland on the civi- lization of Russia; Geschied- en Letterkandig Mengelwerk , Historical and Literary Miscellany. P. Weiland, Phylology; Nederduitsch Taalknndig Woor- denboek, Dictionary of the Dutch language; Nederduitsche spraakkunst , Dutch Grammar. — A. Ypey, Kerkelijke Geschiedenis , History of the Chris- tian church ; Geschiedenis der Nederlandsche Taal en Let- terkunde , History of the Dutch Language and Literature. — Hamaker. — Oriental Literature. — I N T R D U C T I O X. XLI1I M. C. van Hall, born at Vianen in 1768. Literature; Poetry; Translator of Classic Authors. H. Tollens, born at Rotterdam in 1780; one [pf the most popular poets of the day : Lukrelia, a tragedy; Het Gevallen Mtisje, The Fallen Maid; Willem de Eerste , a lyric poem; Minnedkhtjes , erotic poems; Romances and Rallads. An edition of ten thousand copies of his poems in three volumes, was promptly sold among a population s hort of three millions. D. J. van Lennep, born in Amsterdam in 1774, Litera- ture; Poetry. Roos van Dekama, Romance. B. H. Lllofs, born at Zutphen in 1787. Literature; Philology. J. v. d. Hoop, born at Rotterdam. Poetry; died 1841: Poems on various subjects. Isaac da Costa, born at Amsterdam in 1797. Poetry J. M. Kemper, born at Amsterdam in 1776, died 1824; Jurisprudence ; Statistics. C. W. Westerbaan , Literature ; Poetry, died — F. van Teutem, Pulpit Eloquence. Spandauw. — Poetry. Staring van den Wildenborgh. — Poetry. J. Nierstraas. — died — Poetry. Jeronimo de Vries , Geschiedenis der Dichtkimde , History of Dutch Poetry , down to the 18th. century. Loots. — Poetry. Van Walre. — Poetry, died — Warnsink. — Poetry. J. F. Willems, born at Antwerp. Over de Hollandsche en Vlaamsche Schrijfwijzen, on Dutch and Flemish Ortho- graphy. Withlts. — Poetry. Rheinwardt. — Natural History. Temmink. — Natural History. Collot d'Escury , — History ; Hollands roem in Kunsten en Wetenschappen , The Renown of Holland in the Arts and Sciences. A. de Jager, — Philology. Hoeufft , — Philology ; Poetry. Hoeufft, van Heusde ; Hofman-Peerlkavp ; R. F. Tydeman, and others, distinguished as Latin writers. Many more contemporary writers of eminence might XL1V INTRODUCTION. be added to this list , but our limits preclude their insertion. The following extract from an essay by van der Palm who, as already stated, is allowed to be one of the pu- rest prose-writers that Holland has yet produced, will exhibit the state to which the language has arrived , both as to its orthography , and its structure. Er is voor de menschelijkheid geen schooner schouw- spel , dan de val eens Dwingelands. Nooit zag de we- reld er een' grooteren dan Napoleon Buonaparte , nooit eene vernedering gelijk aan de zijne. Gansch Eu- ropa lag aan zijne voeten. Pruissen had in eenen veld- slag alles verloren en beslond slechts door des overwin- naars genade. Duitschland huldigde zijnen verdrukker onder den nieuwen titel van Beschermer; Zwitzerland onder dien van Bemiddelaar. Belgie was reeds vroeg aan Frankrijk gehecht; de Hollandsche gewesten, lang geplaagd en uitgemergeld , waren eindelijk zonder schaam- te ingezwolgen. Gekwetste eer had Deneniarken voor hem gewonnen. Zweden had een' Franschen krijgsman tot de erfenis der Karels en Gustaven geroepen. In Italien werd geene andere magt geeerbiedigd dan de zijne. Oostenrijk, van zijne schoonste Provincien berooft perstte nog het bloed zijner onderdanen in drukkende oorlogschattingen voor hem af , toen het hem eene Prin- ses schonk op zijnen bezoedelden troon in zijn geschonden huwelijksbed. Want de misdaad, door de overwinning bekroond, in oorlogsroem gehuld , boezemde ontzag in, meer dan afgrijzen. Aan haar zich te onderwerpen , s"cheen hetzelfde te zijn, als den verborgen wil des He- mels te eerbiedigen ; haar tegenstand te bieden, gelijke dwaasheid , als tegen Gods bestellingen te kampen. Het was als of door hare hand de Voorzienigheid kroonen uitdeelde, en oude stamhuizen met haren vloek wilde treffen, om nieuwe dynastien in derzelver plaats te scheppen. Translation. There is not for man a more delightful spectacle than the down- fall of a tyrant. The world mver witnessed one greater INTRODDCTIO X. XLV than that of Napoleon Buonaparte , never was there a hu» milicftion like his. All Europe was prostrate before him. Prussia in one campaign had lost all, and existed only at the mercy of the conqueror. Germany paid homage to its oppressor under the new title of Protector ; Switzerland under that of Mediator. Belgium was already at an earlier period joined to France; the Dutch provinces for a long time har- rassed and exhausted, were finally swallowed up in it with- out a blush. Wounded honor had gained Denmark over to him. Sweden had a French warrior chosen to the heritage of the Charlses and the Gustayes. In Italy no authority was re- cognized but his. Austria , deprived of its finest Provinces , pressed out the blood of its subjects for him in heavy war- taxes , when it gave him a princess as partner of his viola- ted throne and dishonored marriage-bed. For crime, crown- ed by conquest , invested ivith military glory , inspired autho- rity, more than detestation. To subject one self to it, appeared to be the same , as doing honor to the hidden will of Hea- ven ; to resist it , was a like folly , it was like contending against God's ordinances. It was as if providence distributed crowns by its hands , and would strike ancient hereditaries with its curse , in order to create new Dynasties in their places. 53. Since the separation of the Northern and Southern provinces of the Netherlands in the middle of the seven- teenth century , down to the present time , the Flemish language and literature has remained stationary, and not more than two or three Flemish works of reputation have appeared in that period. De Ira, The Rage, of the Jesuit de Meijer; Verhandeling over de Nederduitsche Taal en Letterkunde opzigtelijk de Zuidelijke Provincien der Nederlanden , A Treatise on the Netherlands Language and Literature especially the Southern Provinces of the Netherlands , by F. Willems , a Patriotic Fleming. Be- haegel , a Fleming , has written an elaborate Nederduit- che Spraakkunst , Grammar of the Netherlands Language , Bruges, 1830, in which he sometimes exhibits sound pe- netration and reasoning , and developes the mechanism of the language : his criticisms on some of the changes in the Dutch orthography , as fixed by Siegenbeek , are founded on an objection to a deviation from that of the more ancient writers. XLVI INTRODUCTION. The following extract from the last mentioned Flemish work will show how little the present Flemish Ortho- graphy differs from that of the 16th. century , whilst a comparison of it with that of the Modern Dutch will exhibit some of the principal changes which have been made in this particular. Modern Flemish. Den mensch is geboren ora wel te redeneren , alle de pogingcn , welke men tot de opvoeding der kinderen aanwend, moeten de ontwikkeling en verbetering der zielsvermoogens voor doelwit hebben , en men zal hun nooyt redenlyk maaken indien men met hun niet rede- neert. Het grootste heyl welk men aan de jongheyd , en by gevolg aan geheel de maatschappy , kan toebren- gen , is , in het leeren der menschelyke kennissen , eenen leerweg te volgen , welken , niet op eene wilkeurige , maar op eene redeneerende wys voordgaande , het ver- stand der kinderen meer ontwikkele , en hun gewenne van in alle hunne werken volgens de reden te handelen ; hetwelk niet alleen moet invloed hebben op de kunsten en weetenschappen welke het voorwerp hunner veront- lediging zyn , maar zelfs eenen grooten spoorslag weezen kan, om te komen tot het bestendig gel uk , waar voor den mensch geschapen is.. Translation. Man is born to reason rightly , all the means which are employed in educating children must ham for object the de- veloping and improving of the mental faculties, and we shall never make them rational if we do not reason with them. The greatest good which wj can confer on youth , and con- sequently on society , is , in the teaching of human know- ledge , to follow that path which unfolds more and more the understanding of children , not in pursuing an arbitrary but rather a rational manner , and to accustom them to act, in all that they do , according to reason ; which must not only have an influence on the arts and sciences , which is the object of their pursuits , but can even prove to be an impor- tant means of arriving at permanent happiness for which man is created. I N T R D U C T I V. XLVIi 34. During the last forty years much has been done for the improvement of the Dutch language particularly in giving to it a fixed and standard orthography. The institution of a literary society at Leiden under the title of Maatschappij der Nederlandsche Letterkunde , Netherlands Literary Society , has done much in the furtherance of this object ; one transaction of this society was the is- suing of a plan for a Dictionary of the Dutch language, which was carried into execution by M r . Weiland , who adopted a spelling previously laid down by Professor Siegenbeek , in his Verhandeling over de Nederduitsche Spel- ling , Treatise on the Dutch Orthography. This Dictionary received the approbation of the society , and the spel- ling of Professor Siegenbeek became sanctioned and adop- ted by the Dutch Government , by an edict , in 1805 ; and these two works are now universally accepted by the nation at large as standard works of reference for the orthography and structure of the language. 35. The language of the Netherlands compared with the English and most other European languages, is not spoken over a great extent of territory , and is not the mother tongue of more than about six millions of souls; as may be exhibited thus : In Belgium , comprehending the North Western Provinces , the language of which is Flemish 2,500,000. North Netherlands, Modern Dutch 2,800,000. Dutch Colonies . . . , » 700,000. 6,000,000. E R R Jt T *4. ige 13, ine 10, for ceel „ read eel. » 99, 9 20, j> only , » only. » 101, » 3, » moiled , » mollen. » 102, V 24, » travail , » travel. » 112, 9 16, » anounced 9 announced. T> 121, » 24, » be for 9 before. 9 123, » 16, » ingorant » ignorant. 9 128, » 20, » vallued , » valued. » 144, 9 18, » gray » grey. 9 145, 9 20, » do » to do. » 152, 9 23, » vewoestingen , » verwoestingen » 154, 9 4, » dansed » danced. :> 160, » 12, » shange » strange. » 171, 9 1, 9 reheasal 9 rehearsal. DUTCH GRAMMAR -~^s>^c??* Dutch Grammar, Hollandsche Spraakleer, is the art of speak- ing and writing the Dutch language conformable to the practices and prescribed rules of the most eminent learn- ed men of the Dutch nation and as established by the usage and custom of the Dutch at large. Dutch Grammar, like the grammars of other European languages , is divided into Orthography , Etymology , Syn- tax, and Prosody. DUTCH ORTHOGRAPHY. Orthography , klank- en spelkanst , treats of the sounds and powers of letters, and of their combinations into syllables and words. Words or names of things and ideas are conveyed from man to man by modifications of the voice, which is speech, spraak; or by letters combined into written words, as signs for conveying these names from man to man , which is writing , het schrjjven . LETTERS. A letter, eene letter, is the sign or mark used in writing or printing to represent words or the names of things and ideas. The letters of the Dutch language, as at present used in writing and printing, are the same in form as those used by the English, but some of them are differently sounded. l. 2 DUTCH PRONUNCIATION The whole of the letters, twenty six in number , is call- ed the Alphabet, or a. b. c, het alphabet-, these letters are thus formed and sounded: THE ALPHABET. A. a. sounded a as heard in father B, b. » bay » bed. C. c. » say » say. D. d. » day » day. E. e. » a , like e in bed. F. f. » ef, as heard in foot. G. S- » say> see remarks under this letter. H. h. » haa , as heard in hard. I. i. » e, like e in be. J. J- » y a » like y in yelp. K. k. » kaa , as heard in king. L. I. » el » lion. M. m. » em » man. N. n. » en » no. 0. 0. » o » no. P. P. » pay » pay- Q. q. » coo » cooper. R. r. » err » err. S. s. » es » mess. T. t. » tai » tailor. IT. u. » oo » tool. V. V. » vai » vain. W. w. » way see remark s under this letter. X. X. » ecks , as heard m decks. y. y- » i » mine. z. z. » zed » zed. Of these letters , q , x, y, and c uncombined with h , are only met with in some proper names or words ta- ken over from other languages. The letters of the alphabet are divided into vowels and consonants. The vowels, Minkletters, are a, e, i, o, u, representing a simple sound which can be perfectly uttered by itself. The consonants, medeMinkers , which form the remainder of the alphabet, cannot be perfectly uttered without the aid of one of the vowel sounds; as, 5, be; c, ce; f, ef, etc. A N I) ORTHOGK APII V 3 THE SOUNDS AND POWERS OF THE LETTERS. The letters of the Dutch Alphabet, represent, seperate- ly and combined, thirty eight different distinct sounds which may be compared with analogous sounds in En- glish; except those of u, ui, eu, cuw , g, and ch. Every letter , entering into the composition of a word , must be sounded ; as , blad , leaf. THE SOUNDS OF THE SINGLE VOWELS. A. A has a short and a long sound. It is short when placed before a consonant in the same syllable, and is sounded partly like a in cat, and partly like a in malt ; as heard in al all bast bark kat cat bak-ken to bake markt market ark arch. It sounds long at the end of a syllable, and is then like that of a in father; as heard in sla salad ma-ken to make. sta stand ha-len to fetch ra-den to advise la-den to load. E. E has three sounds : a short, a long, and a soft short. It is short when placed before a consonant in the same syllable, and is like the English e in bed; as heard in heb have leg lay pen pen bed bed hen them en and. It is long in words of two or more syllables when the accent falls on it, and sounds then like the English a in make; as heard in he-den to day ve-der feather we-reld world le-der leather me-ten to measure le-zen to read. It has a soft short sound when terminating monosylla- bles, and when terminating a syllabic in words of more than one syllable when the accent does not fall upon it; and it is then sounded like the English e in begin; as heard in DUTCH PRONUNCIATION de the be-ginnen to begin ga-ve gift ze them hit-te heat goe-de good. I has two sounds : a sharp short , and a soft short. It is sharp short when followed by a consonant in the same syllable and is sounded like i short in English; as heard in vinden to find blik tin lid limb in in wind wind zin inclination. Monosyllables ending in i, taking the particle en, require the letter j before the particle ; as lei , a slate , leijen> slates ; kooi , a cage , kooijen , cages. It is soft short at the end of unaccented syllables in polysyllables, and sounds then like the above i short, but is softer; as heard in wijzi-gen to modify aankondi-gen to proclaim l-talie Italy. bezi-gen to use i-voor ivory huldi-gen to install. I has no long sound and never terminates an accented syllable; ij being substituted for the long i. ©• has a short and a long sound : it is short when follow- ed by a consonant in the same syllable and sounds like the short English o in not; as heard in om for mond mouth pond pound mol mole slot lock vol-gen to follow. It is long at the end of accented syllables in words of more than one syllable, and is then sounded like the long o in English, as heard in done; as in bo-ter butter zo-mer summer o-penen to open lo-ven to praise bo-ven above ko-men to come. II. U has a short and a lonp: sound. AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 5 It is short when followed by a consonant in the same syllable , and is sounded like the short English u in hut ; as heard in dun thin vul-len to fill nut use zus-tcr sister hut hut fust cask. It is long when terminating accented syllables in words of more than one syllable, and is sounded like the French u , or German ii , and nearly like the English oo in booty ; as heard in mu-ren walls nabu-ren neighbours vu-ren fires hu-ren to hire du-ren to last ku-ren caprices. SOUNDS OF THE UNITED VOWELS. The double vowels aa , ee , oo, uu , are sounded like the same single vowels when long; however some will have ee and oo sounded sharper than the e and o long; as: Aa , as heard in daad action aal eel slaap sleep raad counsel taal language gelaat face. A syllable never ends in aa ; thus monosyllables in aa , taking a particle , drop one of the a's , and the final con- sonant is carried to the particle, as in daad, da-den; raad, ra-den; aal, a-len. Ee, as heard in been leg veel much deel part neen no tee-ken to draw dee-len to divide. The sound of the ee when spoken sharper than that of long e , is like the English a as sounded in the north of England by the vulgar. Oo , as heard in boot boat voor for dood death nood need noot nut boom tree. The sound of oo, as heard in slooten, ditches, is sounded by some sharper than the o long as heard in sloten , locks. Uu , as heard in rauur wall duur dear huur hire zuur sour be-stuur direction guur sharp. 6 DUTCH PRONUNCIATION A syllable never ends in uu ; in monosyllables in uu , taking a particle , one of the vowels is dropped and the final consonant is carried to the particle; as in muur, mu-ren; vuur , vu-ren , etc. The diphthongs and triphthongs ai, aai, au, aau, eu, eeu, ei , ie , ieu, oe , oei , ooi , ou, and ui , are thus sounded : Ai. This union is only met with in the exclamation ai ! o! and is sounded partly like the English long i and oi. Aai. The sound of this triphthong is a combination of the long Dutch a and short i , being nearly like that of the English long i in idle; as in taai tough zaai-jen to soio fraai pretty kraai croxo kaai quay maai-jen to mow haai shark saai-jet worsted. Au. The sound of au is that of a long and u short com- bined , and approaches to the sound of aw in English ; as in paus pope dau-wel slut au ! oh! Pau-lus Paul kauw jackdaw au-gustus august. Aau. The sound of this triphthong is like that of au lengthened; as in laauw lukewarm gaauw quick maau-wen to mew naauw narrow raauw raw flaauw feint. Ei. The sound of ei is a combination of the sounds of the short e and short soft i, and is nearly like that of i long in English ; as in maid maid- vermei-den to avoid reis journey bei-de both klein small lei-den to suffer. Eu. The sound of eu is a combination of the short sounds of e and u , approaching to the sound of the English u in rule; as in reuk scent leu-nen to lean eu-vel evil deun ballad heu-vel hill heup hip. Eeu. The sound of this triphthong is that of the long e and short u combined ; as heard in sneeuw snow leeuw lion spreeuw starling meeu-wen to mew eeuw century eeu-wen to eternize. AND ORTHOGRAPHY. Ie sound like the long e , as in me ; as heard in iet reed dier animal He-den people iel soul tien ten lie-gen to lie. leu. The sound of ieu is a combination of that of ie and m short ; as heard in nieuw new nieuws news nieu-wigheid newness hieu-wen to cut kieuw gill Oe. Is sounded like the English oo in cool ; as heard in boek book toen then kalkoen turkey doen to do hoek corner bezoe-ken to visit. Oei. The sound of this triphthong is that of oe swerving into that of i soft short ; as heard in foei! fil loei-jen to loio snoei-jen to lop stoei-jen to jest broei-jen to hatch koei cow. Ooi. The sound of ooi is that of oo , and i soft short ; as heard in hooi hay hooi-jen to makehay gooi-jen to throw kooi cage nooit never mooi pretty, Ou sounds like the English on in bound; as heard in oud old zout salt kous stocking hout wood bou-wen to build trou-wen to marry. Ui. The sound of ui is that of the u short swerving into that of soft short i ; as heard in huis house bui-ten without rui-ter horseman muis mouse krui-den herbs vuist fist. THE SOUNDS OF THE SINGLE CONSONANTS. The consonants , b, c, d, f, h , k , I , m , n, p, s, t, v, • and #, in syllables, are sounded in Dutch as in English; though, o, c, d, k, p, t> and v, have in Dutch a different name sound to that in English, as is exhibited in the alpha- bet; however there is no difference in their sounds in syl- lables. 8 DUTCH PRONUNCIATION. The consonants g , j , w, have sounds peculiar to the Dutch language : j being sounded like the y in English , and the sounds of g and w have no analogous sound in English. The consonants are divided into labials, lipletters; Un- guals, tongletters ; dentals, tandletters ; and gutturals, keel- letters , being so named from the organs mainly called into use in their utterance. The labials are those pronounced by the motion of the lips ; as , b, f, m , p , v , w. The Unguals are those pronounced by the motion of the tongue against the palate ; as, d, I, n, r, t. The dentals are pronounced by bringing the tongue to the teeth ; as , s , z , and c sounded soft like s. The gutturals are those whose sounds are formed in the throat ; as , g , k , q , x sounded ks , and c sounded k. Consonants are also divided into soft and sharp : the soft consonants are b, d, g, l t m, n, r, v, w, and z: the sharp consonants are ch, f, h, k , p , s , and t. A consonant, between two vowels, is joined to the latter; as, ba-den, to bathe; mo-gelijk, possible; vroa-wen, women, Monosyllables ending wiih a consonant preceded by a short vowel generally double the final consonant in the plural ; as , bal a ball , batten ; pop a dol , poppen ; klip a rock, klippen; there are however many exceptions to this rule; as, god, deity, goden ; hof, court, hovcn ; slot, lock, sloten, and many others. Two consonants between two vowels are commonly se- parated; as, blik-sem , lightning; don-der, thunder; mor-sig, dirty ; except when the consonants are preceded by a particle ending with a vowel; as , ge-blepen , remained ; be-grip , comprehension. When three consonants come between two vowels in words of two or more syllables, the first consonant remains to the foregoing syllable and the two last to the following ; as , dien-sten , services ; vor-sten , princes. B is sounded bay in the alphabet; but in words it sounds as in English ; as in baard beard bab-belen to babble knab-belen to knaw bed bed be-ker cup rab-belen to rattle. AND ORTHOGRAP II Y. 9 C. C sounds say in the alphabet. In syllables , it has two sounds : hard like k, before a, o, u , and r; soft before e, i t and y; as in Ca-to Cato Cupi-do Cupid ci-der cider commis-saris commissary ce-der cedar Cy-rus Cyrus. e is mute before z in Czar , Emperor of Russia. D sounds day in the alphabet ; but in syllables , it is sounded as in English ; as in dak roof de-ken sheet don-deren to thunder daad action dood death dod-derig drowsy. F is sounded in the alphabet and in words as in En- glish ; as in wolf wolf dof-fer cockpigeon begra-fenis funeral fak-kel torch graf grace flu-weel velvet graaf earl pof-fen to bounce. Monosyllables terminating in f, when inflected, generally change f into v, when the particle begins with a vowel ; as, wolf, wolven; graf, graven; except graaf, grafelijk, like an earl , gravelijkheid, an earldom; graf, begrafenis, a funeral. G is sounded gay in the alphabet; it has a sound more guttural than the hard English g and is produced by draw- ing the root of the tongue still more downwards into the throat ; as heard in goed good be-gin beginning wag-geleu to stagger groot great rege-ring government nut-tigen to use. H is sounded haa, as in the alphabet; in words it sounds as in English and must be always heard ; as in hoed hat he-mel heaven be-handelen to treat helft half hand hand ge-haat hated. 10 DUTCH PRONUNCIATION J. J sounds yay in the alphabet , and in words its sound is analogous to that of y in English ; as in ja yes be-jaard aged jaar year Jan John jui-chen to rejoice be-jammeren to lament. 14. K is sounded kaa in the alphabet, and in words it sounds as in English ; as in kat cat klank sound kik-ker frog kin chin ker-ker prison keu-ken kitchen. L has the same sound as in English , both in the alpha- bet and in words ; as in lang long kal-len to babble stal-len to stall le-ven to live le-lie lilly mal-len to jest. M is pronounced in the alphabet and in words , as in English ; as in mank lame maar but tal-men to loiter melk milk mom mask kam-men to comb. ar. N is sounded as in English , both in the alphabet and in words; as in naad seam bin-nen within wen-nen to accustom neen no dan-ken to thank nooit never. P sounds pay in the alphabet , and in words as in En- glish ; as in pik pitch pen pen pap-pig pappy pa- pier paper po-pel poplar pap pap. AND O UTHOGli A P 11 V. n Q in the alphabet sounds coo , as in cook ; in words , it sounds like k. This letter is only met with in proper names and words adopted from other languages , and even in these words the k is often used instead of it; as in Qua-liteit or kwa liteit quality quad-raat or kwa-draat quadrature quar-to or kwar-to quarto quad-rant or kwa-drant quadrant. R is sounded err , in the alphabet , in words it has al- ways the hard sound of the English r ; as in rijk rich be-daard sedate her-zien to review waar-lijk really waar true har-rewar-ren to wrangle. S is always sounded as in English in the alphabet ; in words it sounds like the sharp English s in sin; as in saai serge muis mouse sis-sen to siss som-tijds sometimes sits chintz lis loop. Words in s final , not doubled in the plural , and when the particle begins with a vowel , the s is then generally changed into z in the plural; as in huis , house, huizen; muis , mouse , muizen ; except kous , stocking , kousen ; and some others. T. T sounds tay in the alphabet , and in words it sounds like t in title ; as in tand tooth tien ten hut hut ten-ger tender stot-tercn to stutter hut-ten huts. V sounds vay in the alphabet, but in words, it is sounded as in English. It is never doubled, and never terminates a syllable ; as in vet fat sto-ven to stew vleesch flesh vro-lijk cheerful vis-scher fisherman ge-vaar danger. 12 DUTCH PRONUNCIATION W. W has a sound between the English w and v , it is half labial and half dental, and is uttered by bringing the lower lip and upper teeth slightly in contact; as in wel well wal rampart werken to work wil-len to will wen-nen to accustom wen-telen to roll. X is sounded ecks in the alphabet , as also in words ; it is met with only in proper names ; as Xe-nophon Xenophon Xer-xes Xerxes Alex-ander Alexander Alex-andrie Alexandria. Y. F is sounded in the alphabet partly like the English i , and partly like the Dutch I, it may be said to be a sound between the two : this letter is now expunged from the modern Dutch alphabet , the ij being substituted in its stead ; it is thus met with only in old spelling, and proper names from other languages ; as, Cyrus, Cyrus ; Assyrie , Assyria; Abyssinie , Abyssinia; however, some modern writers with the late M r . Bilderdijk at their head, maintain the use of y in some words. Z is sounded as in English , both in the alphabet and in words ; as in zand sand zeelt tench be-zeeren to hurt ziel soul be-zielen to animate zeer sore. SOUNDS OF THE UNITED LETTERS CH, AND IJ. CM. The ch is sounded still more guttural than the g , but somewhat sharper ; as in visch fish doch hut schen-ken to give schip ship bosch wood be-schrijven to describe. AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 13 S, in monosyllables ending in sch, preceded by a short vowel , wben inflected , the s is doubled ; as in visch , vis- schen ; bosch , bosschen. i jr. The combined letters ij are used instead of the long i or ii , and also in place of the Greek y. They are sounded nearly like the long English % in mine; as in mij my mijn mine schijn appearance zijn his fijn fine lijm glue. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS ON DUTCH PRONUNCIATION, ACCENT , AND SPELLING. Every letter composing a monosyllable, and every sylla- ble in a compound word , are distinctly sounded : in words of more than one syllable there is always one of them on which a particular stress is laid, which is called accent, and this syllable is called the accented syllable, and is the root of the word or radical syllable. Dividing a word into syllables or syllabication is the ana- lysis of it into its root and the particles and words of which it is composed. The root of a word is the elementary syllable ; as, min , love, in min-aar , lover Particles are those syllables added to words in their inflections, or in extension of their meanings: when placed at the beginning of words, they are called Initial Par- ticles , and when at the end, they are called Terminational Particles; to the former class belong: be, er , ge , her, mis, on, ont , ver, and wan; and to the latter: aar, ceel, er, eren, ig , ij , ing , is, ooi or ooijen , they always constitute a dis- tinct syllable ; as , be-min-nen , to love ; ge-haat , hated ; lijd-er , sufferer. For the sake of euphony , a letter is sometimes added to a word , and sometimes one letter is supplanted by another ; as , 1. The short soft e is often placed at the end of a word to give it a softer sound ; as in God Gode , God. rust ruste , rest. 14 DUTCH PRONUNCIATION taal tale , language. maat mate , measure. hoop hope , hope. leer leere , doctrine. dag dage , day. spraak sprake , speech. vrouw vrouwe , woman. huizing huizinge , residence. goed goedc , good. breuk breuke , rupture. 2. The short soft e is also often placed before the ter- minational particles lijk and loos; as in gelde-loos , moneyless. rijke-lijk , richly. verdrage-lijk , supportable. onnoeme-lijk , nameless. vorste-lijk , princely. moede-loos , lowspirited. bevatte-lijk , comprehensible. schrifte-lijk , in writing. In all such like cases, the e and preceding consonant form a distinct syllable. 3. D is often placed before er and held , in order to break the otherwise too hollow sound; as in bitter-der , bitterer. huur-der , tenant. zuiver-der , purer. uitvoer-der , performer. zwaar-der , heavier. 4 V having too soft a sound to terminate a word , is sometimes replaced by / in words ending in is or lijk , and the termination is preceded by the short soft e; as in begraven begrafe-nis , funeral. laven lafe-nis , refreshment. {erfe-lijk , hereditary. sterven sterfe-lijk , mortal. erfe-nis , inheritance. 5. G preceded by n in the same syllable, is sometimes replaced by k in compounds ; as / jon-ker , boy. jong < jonk-heer , young nobleman. ( jonk- vrouw, young lady. f konink-ie , a little kinq. komng ' ! konink-lijk , royal. vangen ontvanke-lijk , receivable. 6. Some words admit of being spelled differently, not having as yet attained a fixed form ; as , artillerie artillerij , artillery. groffelijk grovelijk , roughly. gerief gerijf , convenience. adem asem , breath. AND ORTHOGRAPHY. IS bondel bundel , bundle. afscrapsel afschrabsel , afschraapsel , scrapings. aanwendsel aanwcnst , custom. and many others. All words introduced from foreign languages , will have the accent on the last syllable , as also words taking the terminationals ij , en , or kant ; as in prigel bower kronijk chronicle krediet credit monarch monarch branderij distillery profijt profit garnizoen garrison muzikant musician. except the verbs in eren, which take the accent on the first e ; as in grave-ren to engrave kaute-ren to exercise solde-ren to solder boetse-ren to work in relief rege-ren to govern debite-ren to debit. In words of more than one syllable , in which one of them ends in a vowel succeeded by a syllable beginning with a vowel or diphthong, the latter has a mark placed over it; as in be-zien berries ge-erft inherited ge-ent engrafted pri-eel a bower ge-eindigd ended ba-lien bars. Marks or accents are also sometimes placed over the diphthongs ee in e'en, one, and oo in voor, before, in situ- ations where they require an extraordinary emphasis ; as in the first when employed as a numeral ; and in the lat- ter, when employed as an adverb. Latin, Greek, and Hebrew proper names, retain for the most part the same spelling in Dutch, which they have in the language from which they are derived; as, Cato, Cy- rus, Xerxes, Virgilius, Adam. Modern European Christian names retain for the most part the Latin orthography , except in some cases wherein they conform more or less to a modification accordant with the genius of the Dutch language ; as in Jacobus, Jakob, Jaap, Koos , James. Catharina , Katrijn , Trijn , Ka , Catherine. Cornelius, Kornelis, Kees, Nelis, Cornelius. 16 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. Etymology, woor daf hiding , en woordwending , treats of words or the parts of speech, their derivation and various modifications. WORDS A word, een woord, is the name of a thing, animate or inanimate; it is also the name of a state or an action of a thing, or of the human mind, and also of a qua- lification of a thing, or of an idea. One , or two , or more letters united, form a syllable , and a syllable must have at least one vowel ; as , al , all ; man, man. Dutch words , as being of Teutonic origin , when simple and uninfected, are mostly monosylables, but these monosyl- lables , in their inflections , commonly take one or more ad- ditional syllables; as, lees, read, le-zen, to read, ge-le-zen, read. Two or more words also become united, and thus form words of so many syllables; as, goed, good, heid, ness , goed-heid, goodness ; huis , house , houd , keep , er, er or doer, huis-houd-er , housekeeper. DERIVATION OF WORDS. Derivation of words, woordafleiding , is the tracing of them to their origin or derivation from another language , as respects simple or primitive words; or in analysing them into their respective primitive or simple words or root, as respects compoumls; words, therefore, as to de- rivation, may be divided into simple and compound. PRIMITIVE OR SIMPLE WORDS. In the earliest stages of a primitive language, only three DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 17 sorts of words could have been suggested : 1. Exclamations or Interjections, expressing pain or admiration; as, ah! oh! etc. 2. The names of things presented to the senses; as, father, mother, food, etc. (Nouns). 3. Names of actions of the body, and emotions of the soul; as, give, love, (Verbs) ; but as mankind advanced in civilization and re- finement , things and conceptions increased , and conse- quently the suggestion of those connecting and qualifying words known by the names of articles, adjectives, pro- nouns, adverbs, prepositions, and conjunctions, and, sub- sequently , the inflections of words. The creation of words or names for things and ideas , was the care and work of the earliest inhabitants of the earth, whose posterities spreading out and forming themselves into distinct nations, carried with them and retained the language of their mother country , and sub- sequently increased their vocabulary by adopting also the words of their neighbours , with such modifications of sound and spelling as suited their respective geniuses , and thu?;, in the course of ages, they formed another distinct language or dialect, differing more or less from that of the nation from which they originated. After this man- ner the words of the Dutch language had their origin ; namely : l : From the ancient Lower Teutonic , of which it is a dialect, as has already been shown in the intro- duction. 2. The Upper Teutonic, or High German. 3. It has, moreover, many words subsequently derived from the Latin and Greek , and from some modern European lan- guages , as the German , French , and English , but such are for the most part words used in the arts and scien- ces, and they are not numerous, as the genius of the Dutch language does not easily admit of the incorpora- tion of such like words, they being ever attended with a dissonance in their pronunciation ; it is therefore that the compounding of words for new names , states , and actions, has been, and is at this day, generally availed of by the Dutch. In this particular their language is pre-eminently charactaristic , and inferior to none , an- cient or modern, not excepting even the Greek. COMPOUND WORDS. The genius of the Dutch language readily admitting 18 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. of the combining , almost at discretion , of two or more primitive words in the formation of compounds , the Dutch vocabulary has by this means been greatly aug- mented; these compounds are formed thus; from melk milk , and boer , a peasant , is formed melkboer , a milk- man ; from Gods , of God , and dienst service , is formed Godsdienst , religion. Another class of compounds is formed by a noun ta- king a monosyllabic word called a particle ; as , aan , be, ge, her, mis, on, ont, ver , wan, which are initial par- ticles, voorvoegsels ; and aar, dom, er or ier, held, rij t ing , is , ling , schap , sel , ster , and these diminutives , je , jen , pje , tje , ke , ken , kijn , sken , and lijn , which are terminational particles, achtervoegsels. The diminutives of nouns formed by adding the above particles je, jen, etc. in the choice of which, harmony must be the guide , are thus used. 1 . Nouns ending in ch, d, f, g, k, p, s, t, and sch , take je; as, lack, a laugh, lachje , a smile; paard, ahorse, paardje, a little horse. 2. Nouns whose final letter is preceded by a long vo. wel sound, and nouns ending in Im, rm, or em, take pje; as, arm, an arm, armpje, a little arm, etc. 3. Tje is added to words ending in w, I, n, r; as, paauw , a peacock, paauwtje, a little peacock; zaal a hall, zaaltje, a little hall , etc. It is also employed with short monosyllables terminating in b , g , I, m, n, or r , the consonant being doubled and followed by the short e; as, brug a bridge, bruggetje, a little bridge; man, man, mannelje, a little man. 4. Nouns sounded short, becoming long in the plural, take the same form when used as diminutives ; as , Had a leaf, blaadje , a little leaf; pad a path, paadje, a little path, etc. 5. Some nouns having a long sound for the plural , and some of those nouns plural in ers , and eren , form the plural diminutive in the same manner ; as , ei , an egg, eijeren, eggs, eijertjes , little eggs; hoen , a fowl, hoenderen , fowls , hoendertjes , little fowls ; slag , a blow , slagen , blows , slaagjes , little blows , etc. 6. Some nouns form the diminutive irregularly ; as , meid , a maidservant , meisje , a little maid , probably from DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 19 this word having been formerly spelled meyssen or mcysen. Proper names form also their diminutives irregularly ; as , Willem , William , Wimpje , Bill or little William ; Ja- kob , James, Koolje or Koosje , Jim, Jimmy or little James. DIVISION OF WORDS OR THE PARTS OF SPEECH. Words or the parts of speech , de rededeelen, are divi- ded into nine classes : Lidwoorden , articles. Zelfstandige naamwoorden , nouns. Bijvoegelijke naamwoorden , adjectives. Voornaamwoorden , pronouns. Werkwoorden , verbs. Bijwoorden , adverbs. Voorzetsels , prepositions. Voegwoorden , conjunctions. Tusschenwerpsels , interjections. Of these, the article , noun , adjective , and pronoun, are varied as to gender, number, and case; the verb varies as to number , person , mood , and tense ; and the ad- verbs , prepositions , conjunctions , and interjections , are not varied. ARTICLES. An article is a word put before a noun to show the extent of its meaning and to identify its gender in de- clension. There are two sorts of articles , the definite and inde- finite. The definite article , het bepalend lidwoord , is de , the , masculine and feminine, and het, the, neuter. This arti- cle points out more definitely the thing meant ; as , de pen van den leerling , the pupil's pen; de zoon des vaders , the son of the father ; het boek van den leerling , the book of the pupil. The indefinite article, het onbepalend lidwoord, is een, mas- culine and neuter , eene , feminine , a or an , and is used before nouns in the singular number only and when taken in a more general or indefinite sense ; as , ik heb eene vrouw gezien , I have seen a woman ; een boek van eenen leerling , a book of a pupil. 20 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. Articles are varied as to gender , number , and case, in which they must agree with the noun to which they belong. NOUNS. A noun is the name of a thing , of an action , of an emotion , or of an idea ; as , boom , tree ; huts , house ; werking , working; schrift , writing; liefde, love; boosheid, anger; nederigheid, humility; verheerlijking , exaltation. Nouns are divided into eigene namen , propernames t as names of persons or places ; as Amsterdam , Amsterdam, the metropolis of Holland ; Vondel , Vondel , a Dutch poet : and into gemeene naamwoorden , common names or the names of things in general ; as , water , water ; stad , city ; deugd , virtue. Nouns are varied by geslacht , gender ; getal , number ; and naamval , case ; which is called verbuiging der naam- woorden , declension of nouns. DECLENSION. Declension is that change in termination to which nouns and their subordinate words , as articles , adjectives , and pronouns, are subject, with respect to gender, number, and case. GENDER. Gender , geslacht , is the distinction of sex in nouns by their termination or otherwise. In the Dutch language there are three genders , mascu- line, mannelijk; feminine, vrouwelijk; and neuter, onzijdig. MASCULINE. 1. Proper names of men are masculine; as, Johannes , John ; Jacobus , James ; Joris , George. 2. Common nouns expressing the conditions of men; as, heer, gentleman; tuinman, gardener; koopman, dealer; knecht , man-servant ; except those nouns ending in wacht, watch; as, schildwacht, sentinel; nachtwacht , watchman, which are feminine. 3. The names of precious stones ; as , agaat , agate ; diamant , diamond. DUTCH E T YMOLOG Y. SI 4. Nouns ending- in dom, expressing rank or condition ; as, adeldom, nobility; ouderdom, antiquity; rijkdom, wealth. 5. Nouns ending in em, sem, Im, and rm; as, adem, breath; balsem , balsam; halm, stem; darm, gut. 6. Nounds ending in er, derived from verbs; as,snuiter, pair of snuffers , from snuiten , to snuff. 7. The names of trees, boom, tree, which is masculine, being understood; as, eik, eikenboom, an oak, oaktree; except linde , linden-tree or lime-tree which is feminine; but lindeboom is masculine. FEMININE. 1. Proper names of females are feminine, vromvelijk ; as, Johanna, Jane; Maria, Mary; Katrijn, Catherine; except all diminutives in je ; as , Jansje , Jane ; Mietje , Mary, etc. which are neuter. 2. Common nouns which signify a feminine state or occupation; as, zuster, sister; naaister , seamstress: except wijf, a low vulgar female , also all diminutives in je ; as , .zustertje , a little sister , etc. which are neuter. 3. Nouns ending in schap , derived from adjectives; as, blijdschap , joyfulness; gramschap , anger; as also those form- ed from other nouns, implying a unity of persons; as, priesterschap , the clergy ; broederschap , fraternity ; except , gezelschap , company , and genootschap , companionship ; which are neuter; except also when a dignity is signi- fyed; as, broederschap, brotherhood; stadhouder schap , the dignity of a stadtholder. 4. Nouns ending in ing , derived from verbs ; as, beloo- ning , reward ; vermaning , reprimand ; berisping , chastising. 5. Nouns ending in y; as, hovaardij, pride; dievery, theft; except those words beginning in ge; as, gerij, driving of horses ; getij , the tide , which are neuter. 6. Nouns ending in is; as, belijdenis, belief ; begrafenis, funeral; erf ems, heirship, etc. except, vonnis, a sentence; vernis, varnish, which are neuter; getuigenis, witness, is generally feminine. 7. All nouns ending in heid ; as , wijsheid , wisdom; goedheid , goodness. 8. All dissyllables ending in te ; as, hoogte, height; moeite, trouble, etc. also many trisyllables derived from 22 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. verbs; as, begeerte , desire, from , begeeren ; gedachte , re- membrance, idea, from denken, to think. 9. The letters of the alphabet , and the figures ; as , eene a, an a ; eene 5 , a three , etc. 10. Nouns ending in st; as , dienst, service; gunst, favor; winst , profit, etc. n. Derivatives in aadje ; as, stellaadje , a scaffolding, from stellen, to place ; boschaadje, a grove or copse, from bosch, a wood. NEUTER. 1 . Proper names of countries , cities , and villages ; as , Holland , Amsterdam , Scheveningcn , a maritime village in Holland ; except those which are preceded by de or den ; as, de Haag , the Hague; de Briel, the Brill; de Oudenbosch, the Oudenbosch ; de Leidschendam , the Leidendam ; and de Bosch, Bois-le-duc, which are masculine; some others are feminine ; as , de Willemstad , the Willemstad , and het Gooi , Gooi is neuter. 2. The infinitives of verbs , and adjectives , used as nouns ; as , het eten , eating ; het kwade , the evil. o. All diminutives of nouns in je , ke or sken ; as, het meisje, the girl ; het boekje or boeksken, the little book. 4. Nouns ending in sel ; as , het voedsel, food ; deksel, a lid , etc. 5. Many nouns beginning in ge , from nouns ; as , het gebergte, the mountain ; het geboomte, trees , and all nouns in ge, from verbs ; as , het geschrei, the crying, from schrei- jen , to cry. 6. Dissyllables beginning in be, ge , her, ont , or ver; as , het bedrog, the deceit; het geloof, the belief; het herstel, the recovery ; het ontslag , the relief ; het verslag, the rela- tion ; except, ontvang, receipt; herdruk, reprint; verwant, relation, which are masculine, and ontvangst, receipt; be- komst , getting , which are feminine. 7. The substances of the mineral kingdom; as, het goud , gold; het ijzer, iron; het koper, copper; also the names of many productions when the species only is signified; as, het taken, cloth; het papier, paper. 8. All words ending in dom , signifying a body , or collection of persons ; as , het priesierdom , the priesthood ; het Christendom, Christendom, etc. DUTCH ETYMOLOGY 25 The gender of some nouns is arbitrary; as, \. Oorlog , war, is common to all the genders. The following are used both masculine and feminine : dood death nacht night stal stable tijd time. The following are used in the masculine and neuter gender : altaar an altar slag a blow oogenblik a moment. loon wages oproer an uproar The following are either feminine or neuter: sneeuw snow school school uur an hour lijm glue. 2. The following nouns are common to the masculine and feminine, and are called gemeenslachtige : bediende a servant vreemde a stranger beschuldigde an accused vrome a pious person bode a messenger vuilbek a slut or sloven getuige a witness weetniet an ignorant boel a concubine poortier a door keeper schijnheilige hypocrite gcvangene a prisoner verneemal busybody gids a guide wijsgeer philosopher zieke an invalid. Also nouns of this nature ending in ing , and noot ; as , vreemdeling stranger echtgenoot husband or wife; though for their feminine e is often added ; as , vreemde- linge , a female stranger ; echtgenoot e , a wife. 3. The following nouns are also common to both sexes, and are called geljjkslachtige or zelfslachtige , which take one gender for both sexes ; as , MASCULINE. arend an eagle olifant an elephant valk a falcon haas a hare reiger a heron vink a finch kernel a camel struis an ostrich vos a fox leeuwrik a lark uil an owl kwartel a quail ooijevaar a stork sperwer a sparrow hawk ekster a magpie. u DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. FEMININE. duif pigeon haagdis lizard kat cat kraai crow raaf raven muis mouse musch sparrow rat rat slang snake snip snipe gans goose eend tftt-cfc kennis acquaintance tortel furtfe wacht guard zwaluw swallow. NEUTER. kind child konijn rabbit. hert stag paard Aorse schaap sheep wicht infant ho en fowl. The compounds of nouns preserve the gender of the last noun in the compound ; as , bierkan , a beer-can , is feminine ; because kan , can , is feminine ; whilst bier , beer , is neuter. The foregoing rules for distinguishing the genders of nouns , are applicable only to a part of the nouns of the Dutch language , thus the gender of many not being resolvable, inlo any precise rules or known grounds, and being thus apparently established by the result of chance or caprice , the student must arrive at the gender of such by consulting the dictionary ; however an attention to the harmony of the sounds of the consonants , which undoubtedly has had much influence in establishing the gender of many nouns , will also afford the pupil much additional aid in his acquisition of this essential part of the Dutch grammar. FORMATION OF THE FEMININE OF NOUNS. Males and Females not being always distinguished by different words, as man, man; vrouw, woman; jongen, boy; meisje, girl; etc. , the feminine, in other cases , is formed from the masculine by a change of termination ; as , 1. By adding in ; as , koning , king , koningin , queen ; god , a god, godin, a goddess; herder, shepherd, herderin, shepherdess ; etc. 2. Nouns masculine ending in /\ change f into v in the feminine ; as , graaf, an earl , gravin , a countess ; wolf, a he-wolf, wolvin, a she-wolf; etc. DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 9i 3. Some nouns take es in the feminine ; as , zondaar , a male sinner, zondares , a female sinner; dienaar, a man servant , dienares , a female servant ; burger , a citizen , burgeres , a citess ; god , a god , godes , a goddess ; etc. 4. Compounds ending in man, change man into vrouw in the feminine; as, koopman, a male dealer, koopvrouw, a female dealer; buurman, a male neighbor, buitrvrouw, female neighbor. 5. Nouns masculine in er , derived from other nouns, form the feminine in ster ; as , from hof, a garden , hove- nier , a male gardener , hovenierster , a female gardener ; herberg , an inn , herbergier, a host, herbergierster, a hostess. 6. Nouns ending in aar, derived from verbs, take ster in the feminine; as, from, bedelen , to beg, bedelaar , a beg- gar-man , bedelaarster , a beggar-woman ; etc. 7. Nouns ending in er , derived from verbs, form the feminine in ster ; as from , brouwen , to brew , brouwer , a male brewer , brouwster , a female brewer. 8. The feminines of natives of countries, take vrouw, preceded by the adjective form of the country ; as , Holland Holland , | Europa Europe , < Engeland England , < Hollander a Dutchman Hollandsche vrouw a Dutch woman Europeaan a European Europesche vrouw a European woman Engclschman an Englishman Engelsche vrouw an English woman. NUMBER OF NOUNS. Number of nouns , getal der naamwoorden , is the dis- tinction of one from more than one. There are two numbers ; the singular , enkelvoudig , and the plural , meervoudig : the singular denotes one ; the plural more than one. GENERAL RULES FOR FORMING THE PLURAL. 1. Nouns singular in e, form the plural by adding n; as , hoogte , height , hoogten , heights ; bede , prayer , beden , prayers : except diminutives , which take s ; as , meisje , girl , meisjes , girls. 2. Words ending in ei , take jen in the plural ; as , ret , choir , reijen , choirs ; lei , a slate , lejjen , slates. 2G DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. The letters of the alphabet are expressed in the plural by adding an "s; as, twee a's two a's; drie Vs, three b's; as also nouns from the ancient languages in a, or o; as De Cato's en de Pharao's, the Catos and the Pharaos. 3. Nouns ending in a single consonant preceded by a long vowel, take en in the plural; as, dier, an animal, dieren , animals ; boom , a tree , boomen , trees ; also words ending in two or more consonants; as, berg, a moun- tain, bergen, mountains; vorst, a prince, vorsten, prin- ces ; kracht , power , krachten , powers. 4. Nouns ending with a consonant preceded by a short vowel, double the consonant and take en in the plural; as, man, man, mannen, men; gek, fool, gekken, fools; os, an ox, ossen, oxen; vos, a fox, vossen, foxes; bes, a berry , bessen , berries : except those ending in er , ster , el, em, en, sem, which take s; as, broeder, brother, broeders, brothers; venster , window, vensters, windows; par el , a pearl, parels, pearls; bodem, a bottom, bodems, bottoms; degen , a sword, degens, swords; balsem , a balsam, bal- sems , balsams ; to which exceptions may be added , bad , a bath; Mad, a leaf; dag, a day; dak, a roof; gat, a hole; gelag , expence at an inn; pad, a path; rad, a wheel ; slag , a blow ; vat , a vat ; bevel , an order ; gebed , a prayer ; gebrek , a defect ; sp el , a game ; trek , an in- clination; weg , a way; god, a god; gebod, an order; hoi , a hollow ; lot , a lot ; schot , a shot ; slot , a lock ; all which do not double the consonant; as, baden, baths; etc. to these may te added glas, a glass, glazen , glas- ses; graf, a grave, graven, graves; staf, a staff, staven, staves; hof, a court, hoven, courts. Many nouns ending in, er , aar , and el, take either s, or en in the plural, as vader, father, vaders or vaderen, fathers; broeder , brother, broeders or broederen, brothers; dienaar , a servant, dienaars or dienaren, servants. 5. S preceded by a long vowel at the end of words, is generaly changed into z in the plural , as reis , a journey, reizen, journies; bies, a rush, biezen, rushes; doos, a box, doozen, boxes; huis, house, huizen, houses; pry's, a prize, prijzen, prizes: the following nouns take also zen in the plural , laars , a boot ; vaars , a heiffer , which make laarzen, vaarzen. 6. Nouns ending in /"preceded by a long vowel sound, DITCH ETYMOLOGY. change /into u; as, korf, a basket, koiven, baskets; raaf, a raven, raven, ravens; grocf, a hollow, groeven, hollows; but when preceded by a short vowel it is doubled; as, slof, a slipper, sloffen, slippers; mof, a muff, moffen, muffs; etc. except, hof, a court; graf, a grave; staf, a staff, which make hoven, graven, sloven. 7. The termination heid, makes heden in the plural; as, goedheid , goodness , goedheden , goodnesses; domheid, stupid- ity, domheden, stupidities. 8. Man, a man, makes Heden, men; koopman, a trader, kooplieden, traders ; krijgsman , a warrior , krijgslieden , war- riors; etc. except the names of nations; as, Engelschman , an Englishman, Engelschen, Englishmen; Franschman , a Frenchman, Franschen, Frenchmen, etc. 9. The i and a are changed into e in the following words : lid , a limb , leden , limbs ; smid , a smith , smeden , smiths ; schip , a ship , schepen , ships ; split , a rent , sple- ten , rents ; stad , a city , steden , cities ; etc. 10. Some words, signifying different things, have the plu- rals differently; as, kleed, a carpet, and also clothes, klee- den, carpets, kleederen , clothes ; been, a leg, and also a bone, beenderen , bones, beenen , legs; blad, a leaf, (of a book), bladen , leaves , blad, a leaf (of a tree), bladeren, leaves. 11. Nouns singular in oo sometimes retain the oo in the plural ; as , boom , a tree , boomen , trees ; others do not ; the following are those which retain the oo in the plural : boom a tree boot a boat booze wicked person brood a loaf dood death doove a deaf person doos a box drnom a dream geloof a belief genoot a companion boop a hope jool a dunce kleinood a trinket kloot a ball knoop a button kool a cabbage poot a foot poos a pause sloop pillow case sloot a ditch sloof a slipper stoom a steam loos o rope moor a moor moot a slice of fish nood a need noot a nut oog an eye stoop a liquid measure oom an uncle stoot o push koon a cheek kroon a crown lavoor icas/i iast'n lood a lead loog /i'e loon a reward loop a run loof foliage oor aw ear stroo a s/ratp stroom a stream stroop a f/ic// toog a draught toom a bridle toon a tone vloo a //ea zoom a seam. 38 BUTCH ETYMOLOGY. Other nouns in oo , drop one of the o's ; as , boog , a bow , bogen , bows ; boor , a bore , boren , bores ; etc. 42. Nouns singular in ee sometimes retain the ee in the plural; as, aalgeer , an eelspear , aalgeeren , eelspears; the following are those which retain ee in the plural : aalgeer an eelspear abeel a poplar barbeel a barbel been a bone beek a brook beer a bear beet a beetroot bekkeneel the skull bleek a bleaching ground bordeel a bagnio deeg dough deel part eed an oath eer an honor filomeel a nightingale fleer a tricked female fluweel velvet gareel a trace geep a certain fish geer a gusset greel a horse collar heem a wharf or dyke beep a bill heer Sir or Mr. juweel a jewel kameel a camel kaneel cinnamon kanteel a battlement kapiteel a capital kasteel a castle keel a long narrow plank keer a turn keet a vat kleed dress korbeel corbel krakeel a dispute kreel edging kreet a cry kwarteel fourth part of a hogshead leek a layman leen a fief makreel mackerel meer a lake mees titmouse moskea a mosque nawee after-pains nawees a child born after its father 1 & neer a whirlpool (death neet a rivet oordeel judgment paneel a panel pateel a dish penseel a pencil prieel a bower ree a roe scbeel the parting of the hair scheen the shin slee a sloe snee a cut speek a spoke 9pree a counterpane biee a city , a place steen a stone streem a wale tafereel a table teen a twig thee tea toneel a stage truweel a trowel veeg a scold veem a company veen a fen vrees a fear \ree a lamentation weegbree a plantain weer a wether DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 29 wees an orphan seep soap mjjgeer a philosopher zweep a tohip zee the sea zweer an inflammation zeem honey-comb Other nouns in ee, drop one of the es; as, deen, a wild goose , denen , wild geese ; keen , a chap , kenen , chaps ; meel , meal , melen , meals , etc. CASE. Case , naamval , is the relation which one noun bears to another , or to a verb , or to a preposition. There are four cases in the Dutch language : de eerste naamval , the nominative case ; de tweede naamval , the genitive case ; de derde naamval , the dative case ; and , de vierde naam- val , the objective case. THE NOMINATIVE CASE. The nominative case , de eerste naamval, expresses the name of a thing , and is the subject of which something is said; as, de deugd is beminnelijk , virtue is lovely; het kind speelt , the child plays ; de loom is hoog , the tree is lofty. THE GENITIVE CASE The genitive or possessive case , de tweede naamval , is the connection which two or more nouns have with each other in a sentence , and carries with it an idea of possession; as, Gods geboden , God's commandments; Weilaisds woordenboek , Weiland's dictionary ; this case is also expressed with the preposition van ; as , de ge- ooden van God ; het woordenboek van Weiland This case is also used when a portion of the whole is expressed ; as , een stuk broods , a piece of bread ; een glas wijns, a glass of wine; veel ongemaks doorstaan, to endure much fatigue ; de dapperste des heers , the bravest of the army. The genitive is also used with some adjectives and verbs ; as , der belooning waardig zijn , to be worthy of reward ; gedenk des , think of it. 30 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. THE DATIVE CASE. The dative case , de derde naamval, is used when giving, offering , destining , or taking is implied, when any thing is done to the advantage or disadvantage of an object, or when resemblance or dissemblance is signified ; as , geef den jongen zijnen hoed , give the boy his hat; den vaderlande zijn leven toewijden , to devote his life to his country ; de zeebaden zijn velen menschen voordeelig , sea bathing is bene- ficial to many people ; sterke dranken zijn den jongen lieden schadelijk , spirits are injurious to young people ; vette spijs is eener zwakke maag nadeelig , fat food is prejudicial to a delicate stomach ; zij is haver moeder seer gelijk , she is much like her mother . The prepositions aan, to , or voor, for, are often used to express this case; as when the substantives reject the article , or where the dative case is not clearly identified. OBJECTIVE CASE. The objective or accusative case, de vierde naamval, denotes the object upon which an active verb or a pre- position terminates ; as , hij heeft eenen hoed gekocht , he has bought a hat ; ontneem haar den stok , take the stick from her ; door elken vriend der menschheid, by every friend of mankind ; een ieder in zijnen stand , every one in his station. DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLES. Singular. Plural. Masc. Fern. Neut. Masc. Fern. Neut. 1. de de het de de de the 2. des, or der, or des, or der, or der, or der, or of the van den van de van het van de van de van de 3. den, or de, der, den, or den, or de, der, den, or 1 to the aan den or aan de aan het aande or aan de aan de 4. den de het de de de the Masc. Fern. Neut. 1. een eene een \ r a, or an 2. 3. eens, or eener, or eens, or 1 van eenen van eene van een \ eenen, or eene, eener, eenen, or J aan eenen or aan eene aan een J has no plural < of a, or an to a, or an 4. eenen eene een I a, or an DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. -i DECLENSION OF NOUNS WITH AN ARTICLE. 4. Singular Masculine. de man the man of the man des mans , or van den man den man , or aan den man den man or the man's to the man the man 1. het kind 2. des kinds, or van het kind 3. den kinde , or aan het kind 4. het kind de vrouw der vrouw, or van de vrouw de, der vrouw, or aan ds vrouw de vrouw Neuter. the child of the child, or the child 1 s Feminine. the troman of the woman, or the woman 1 s to the woman the woman to the child the child Plubal. Masculine. 1. de mannen the men 2. der mannen, or van de mannen 3. den mannen, or aande mannen 4. de mannen Feminine. to the men de vrouwen of the men, der vrouwen, or or the men's van de vrouwen de , der vrouwen, or aan de vrouwen the men de vrouwen Neuter. 1. de kinderen the children 2. der kinderen , or [of the children , van de kinderen | or the children's 3. den kinderen , or • . .. ! to the chudren aan de kinderen 4. de kinderen the children Singular. the women of the women, or the women's to the women the women Masculine. een tuin a garden of a garden eens turns, or van eenen tuin eenen tuin, or aan eenen tuin eenen tuin I to a garden a garden Feminine. eene bloem eener bloem, or van eene bloem eene , eener bloem , or aan eene bloem eene bloem a flower of a flower to a flower a flower DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. Neuter. 1. een paard a horse 2. eens paards , or | of a horse, van een paard J or a horse's 3. eenen paarde , or | , \ to a horse aan een paard I 4. een paard a horse OBSERVATIONS ON THE CASES OF NOUNS. \. Van is used for the genitive when the harmony of the sentence demands it. 2. Proper names preceded by a noun and adjective, or noun and article, generally take van in the possesive ; as, de geboortestad van Laurens Koster, the native city of Laurens Coster ; het metalen standbeeld van Erasmus , the bronze statue of Erasmus ; de Tacitus van Hooft , Hooft's Tacitus: it is also proper to say; Kosters geboortestad ; Erasmus metalen standbeeld ; Hoofts Tacitus. 3. Van is also generally used to designate family origin , party , age , size , weight , and value ; as , de ver- maarde de Ruiter was van geringe afkomst , the renouned de Ruiter was of humble birth ; Huig de Groot was Hollander van geboorte , Hugo de Groot was a Dutchman by birth; de thee is van China afkomstig , tea was first brought from China ; van der Palm bereikte den ouder- dom van zes en zeventig jar en , van der Palm attained the age of seventy six ; een stuk taken van vier en dertig ellen, a piece of cloth of thirty four ells; een kistje thee van twintig ponden , a chest of tea of twenty pounds ; een man van geringe bekwaamheid , a man of little capacity ; voor de waarde van vijftig guldens , for the value of fifty guilders." 4. For the sake of harmony , e is sometimes added to nouns in the feminine gender, singular; as, der vrouwe, of , or to the woman ; der bloeme , of , or to the flower ; as also in the dative singular, masculine, without aan, as , den manne , to the man ; sometimes also to the dative neuter , when expressed without the prepositon aan ; as , den huize , to the house ; den paarde , to the horse. 5. In familiar discourse, and also by poetical licence, the genitive is sometimes thus expressed : mijner zuster$ DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 55 kinderen, my sister's children; instead of, de kinderen van mijne zaster ; zij is haar moeders troost , she is her mother's comfort; instead of, zy is de troost van hare moeder. 6. The following nouns take en instead of s in the genitive: heer , gentleman; reus , giant; vorst , prince; prins, prince; graaf ', an earl; pans, a pope; hart , heart; boer , peasant; mensch, man; kwast, brush; els, aldertree; beer , bear ; nar , fool ; gek , fool ; leeuw , lion ; hert , stag ; also nouns masculine ending in e;as, getuige, witness; etc. being in the genitive, des heer en , reuzen, etc. of the gentleman , of the giant ; etc. 7. The following neuter nouns take es in the genitive : huis , house ; kruis , cross ; vleesch , flesh ; paleis , palace ; geest , spirit ; as, des huizes, of the house; des kruiz.es, of the cross ; etc. 8. In familiar discourse the genitive is commonly ex- pressed by van , and the dative by aan ; the use of the cases belonging rather to a more elevated style. 9. The preposition van is also employed in sentences , where two or more genitives follow in succession , in order to avoid a cacophony ; as , de zoon des broeders van den bakker mijns vaders , the son of the brother of my father's baker. PRAXIS ON THE UNION OF AN ARTICLE AND ONE OR MORE NOUNS. Het rijtuig der koningin. The queen's carriage. De bladen van het boek. The leaves of the book. De bladeren der boomen. The leaves of the trees. De toegcnegenheid der moeder. The mother's affection. De koetsier van den geneesheer The coachman of the gentleman's des heeren. physician. De Staten Generaal der Nederlan- The States General of the Neth- den. erlands. V o n d e 1 , de Shakspeare van Hoi- V o n d e I , the Shakspeare of Hol- land . land. De vader bemint zijnen zoon. The father loves his son. Het span voor de sleden bestaat The team for sledges generally doorgaans in honden. consists of dogs. Des zomers (in den tijd des zomers) In the summer, the dogs scratch krabben de honden zich kuilen (for) themselves holes in the in den grond. earth. 54 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. Onder de regering van W i 1 1 e m den Eersten. De heer heeft eenen hoed gekocht. Zij is harer moeder zeer ongelijk. De leerling heeft de boeken gele- zen. Zegt den man , der vrouw , en den kinde , het nieuws. Des doods schuldig. Des levens zat. De beste der vrouwen is gestorven. De eigenaar en de eigenares van de landerijen. Des vaders arbeid , en der moeders zorg, Jongelingen onderwijzen. Geef den mcnscben brood. Geef eener vrouw een brood. Geef den kinde het brood. De heer des huizes. Bij den aanvang der vorige eeuw. De inrigting van mijne kamer. Het aanschaffen van eenige klee- dingstukken. Het onderhoud van het kind. Het handwerk dezer jnfvrouw. Eene golf der zee. During the reign of William the First. The gentleman has bought a hat. She is much unlike her mother. The pupil has read the books. Tell the news to the man , wo- man , and child. Deserving of death. Sated of life. The best of women is dead. The male and female proprietor of the estates. The father's labor , and mo- ther's care. To instruct young people. Give bread to the men. Give a loaf to a woman. Give the bread to the child. The master of the house. At the beginning of the last cen- tury. The arrangement of my room. The procuring of some articles of dress. The maintainanee of the child. The work of this young lady. A wave of the sea. ADJECTIVES. An adjective, bijvoegelijk naamwoord, is a word used to express the quality of a thing ; as , een goede jongen , a good boy ; water is vloeibaar , water is liquid ; de deugd is beminnelijk , virtue is amiable. The invention of these words must speedily have followed that of nouns , as the desire to express the quality of things would, soon be ielt. DERIVATION AND FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. Adjectives , like nouns , are sometimes of Teutonic origin , sometimes formed from nouns by the addition of a terminational particle , and sometimes nouns become adjectives from their situation in a sentence ; as, zijde, silk, DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 3S een zijdenhoed , a silk-hat. The present and past participles of verbs are also often used as adjectives ; as , een levend ligchaam, a living body; een geacht man, an esteemed man. Adjectives are formed from other words by taking one of the terminational particles: achtig , oaar , haftig , hande , ig , lei , lijk , loos , sch , voitdig , zaam ; as , from water water leugen lie bevvonen to inhabit lezen to read vrucht fruit held hero krijg war vier four moed courage jeugd youth goed good veel much God God bedriegen to deceive wolk cloud dag day veel many honderd hundred leeren to learn waken to watch Adjectives are declined by in which they must agree w belong ; to adjectives belong trappen van vergelijking. waterachtig watery leugcnachtig lying bewoonbaar habitable leesbaar legible vruchtbaar fruitful heldhaftig heroic krijgshaftig martial vierderhande four sorts moedig courageous jeugdig youthful goedig good inclined velerlei many sorts goddelijk godly bedriegelijk deceiving wolkeloos cloudless daagsch daily veelvoudig many-fold honderdvoudig hundred-fold leerzaam docile waakzaam vigilant. gender , number , and case . ith the nouns to which they also , degrees of comparison, DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 4. Manneluk. Enkelvoudig . I de , or ' een des , or I ' eens den, or ' eenen den , or I eenen Masculine. Singular. groot-e man the, or a great man groot-en mans the, or a great man's groot-en man to the , or to a great man groot-en man the , or a i great man 36 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. Meervoudig. 1. de groot-e mannen 2. der groot-e mannen 3. den groot-en mannen 4. de groot-e mannen Vrouwelijk. Enkelvoudig. de , or eene der , or eener I de , der I or eener I de , or l cene goed-e moeder goed-e moeder goed-e moeder goed-e moeder Meervoudig. de goed-e moeders der goed-e moeders de or der goed-e moeders de goed-e moeders Onzijdig. Enkelvoudig. hot sterk-e paard een sterk paard des, or eens den, or \ I sterk-en paarde eenen ] het sterk-e paard een steik paard Meervoudig. 1. de sterk-e paarden 2. der sterk-e paarden 3. den sterk-en paarden 4. de sterk-e paarden sterk-en paards Plural, the great men the great men's to the great men the great men Feminine. Singular. the, or the, or a to the s or to a the, or a good mother good mother's good mother good mother Plural. the good mothers the good mothers'' to the good mothers the good mothers Neuter. Singular, the strong horse strong horse's strong horse strong horse the, or a to the, or to a the a Plural. the strong horses the strong horses' 1 to the strong horses the strong horses OBSERVATIONS ON THE DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 1. Adjectives preceded by the definite article de , het, take an e in the nominative; as, de goede vader, the good father ; de goede moeder , the good mother ; het goede kind 9 . DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 57 the good child ; as also when preceded by deze or dit , this ; die or dat , that ; as , deze goede jongen , this good boy ; die goede vrouw , that good woman ; dit goede hitis , this good house. 2. Adjectives, before nouns masculine and feminine, preceded by possessive pronouns , take an e , but not before neuter nouns; as, mjjn beste vriend , my best friend ; nvjne lieve vriendin , my dear friend ; ons ongelukkig kind , our unfortunate child : except the adjective waard, precious, which takes e for all three genders ; as , een waarde vriend , mijne waarde vriendin , mijn waarde kind. 5. Adjectives before nouns masculine , signifying an officer, ruler, or servant, and terminating in er, oar , ier , or ling; as, arbeider , laborer; leeraar, teacher; hove- nier, gardener; hoveling, courtier; as also the nouns ko- ning , king; vorst , prince; admiraal, admiral; overste , chief; heer, gentleman; meester , master; knecht, servant; onderdaan, subject; vriend, friend; vijand, enemy; liuisva- der, head of a family; man, and mensch, man, sometimes take e in the nominative and sometimes not. AVhen the adjective qualifies the office of the person, it does not take the e in the nominative, but when it qualifies the person , it does ; as , een goed honing , is a king who reigns well , een goede honing , is a king who is good as a man ; een groot veldheer, a great general , een groote veldheer , a general who is great or tall in stature ; in the former case neither article nor adjective is decli ned ; as , van een groot krijgsman , of a great warrior. 4. For the sake of harmony , some adjectives undergo a change before they take the e; as , l. Those ending in i take j; as, fraai , fraaije , pretty; mooi , mooije , pretty; lid , luije , idle ; 2. Adjectives in f and s change f into v and s into z ; as , lief, lieve , dear ; braaf , brave , brave ; doof, doove , deaf ; boos , booze , angry ; grof , grove , or groffe , coarse ; bros , broze , or brosse , brittle. 5. The final single consonant of adjectives , preceded by a short vowel, is doubled in inflection; as, dik , dikke , thick ; dom , domme , stupid ; dun , dunne , thin ; laf, laffe , cowardly ; smal , smalle , small ; slap , slappe , soft ; wit > witle, white. 6. Some adjectives in ee retain the ee in declension ; as , algemeen , algemeene , general ; they are : 38 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. algemeen general geheel whole bleek pale breed broad geen none gedwee supple gemeen common gereed prepared heel all heet hot kleen small scheel cross scheef crooked teer tender veeg near dying wreed cruel. Others drop one of the vowels; as, geel, gele, yellow; veel , wte,'inttch or many; etc. 7. Some adjectives in oo retain the oo in declension ; as , blood , bloode , bashful ; they are : blood bathful bloot naked boos , booze wicked doof, doove deaf droog dry goor rancid groot great hoog high loos , looze false loos less rood red schoon beautiful snood base voos , vooze spungy zoor dry Other adjectives in oo drop one of the o's in declen- sion ; as , vrocm , vronie , pious ; 8. Some adjectives are indeclinable; as, l. Those ending in lei and hande ; as , allerlei , allerhande , allsorts , etc. 2. Those formed from nouns by taking en signifying the material of which a thing is made ; as , stalen , steel ; houten , wooden ; horenen , horn ; etc. 3. Adjectives in er derived from proper names of cities, towns, or countries; as , Amsterdarnmer , Amsterdam ; Parijzer , Parisian ; etc. 4. The cardinal numbers used as adjectives ; as , twee , drie, etc. ; except een, one, which is declined like the article een 9. The cardinal numbers are made into adjectives by taking sometimes de , and at others ste , for their termi- nation , in conformity with the harmony of the consonants; as, vier , four, vierde , fourth; acht, eight, achtste, eighth; etc. but when two such numbers come together, only one of them takes the form of an adjective ; as , vier en twintigste , twenty fourth ; honderd en derde , hundred and third. 10. The adjective al, all, is never declined before the definite article de or het , or a possessive pronoun ; as , al de menschen, all the men ; al uwe goedercn, all your goods. DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 39 11. The adjective agrees with the noun, to which it belongs, in gender , number, and case, and is placed be- tween it and the article ; as , een onderhoiidcnd boek , an entertaining book ; de ontbinding der oade rijkcn , the dis- solution of the old empires ; it agrees with the noun also, when the adjective does not take an article before it, the noun being taken in a general sense; as, vltjtige leerlingen wordcn geacht , diligent pupils are esteemed. 12. If the adjective is separated from the noun by zijn, wezen, or worden , to be , it is not declined ; as, deze zeeman is onversaagd , this sailor is intrepid ; een man (die) eerzuch- tig en dapper (is) , maar geenszins bemind ; a man (who is) ambitious and brave , but by no means beloved. DEGREES OF COMPARISON. Comparison expresses a higher or lower degree of the quality conveyed to nouns by adjectives. There are two degrees of comparison, trappen van ver- gelijking; the comparative, vergelijkende , and the superlati- ve, de overtreffende : the first expresses a quality superior or inferior in quality to the generality, whilst the latter signifies a state that cannot be exceeded; as, mfjne dochter is deugdzamer dan de nice, maar de zjjne is de dengdzaamste van alle drie , my daughter is more virtuous than yours , but his is the most virtuous of the three. The degrees of comparison can also be expressed by meer, more, minder, less, meest, most, and minste, least; this mode is used when the adjective has a figurative sense and does not seem to admit of a direct comparison ; as, doordrongen, penetrated; doorhneed, impressed ; as in the sentences: hij is van die waarheid meer doordrongen dan zij , he is more penetrated with this truth than she; gij zijt in de regtswetenschap meer doorkneed dan uw broeder , you have more knowledge of the science of law than your brother. Some adjectives are compared irregularly; as , goed, good , betcr, better, best, best; veel, much, meer, more, meest, most. Some adjectives expressing the highest or lowest de- gree of quality in themselves do not admit of compari- son ; as , 40 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. allerlei all sorts achtvoudig eightfold beendroog dry as bona blocdwarm bloodwarm bloedlaauw bloodwarm doodstil dead silent doodbleek deadly pale driemaandsch three months driejarig three year old engelrein pure as an angel hemelhoog high as heaven honigzoet stoeet as honey ijzerhard hard as iron ijskoud ice cold kurkdroog dry as cork kokendheet boiling hot loodzwaar heavy as lead . I by word of mouth mondeling J onheilzwanger pregnant with cala- parelzuiver pure as pearl ntity pekzwart pitch black pijlsnel swift as an arrow pestzwanger pregnant with the pla- schriftelijk written gue sneeuwwit white as snow vierkant square vuurrood red as fire zeskant six-sided zeahoekig hexagonal The comparative degree is formed by adding er; as* groot, great, grooter, greater; zwart, black, zwarter, blacker. The superlative is formed by adding st ; as , hoog , high , hoogsl, highest; zwart , black, zwartst, blackest. Adjectives ending in r, preceded by a long vowel , form the comparative by taking tier; as, duur, dear, duurder , dearer; dierbaar, affectionate, dierlaarder , more affectio- nate ; zwaar , heavy , zicaarder , heavier ; guar , sharp , guurder, sharper; etc. Adjectives ending in i take jer in the comparative ; as , fraai, pretty, fraaljer , prettier; moot, pretty, mooijer , prettier; lui , idle, luijer, idler. Adjectives ending in f or s , preceded by a long vowel sound , change f or s into ver, in the comparative ; as, lief, dear , liever , dearer ; braaf, brave , braver , braver ; doof, deaf, doover, deafer; boos, angry, boozer, more angry; etc. Compound adjectives are compared by inflecting the lat- ter one of the compound; as, goedhoop, cheap , goedkoo- per , cheaper , goedkoopst , cheapest , etc. Adjectives ending in s form the superlative by taking t only ; as wijs , wise , wijst , wisest ; but when declined they take ste ; as , de wijst e man , the wisest man. The comparative and superlative degrees , are declined tike the positive. DUTCH ETYMOLOGY 41 DECLENSION OF THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLA- TIVE OF ADJECTIVES. MaNNELIJK. Enkelvoudig. de, or ! Masculine. Singular, the, or een des, or I eens j den, or i eenen j den, or i eenen zwarter-e hoed zwartcr-en hoeds zwarter-en hoed a of the, or of a to the, or to a blacker hat blacker hat blacker hat zwarler-en hoed blacker hat Vrouwelijk. Enkelvoudig. de , or eene der, or eener der, or eener de , or eene the, or schooner-e* vrouw a , ofthe, scnooner-e vrouw or of a to the, schooner-e vrouw schooner-e vrouw or to a the, or a Onzijdig. Enkelvoudig . het grooter-e schip grooter schip grooter-en setups j een I des, or I eens I den, or I eenen het een grooter-en schepe grooter-e schip grooter schip the a of the, or of a to the, or to a the a Feminine. Singular. more beautiful woman more beautiful woman more beautiful woman more beautiful woman Neuter. Singular. j greater ship greater ship greater ship greater ship - In like manner is declined the superlative. The plural of the comparative and superlative degrees presents no variation to that of the adjective in the posi- tive degree. * The « is generally suppressed for the sake of harmony. 42 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. Quantity is signified by converting the nouns of number or names of ciphers into adjectives, and they then denote the number or quantity of a thing. Number or quantity is expressed by the ciphers l to 9 which are made to signify any number required, according to their arrangement , the ciphers themselves are nouns of the feminine gender, but considered as adjectives, they are classed into , l . Hoofdgetallen or grondgetallen , cardinal numbers; and, 2. Algemeene telwoorden, ordinal numbers. CARDINAL NUMBERS. The cardinal numbers signify a collective partial quantity ; as , absolute, or een 1 one twee 2 ttco drie 3 three vier 4 four vijf 5 five zes 6 six zeven 7 seven acht 8 eight negen 9 nine tien 10 ten elf eleven twaalf twelve dertien thirteen veertien fourteen vijf tien fifteen zestien sixteen zeventien seventeen achttipn eighteen negentien nineteen twintig twenty dertig thirty veertig forty vi J fti S fifty zestig sixty zeventig seventy tachtig eighty negentig ninety honderd hundred duizend thousand millioen million The units are placed before the decimals; and they are connected by the conjunction en , and ; hundred, thousand, etc. are placed first and are not connected by the conjunc- tion; as, een en twintig drie en dertig vijf en veertig acht en negentig honderd drie en vijftig duizend en zeven drie honderd en tien twenty one thirty three forty five ninety eight a hundred and fifty three a thousand and seven three hundred and ten achttien honderd twee en twintig eighteen hundred and twenty two The cardinal numbers are placed before the noun which they qualify; as, zes honderd vy'f en zestig inwoners, six hundred and sixty five inhabitants. DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 45 The cardinal number een is sometimes marked with an accent e'en to distinguish it from the article een; as, e'en man is verongelukl , one man has perished , een man is vcr- ongelukt , a man has perished ; the cardinal number e'en is declined like the article een and is sometimes followed by eenig , only , and sometimes preceded by maar , only or but, to give it additional energy; as, maar een kind, only one child ; het is voor eenen eenigcn leerling , it is only for one pupil; maar eene eenige vrouw, only one woman. If the definite article de, het, or the pronouns deze, mijn, uw , zijn, precede e'en, the latter is then declined like an adjective and ends in e short in the nominative wheth- er the noun is masculine or neuter; as, de eene, the one; gij spreekt van den eenen, you speak of the one; het eene boek, the one book; mijn eene hnis, my one house, or one of my houses; deze eene vriend, this one friend. This form of expression is better substituted by that of placing first the numeral then the pronoun and then the noun; as, een mijner huizen, one of my houses; eene uwer zusters , one of your sisters ; een hunner paarden , one of their horses. ORDINAL NUMBERS. The ordinal numbers are used to express the relative or- der in which a thing stands; they are formed from the cardinal numbers by adding ste or de. Een, acht, twintig, and the following decimals, take ste, as also honderd, duizend, millioen; the other cardinals take de: they are always preceded by the definite article; as, de eerste the first de negende the ninth de tweede the second de tiende the tenth de derde the third de elfde the eleventh de vierde the fourth de twintigste the twentieth de vijfde the fifth de honderdste the hundredth de zesde the sixth de duizendste the thousandth de zevende the seventh de honderd en eerste the hundred and first de achtste the eighth de twee honderdste the two hundredth PRAXIS ON THE UNION OF AN ARTICLE , A NOUN , AND AN ADJECTIVE, Een goede raad. A good council. u DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. Een sterk paard. Een fraai huis. Ilet ligchaam is sterfelijk. De ziel is onsterfelijk. Kwade gesprekken bederven goede zeden. De man heeft staler) messen en zilvcren vorken. De omstreken der stad zijn laag en moerassig. Geef dtm laerling een vel fraai wit papier. Amsterdam is eene volkrijke stad. Parijs is volkrijker dan Amster- dam. Londen is de volkrijksle stad van Europa. Mijn jongste zoon is vlijtiger dan de andere leerlingen dezer school. Beschaving veredelt de gezellige verkecring. Eene goede opvoeding sluit alle onaangename en onedele in- drukken van de gezellige ver- keering uit. Welvoegelijkheid en fijngevoelig- heid weren alles , wat slechts min of meer ongevalligen in- druk zou kunnen maken , af. Amsterdam is de groolste en aan- zienlijkste stad van het Koning- rijk der Nederlanden. De Amstel is eene rivier of lie- ver zacht afloopende stroom in het noordelijk gedeelte der pro- vincie Holland. Er bestaat niet slechts eene lig- chamelijke , maar ook eene ver- standelijke blindheid; want men spreekt van blinde gehoorzaam- heid , blind geloof , blind ver- trouwen , etc. A strong horse. A fine house. The body is mortal. The soul is immortal. Evil communications corrupt good morals. The man has steel knives and sil- ver forks. The environs of the city are low and marshy. Give the pupil a sheet of fine white paper. Amsterdam is a populous city. Paris is more populous than Am- sterdam. London is the mo»t populous city of Europe. My youngest son is more diligent than the other pupils of this ichool. Civilization ennobles social inter- course. A good education excludes every disagreeable and ignoble impres- sion from social intercourse. Politeness and fine feeling exclude every thing which only could give rise to less or more objec- tionable impressions. Amsterdam is the greatest and most considerable city of the Kingdom of the Netherlands. The Amstel is a river or rather a gently flowing stream in the northern part of the province of Holland. There is not only a bodily but also a mental blindness; for we speak of a blind obedience, blind faith , blind confidence , etc. DUTCH ETYMOLOGY 45 Do bliksemafieider bestaat uit eerie ijzeren stang van een' duim dik- te , met eene spits? koperen punt, die ten minsle vijf of zes voeten lang is, van dezelve loopt eene koperen ketting , af. Het bijgeloof maakt den mensch angstig, bevreesd, wantrouwig, onverdaaagzaam , en wreed. Rede en overtuiging zijn de bil- lijkste wapenen, waarmede men met vrucht het bijgeloof kan bestrijden. De Ameriknansche wilden, de an- ders , zoo onverschillige, zoo koelbloedige , zoo stilzwijgen- de, zoo belanglooze Amerikaan- sche wilden, worden, zoodra zij spclen , gretig , ongeduldig, luidrucbtig, en als dolzinnig. The conductor of lightning con- sists of an iron rod an inch thick , with a pointed copper point , which is at least five feet long ; from it proceeds a brass chain. Superstition renders man , anx- ious , timid , mistrustful , in- tolerant, and cruel. Reason and conviction are the most constant arms with which one can effectually contend a- gainst superstition. The American savages, the other- wise so indifferent , so phleg matick , so taciturn, so disin- terested American savages , be- come , as soon as they gamble, greedy , i inpatient , boisterous , and as it were mad. PRONOUNS. A pronoun is used instead of a noun to avoid the too frequent ' repetition of it, or in asking questions; as, Willem is een goede jongen, hij gehoorzaamt zijne onders , William is a good boy , lie obeys his parents ; wie gaat daar ? who goes there? de man dien ik acht , the man whom I esteem: or it shows an object more distinctly than is done by the definite article ; as , deze man , this man ; die vrouw , that woman. Pronouns are divided into persoonlyke , personal; lezitte- lijke , possessive ; aanwijzende , demonstrative ; betrekkelijke , relative; and vragende , interrogative. Most of the pronouns are varied ; some are not varied. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. Nouns or the names of persons and things can be re- presented by personal pronouns. A personal pronoun can represent the person who speaks , the person spoken to ; or] the person or thing spoken of; thus there are three persons; as, First-person, eerste persoon, the person who 46 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. speaks or acts , Second person , tweede persoon , the per- son , or animal , spoken to ; Third person , derde persoon , the person or thing spoken of or acted upon: they are 1. ik / 2. gij thou or you 3. hij he , zij she , het it wij we zij they Sometimes in familiar discourse we , ge,ze, are used for wy , gij, zij. To these personal pronouns may be added the compounds ik zelf, I myself; gij zelf, you yourself; hij zelf, he himself; zij zelve, she herself; hetzelf, itself; zelf, being placed af- ter the pronoun, gives it additional energy; as, niet hij, maar ik zelf heb het gedaan, not he, but 1 myself have done it ; niet alleen ik , maar zij zelve was tegcnwoordig , not only I , but she herself was present; ik heb het zelf gezien, I have seen it (itself). Niemand , nobody , no one ; iemand, some body, some one; daar , there is or are ; er , there is or are ; men , people ; het, it, are indefinite personal pronouns, onbepaalde per- soonlijke voornaamwoorden , and are indeclinable. Zich, himself, etc. is used with verbs reflective, wederkeerige werkwoorden, it is always in the accusa- tive case, and is undeclined; as, hij vergist zich, he is de- ceived ; zich wasschen, to wash one's self; zij laden zich, they bathe themselves. Elkander and malkander , each other , are also personal pronouns and are indeclinable, these pronouns are used with verbs active ; as , zij beminnen elkander (or malkan- der) , they love each other ; when these pronouns signify possession , they take an s ; as , wij konden elkanders klee- deren dragen , we could wear each other's dresses. DECLENSION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. Eerste Persoon, First Person, voor alle geslachten. • for all genders. Enkelvoudig. Meervoudig. Singular. Plural. 1. ik wij / tec 2. I rnijner , j van mij or onzer , or van ons my our 3. f mij , or { aan mij ons , or aan ons to me to us 4. mij ons me us DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 47 TWEEDE PERSOON , Second Person , voor alle geslachten. for all genders. Enltelvoudig. Mecrvoudig, Singular. Plural. 1. gij gij, or gij lieden, or gijl. * thou you or ye 1 uws , or 2. 1 van u uwer , or van a thy your 1 u , or 3. 1 aan u u , or aan u to thee to you 4. u u thee you Derde Persoon , Mannelijk. Enkelvoudig . Meervoudig . hij zij zijner , or hunner , or van hem van hen hem , or hun , or aan hem aan hen hem hen Vrouwelijk. Enkelvoudig. Meervoudig. zij zij, or zij lieden, or zijl. f harer , or harer , or van haar van haar haar , or haar, or aan haar aan haar haar haar Third Person, Masculine. Singular. Plural. he his they their to him to them him them Feminine. Singular. Plural. she they her their to her her to them them * Gijlieden . you , abreviated gijl. is seldom employed , the sin- gular gij being substituted for ths plural gijlieden; Uto Edele, you , abreviated UE. is commonly used in writing as being more respectful. Zijn Edele , he j abreviated ZE. is often used for the third per- son singular in writing , as a mark of greater respect : Hun Edele , they ; abreviated HE. plural. •f Zijlieden , abreviated zijl. is seldom used , zij being used for both numbers. Haar Edele , abreviated HE. is often used for this pronoun as a mark of greater respect. 48 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. Onzr dig-. Neuter Enkehoudig. Meervoudig. Singular. Plural. !. het zi J it they 1 ziins, or 2. van het hunncr , van hen or its their | het , or aan het hun , or aan hen to it to them 4. het hen it them Ze is often used in familiar discourse for the accusa- tive plural hen ; as , Ik heb ze (hen) gezien , I have seen them. Er van is often used as a personal pronoun for van hem , haar , or het ; as , Ik heb my lot die zaak verbonden , en nu kan ik er van (van haar) niet af, I have bound my- self to that affair and cannot get off it. DECLENSION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS WITH ZELF, ZELVE. Mannelijk. Masculine. ik zelf I myself van mij zelven of me myself J mij zelven, or tome myself J aan mij zelven J J mij zelven me myself gij zelf you yourself van u zelven of you yourself u zelven, or to you yourself aan u zelven J u zelven you yourself hij zelf he himself van hem zelven of him himself hem zelven, or , , to him himself aan hem zelven hem zelven him himself Onzijdig. 1. het zelf 2. van het zelf 3. aan het zelf 4. hH zelf Vrouwelijk. ik zelvs van mij zelve my zelve , or aan mij zelve mij zelve gij zelve van u zelve u zelve, or aan u zelve u zelve zij zelve van haar zelve \ haar zelve, or aan haar zelve haar zelve Neuter. it itself of it itself to it itself it itself Feminine. / myself of me myself to me myself me myself you yourself ofyo u your self to you yourself you yourself she herself of her herself to her herself her herself DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 49 Hetzelf is little used ; as in speaking of a child , we do not say, ik heb hetzelf gezien, I have seen it (itself); it is better to say , ik heb hot hind zelf gezien , I have seen the child itself. The plural of zelf in all the cases and genders is zel- ven ; as , wij zelven , we ourselves ; gij zelven , you your- selves ; zij zelven, they themselves ; van hen zelven, of them- selves ; etc. Zich zelven , himself or themselves , etc. is often used for the sake of energy ; as , hij spreekt van zich zelven , he speaks of himself; zij beminnen zich zelven , they love themselves ; hij heeft geen rijkdommen van zich zelven , he has no riches of his own. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. Possessive pronouns imply possession or a property, and represent not only the gender of the person or the thing that is the possession , but also sometimes the gender of the person or thing that possesses. In the third person the pronoun indicates the gender of the possessor, and the inBection indicates that of the poss' ssed ; but in the first and second persons only the gender of the posses- sed is identified. The possessive pronouns are mijn , my ; uw , your ; -zijn , his; haar , her, for the singular; ons , our; uw, your; hun, their; haar , their , for the plural. The possessive pronouns are declined like adjectives, and must agree with the thing possessed in gender , num- ber , and case. List of the possessive pronouns joined to nouns in the nominative case : Eerste Persoon , First Person , Voor alle geslachten, For all genders. M. mij:\ vader my father mijne vaders my fathers V. mijne roceder my mother ' mijne moeders my mothers 0. mijn boek my book mijne boeken my books M. onze broeder our brother omc broeders our brothers V. onze zuster our sister onze zusters our sisters 0. ons paard our horse onze paarden our horses. 4 50 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. TWEEDE PEKSOON, Voor alle geslachten, M. uw man your husband V. uwe vrouw your roife O. uw kind your child Derde Persoon, Man. en Onz. Enkelvoudig M. zijn knecht his man servant V. zijne dienstmeid his maid servant. 0. zijn huis his house Man. en Onz. Meervoudig , M. hun knecht their servant V. hunne moeder their mother 0. hun kind their child Second Person. For all genders. uwe mannen your husbands uwe vrouwen your wives uwe kinderen your children. Third Person. Mas. and Neut. Singular. zijne knechten his man servants zijne dienstmeiden his maid ser- vants. zijne huizen his houses Mas. and Neut. Plural. hunne knechten their servants hunne moeders their mothers hunne kinderen their children Vrouwelijk, Enkelvoudig, Feminine, Singular. M. haar neef her nephew V. hare nicht her niece 0. haar kleed her dress Vrouwelijk , Meervoudig , BI. haar knecht their servant V. hare moeder their mother 0. haar kind their child hare neven her nephews hare nichten her nieces hare kleederen her dresses Feminine , Plural. hare knechten their servants hare moeders their mothers hare kinderen their children DECLENSION OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS WITH A NOUN. Mannelijk. Enkelvoudig. Vrouwelijk. mijn vader mijne moeder mijn.s vaders, or mijner moeder, or van mijnen vader van mijne moeder mijnen vader , or mijner moeder, or aan mijnen vader aan mijne moeder mijnen vader mijne moeder Onzijdig. mijn boek mijns boeks, or van mijn boek mijnen boek , or aan mijn boek mijn boek. DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 51 Meervoudig. Mannelijk. Vrouwelijk. Onzijdig. 1 . mijne vaders mijne moeders mijne boeken j mijner vaders, or mijner moeders, or mijner boekeu , or I van mijne vaders van myne moeders van mijne boeken. _ I mijnen vaders, or mijner moeders, or mijnen boeken , or I aan mijne vaders aan mijne moeders aan mijne boeken 4. mijne vaders mijne moeders mijne boeken. In like manner are declined, ons> uw, zijn, haar, hun, hare. Uw Edele , UEd. ; Zijn Edele, ZEd. ; Haar Edele , HEd. ; Hun Edele , HEd. ; are used in polite writing for the pos- sessive pronouns ; as, UEds. huis for uw huis, your house ; ZEds. koets for zxjne koets, his coach; HEd. zuster for hare zuster , her sister; HEd. paarden for hunne paarden , their horses. The possessive pronouns are sometimes used without the noun or thing possessed, and then they take the de- finite article de for the masculine or feminine, and het for the neuter before them , and will have e short final in the nominative singular , and take en in the plural like nouns ; as, uw huis is fraai, maar de mijnen (mijne huizen) zijn fraaijer dan het uwe (uw huis) , your house is fine but mine are finer than yours; they are de or het mijne, mine; de or het uwe , yours; de or het zijne , his; de or het hare , hers ; de or het onze , ours ; de or het hare, theirs ; de or het hunne , theirs ; they are declined in the following manner , and the article as when before nouns. DECLENSION OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS WITH- OUT THE NOUN. The thing possessed in the singular. Mannelijk. Vrouwelijk. Onzijdig. Forallgend. 1. de mijne de mijne het mijne mine I des mijnen, or der mijne , or des mijnen, or 2. , , , of mine j van den mijnen van de mijne van het mijne „ I den mijnen , or der mijne , or den mijne, or ' J J U x - t0 minB I aan den mijnen aan de mijne aan het mijne 4. den mijnen de mijne het mijne mine The thing possessed in the plural. 52 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. Mannelijk. Vrouwelijk. Onzijdig. Forallgend. de mijnen de mijnen de mijnen der mijnen, or der mijnen, or der mijnen, or van de mijnen van de mijnen van de mijnen den mijnen, or der mijnen, or den mijnen, or aan de mijnen aan de mijnen aan de mijnen 4- de mijnen de mijnen de mijnen mine of mine The other possessives are declined after the same manner. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. Demonstrative pronouns serve to point out the object with greater precision than is done by the definite ar- ticle de , het , the ; they are deze dit die dat gene degene diegene hetgeen hetgene this that that which dezelve dezelfde zekere desgelijke dergelijke dusdanige zoodanige zulk he , she , it the same certain such like tuch The demonstrative pronouns deze , dit , this , refer to the thing nearest; die, dat, that, refer to the object at a greater distance, and gene, that, that yonder, refers to an object at the greatest distance ; they are always follow- ed by a noun expressed or understood , with, which they must agree in gender, number, and case ; as, Ik bemin deze Moemen , mijne zuster die , en haar zwager gene, I love these flowers , my sister those , and her brother in law those ; they are thus declined : DECLENSION OF DEZE, DIT, THIS. Mannelijk , Masculine. Enkelvoudig , Singular. Meerwudig Plural, these boys dezejongen this boy dezesjongens, or ^ ^, van dezenjongen dezenjongen,or t0 this boy dezen jongens, or fQ the$e boy$ aan d ezenjongen aan deze jongens dezeii jongen this boy deze jongens these boys deze jongens dezer jongens, or . - . r ' a these boys r van deze jongens dezen jongens, 01 aan dezejongen! deze jongens I) UTCH E T Y M L G Y. Enkelvoitdig , deze bloom j dezer bloem, or 1 van deze bloem I dezer bloem, or 1 aan deze bloem deze bloem Yrouwelijk, Feminine. Singular. Mcervoadig , this flower this flower' s to this flower this flower Onzijdig , dit huis this house dezes huizes, or van dit huis dezen huis, or aan dit huis dit huis this house this houses' 1 s to this house deze bloemen dezer bloemen, or van deze bloemen dezer bloemen, or aan deze bloemen deze bloemen Neuter. deze huizen dezer huizen, or van deze huizen dezen huizen, or aan deze huizen deze huizen Plural. these flowers these flowers' to these flowers these flowers these houses these houses' to these houses these houses DECLENSION OF DIE , DAT , THAT. Mannelijk , Masculine. Enkelvoudig. Singular. Meervoudig. Plural. i. die knaap that lad die knapen those lads 2. I diens knaaps, ot 1 van dien knaap that lad's dier knapen, or van die knapen those lads' 3. j dien knaap, or 1 aan dien knaap to that lad dien knapen, or aan die knapen to those lads 4. dien knaap that lad Yrouwelijk , die knapen Feminine. those lads 1. die leeuwin that lioness die leeuwinnen those lionesses 2. 1 dier leeuwin, or j van die leeuwin that lioness's dier leeuwinnen, or van die leeuwinnen those lionesses ' 3. | dier leeuwin, or J aan die leeuwin iothat lioness dier leeuwinnen, or aan die leeuwinnen to those lio- nesses 4. die leeuwin that lioness Onzijdig;, die leeuwinnen Neuter. those lionesses 1. dat meisje that girl die meisje* those girls 2. j diens meisjet 1 van dat mei , 01 sje that girl's dier meisjes, or van die meisjes those girls' 3. I dien meisje, or 1 , aan dat meisje to that girl dien meisjes, or aan die meisjes to those git Is 4. dat meisje that girl die meisjes those girls 54 DUTCH ETYMO LOGY. DECLENSION OE THE PRONOUN GENE, THAT, THE OTHER OR THAT YONDER. Mannelijk, Masculine. Enkelvoudig , Singular. Meervoudig , Plural. gene graaf genes graafs, or van genen graaf genen graaf, or aan genen graaf genen graaf that count that count's to that count that count gene graven gener graven, or van gene graven genen graven, or aan gene graven gene graven those counts those counts' to those counts those counts Vrouwelijk, Feminine. Enkelvoudig , Singular. Meervoudig , Plural. I . gene gravin that countess gene gravinnen gener gravin, or , that countess's van gene gravin those coun- tesses gener gravinnen, or those coun- van gene gravinnen tesses' gener gravin, or .'.,', . gener gravinnen, or to those 00 to that countess ° & I aan gene gravin gene gravin that countess aan gene gravinnen countesses gene gravinnen those coun- tesses Enkelvoudig gene paleis I genes paleizes, or J van gene paleis f genen paleis, or Onzijdig, Singular. that palace that palace' * to that palace Neuter. Meervoudig , Plural. gene paleizen those palaces gener paleizen, or , , r , those palaces van gene paleizen genen paleizen, or aan gene paleis gene palsis that palace to the palaces aan gene paleizen gene paleizen those palaces The demonstrative pronoun degene , that which , is less vague in pointing out the thing referred to than diegene , that which , the former is followed by the relative pro- noun die or welke , who or which , and the latter by welke only; these pronouns when met with in the nomi- native case can be replaced by hi) , he , or zij , she ; as , degene (hij or zij) die mij vriendschap oewijst , he who shows me friendship; diegenen welke zich daaraan heooen ver- grepen , those who have renderd themselves culpable. The compound demonstrative pronouns are declined in both parts of their composition de , die and gene. DUTCH E T YMOLOG Y. 55 DECLENSION OF THE PRONOUN DEGENE, HE, OR SHE , OR THE PERSON. Mannelijk , Masculine. Enkelvoudig , Singular. Meervoudig , Plural 1. degene he degenen they 1 desgenen, or 1 van dengenen his dergenen , or van degenen theirs „ [ dengenen, or \ aan dengenen to him dengenen, or aan degenen to them 4. dengenen him degenen them Vrouwelijk, Feminine. Enkelvoudig , Singular. Meervoudig, Plural. 1. degene she degenen they 2. dergene, or van degene hers dergenen, or van degenen theirs Q [ dergene, or j aan degene to her dergenen, or aan degenen to them 4. degene her degenen them The demonstrative hetgene , hctgeen , what or that which; is thns declined , Onzijdig , Enkelvoudig , Singular. 1 . hetgene, hetgeen it I desgenen , or I van hetgene r, [ dengenen , or I aan hetgene 4. hetgene it Neuter. Meervoudig , degenen Plural. they to it dergenen, or van degenen dengenen, or aan degenen degenen them theirs to them Diegene is declined like degene , with this difference that die follows the declension of that pronoun when before a noun , as at page 55. The demonstrative pronouns dezelve , he , she ; hetzelve , it , are substantive pronouns ; and dezelfde , helzelfde , the same , are adjective pronouns, and are always followed by a noun expressed or understood ; as , deze twee gcschriften zijn door dezelfde hand geschreven , these two writings are written by the same hand ; de som is groot hoe zal ik dezelve betalen , the sum is great how shall I pay it ? 56 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. Dezelve , he , she ; hetzelve , it , are thus declined : Mannelijk , Masculine. l. 3. Enkelvoudig , Singular. Meervoudig , Plural. dezelve he dezelve they deszelfs , deszelven, or his van denzelven derzelver, or van dezelve theirs denzelven, or aan denzelven to him denzelven, or aan dezelve to them denzelven him dezelve them Vrouwelijk , F eminine. Enkelvoudig , Singular. Meervoudig , PluraU 1. dezelve she dezelve they 1 derzelver, or 1 van dezelve her derzelver, or i , theirs van dezelve j derzelver, or 1 aan dezelve to her derzelver, or j7 to them aan dezelve 4. dezelve her dezelve them Onzijdig , Neuter. Enkelvoudig , Singular. Meervoudig , Plural. hetzelve it dezelve they deszelfs, deszelven van hetzelve , or its derzelver, or van dezelve theirs denzelven, or aan hetzelve to it denzelven, or aan dezelve to them hetzelve it dezelve them The pronoun dezelfde , the same ; follows the same declension as dezelve , except the masculine and neuter singular in which they are thus declined: Mannelijk , dezelfde f deszelfden, or j van denzelfden denzelfden, or aan denzelfden denzelfden Masculine. the same of the same to the same the same Onzijdig , hetzelfde deszelfden, or van hetzelfde denzelfden, or aan denzelfden hetzelfde Neuter. the same of the same to the same the same The demonstrative pronouns zeker, certain; zulk, such; desgelijke , dergelijke , such like ; dusdanige , and zoodanige , DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 51 such, are all declined after the same manner; as for example , zulk , with a noun understood. Enkelvoudig , Mann. Vrouw. Onz. zulke zulke zulk Meervoudig. Mann. Vrouw. Onz. zulke van zulken van zulke van zulk van zulke zulke zulke zulker, or zulker, or van zulke van zulke zulken, or zulke, or zulken zulken, or zulker, zulken, aan zulken aan zulke zulk, or aan zulke zulke, or zulke, or aan zulk aan zulke aan zulke zulken zulke zulk zulke zulke zulke When these pronouns are followed by een they remain undeclined; as, zulk een, zulk eene; ik heb zulk eenen man gezien , I have seen such a man. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. Relative pronouns , betrckkelijke voornaamwoorden , refer to persons or things already expressed or understood , with which they agree in gender and number ; as , de edelmoedige man, wien wij reel verpligt'mg hebben, the gene- rous man to whom we are much obliged. Sometimes a relative is employed substantively, in which case two relatives are present in the same sentence ; as , wien ik lets beloof, dien zal ik woord houden , to whom I promise any thing , with him I shall keep my word. The relative pronouns are die , dat wie , wat welke dewelke , helwelk >/jo , xchich , that Die and wie , who or which , in the nominative and accusative , are used only for the masculine and femi- nine , they have the same meaning , but die is used more for the nominative and wie for the genitive and dative, and die or wie indiscriminately for the objective ; as , de koning die ons beschermt , the king who protects us ; de honing wiens liefde wij kennen , the king whose love we know ; de koning wien ik dat gezegd heb , the king to whom 4 * 58 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. I have told it ; de honing dien or wien ik hoogacht , the king whom I esteem. Welke is used in more elevated style , while die and wie are used more in familiar intercourse. DECLENSION OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. Enkelwudig , Singular. Mannelijk. Vrouwelijk. Onzijd. For all gend. 1. die wie welke die wie welke welk who, or which 2. diens wiens welks dier wier welker welks whose 3. dien wien welken die wie welke welken to whom, or which 4. dien wien welken die wie welke welk whom, or which Meervoudig , Plural. Mannelijk en Vrouwelijk. Onzijdig. For all gend. 1 . die wie welke die welke who , or which 2. dier wier welker dier welker whose 3. die wie welke die welke to whom, or which 4. die wie welke die welke whom , or which Dal , and wat , that or which , are used in the neuter singular only and are indeclinable ; as , het huts dot gij gekocht hebt , the house that you have bought ; alles wat van hem geschreven wordt is waar , all that is written of him is true : die and welke are used for the neuter plu- ral ; as, de paarden die (or welke) ik gekocht heb, the horses which I have bought ; and also for the genitive and da- tive singular ; as , het paard welks veulen dood is , the horse whose foal is dead. The genitive , dative , and accusative , in both numbers of the relatives , are sometimes expressed thus : waarvan for van die , wat , or welke. waaraan for aan die , wat , or welke. waarin for in die , wat , or welke. waaruit for uit die , wat , or welke. waardoor for door die, wat, or welke. This form is only used when animals or inanimate things are referred to , and never for persons ; as, de boomen waarvan gij spreekt, the trees of which you speak; de bloem waaraan het behoort , the flower to which it belongs. DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 3.9 The compound relative dewelke who or which ; is sel- dom used and when used is generally in more elevated style , and can be replaced by welke. Dewelke , hetwelk , is declined in both parts of its com- position ; thus , Enkelwudig , Singular. Mannelijk. Vrouwelijk. Onzijdig. Forallgend. 1. dewelke dewelke hetwelk who , or which 2. | deswelken , or derwelke , or deswelken , or whose 1 van denwelken van dewelke van hetwelk 3. J denwelken , or derwelker, or denwelken, or to whom, or 1 aan denwelken aan dewelke aan hetwelk which 4. denwelken dewelke Meervoudig. hetwelk whom , or which Plural. Mannelijk. Vrouwelijk. Onzijdig. Forallgend. 1. dewelke dewelke dewelke who , or which 2. | derwelker , or J van dewelke derwelker, or van dewelke derwelker , or van dewelke whose 3. j denwelken, or dewelke , or dewelke , or to whom, ox 1 aan dewelke aan dewelke aan dewelke which 4. dewelke dewelke dewelke whom, or which INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. Interrogative pronouns are placed before the person or thing referred to, and are used in asking questions; the answer to the question being in the same case as the in- terrogative ; as , wiens huts is dit ? het is van mij , or het mijne, whose house is this? it is mine. The interrogative pronouns are, wie welke who which wat hoedani/r what what sort The interrogative wie is used for persons only. When the gender of the person is not known the relative is then 60 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. declined in the masculine, but when the gender is ex- pressed then it must agree with it; as, Wie is daar? Jan. Who is there ? John ; van wien spreekt gij ? of whom do you speak ? wien hebt gij het gegeven ? aan niemand ; to whom have you given it ? to no one ; wie heb ik de eer te spreken? (aan) de Jufvrouio B; to whom have I the honor to speak? to M rs . B. Die interrogative is declined like die relative and never takes the noun after it. Welke is employed as well for persons as for things , and is followed by a noun expressed or understood ; as r van welke Moemen spreekt gij? van deze , of which flowers do you speak ? of these ; welke uwer zonen heeft den brief weggebragt, de oudste of de jongste? which of your sons has taken the letter, the youngest or the eldest? this interrogative is declined like welke relative. The interrogative teat considered as the neuter of wie is used for things in general , the nature , gender , or number not being known ; it is indeclinable ; it is used sometimes alone , and when followed by a substantive it generally takes voor immediatly after it; as , wot zoekt gij? what are you looking for ? wat voor eene vrouw is die ? what woman is that? wat voor eenen landsman zijt gij ? what countryman are you ? Waarvan , waardoor , etc. are often used for van wat , door wat, when things are referred to; as, waarvan wordt dat gemaakt? of what is that made? Hoedanig is used to enquire after the nature or quality of persons or things ; and is always followed by a sub- stantive or a verb; as, hoedanige man is het? het is een minzaam man , what sort of a man is it? it is an afTable man; hoedanig gebouw is het? het is een ruim gebouw , what sort of a building is it ? it is a capacious building ; this interrogative is declined like an adjective. Welk and hoedanig sometimes take een after them , in which cases the pronouns remain undeclined and een fol- lows the declension of the article een and gives to the noun which follows an additional precision; as, hoedanig eenen man hebt gij ooit gezien ? have you ever seen such a man? welk een is het van die boomen? which one is it of those trees? DUTCH ETYMOLOGY in PRAXIS ON THE USE OF THE PRONOUNS. Ik geef hen het boek. Van welke boeken spreekt gij ? van die en van dit. Breng mij die pen en dat pen- nemes. Ik schrijf mijnen vriendsn. Wiens huis is dit? het is van mij. Men moot d" wetten gehoorzamen. Waarvan spreekt gij ? van nuttigc wetensehappcn. / giro the book to them. Of which books do you speak? of those and of this. Bring me that pen and that pen- knife. I am writing to my friends. Whose house is this? it is mine. One must obey the laws. Of what are you speaking ? of useful sciences. Iedereen weet het nieuws hetwclk Every one knows the news which gij in den brief uws vriends hebt gelezen. Waaraan h?eft hij zich schuldig gemaakt ? aan hoogverraad. Wat voor een boek is dat ? het is Ho o f t s werken. Heeft hij zich bezeerd ? you have read in your friend's letter. Of what icas he guilty ? of high- treason. What book is that? it is Hooft's icorks. lias he wounded himself? De ziekte waaraan zij overladen is. The sickness of which she died. e 8?y The observation of which you speak. Who toill come hither to day , your nephew or your cousin ? What will you do ? De aanmerking van welk spreekt. Wie zal heden hier komen , uw neef of uwe nicht ? Wat wilt gij doen ? Mijn paard is fraai , maarhetuwe My horse is fine, but yours is is fraaijer dan het mijne. finer than mine. De weinigen die daaraan deeln?men. The few who take a part in it. Waren er veel ? Were there many ? Een land dat van zoodanigen mil- A country that must exist by such handel raoet bestaan. a barter trade. Na deze aanmerkingen wegens onze After these observations respecting zeevaart en onzen zeehandel gaan our navigation and trade we wij thans tot derzelver eigenlijke proceed now to their particular geschiedenis over. history. Daartoe was zulk eene geaardheid Thereto such a disposition as he als hij bezit , noodig , zulk een possesses , was requisite , such welberaden overleg, zulk eene zucht tot werkzaamheid , zulk een bedaarde moed in de groot- ste gevaren. a deliberate consideration, such an inclination to industry, such a cool courage in the greatest dangers. VERBS. ,V Verb , werkwoord , expresses the existance of a thing: '- 62 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. as, zijn, to be, and can signify also the modification of this existance as to action, repose, or suffering; as, beminnen, to love; slaan. to strike; slapen, to sleep; grieven, to grieve. Zijn , wezen , or worden , to be , are the only verbs which express existance , and they are present , expressed or un- derstood in all other verbs , which are in fact but a state or modification of the verb To be ; as , ik ben , I am ; ik loop , for ik ben loopende) I run , for am running) ; zij bemin- nen, (or zij zijn beminnende), they love, (or are loving.) The Verbs may he divided into simple and compound , the former are chiefly derived, in common with other words, from the Teutonic, and the compound verbs are formed by the union of a simple verb with a noun , a preposi- tion , or a particle , the number of which , from the faci- lity with which the Dutch language compounds verbs, is very great ; as , from beeld an image, houwen, to cut, comes beeldhouwen, to carve; from brand, fire, stichten, to raise, brandsiichten , to set on fire ; from door , through , reizen , to travel, doorreizen, to travel through. Verbs are also divided into hulp-werkwoorden , auxiliary verbs , bedrijvende werkwoorden , active verbs ; lijdende werk- ivoorden , passive verbs ; onzijdige werkwoorden , neuter verbs; wederkeerige werkwoorden , reflective verbs , and onpersoon- lijke werkwoorden, impersonal verbs. Verbs are varied by verbuiging , conjugation , which is their modification as to wijs , mood ; tijd , tense ; persoon , person; getal , number. The root of the verb is its imperative mood , gebiedende ivijs; it is at least naturally to be inferred that that was its first form and use ; as , geef, give ; min , love ; ween niet, do not cry; eet , eat. Verbs, as to their conjugation, are divided into regelmati- ge werkwoorden , regular verbs , and onregelmatige werkwoor- den, irregular verbs. CONJUGATION OF VERBS. In the conjugation of verbs there are five moods, three participles , three tenses , three persons, and two numbers. OF THE MOODS. Mood of a verb is that form of it which shows the man- ner in which it is to be taken. DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 63 There are four moods: de gebiedende wijs , the impera- tive mood ; de onbepaalde wijs , the infinitive mood ; de aantoonende wijs, the indicative mood; and de aanvoegende wijs, the subjunctive mood. THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. The imperative mood , gebiedende wijs ; which is the root of the verb, and commands, exhorts, entreats, or permits; as, doe dit, do this; wees opleltend, be attentive; hoor naar mijne raad , listen to my advice. THE INFINITIVE MOOD. The infinitive mood, onbepaalde wijs, expresses a thing in a general manner without distinction of number, or person ; as , lezen , to read ; schrijven , to write ; loopen , to run ; te zullen loopen , about to run. If the infinitive is not preceded by the preposition te, the signification is then direct and immediate , when the pre- position te precedes the infinitive the signification of the verb is then oblique ; as , ik blijf eten, I remain dining ; ik blijf om te eten, I remain to dine (for the purpose of dining). Other prepositions also modify the infinitive, they are placed before the verb and have te between it and the pre- position; as, omtewcrken, for working; zonder te wer- ken , without working, The infinitive is often used as a noun and is then pre- ceded by het; as, het leeren is nattig , learning is useful; het schrijven is eene kunst , writing is an art. THE INDICATIVE MOOD. The indicative mood, aantoonende icijs, simply expres- ses the existance or state of a thing ; as , hij is rijk , he is rich; wij wandelden , we walked; zy hat en , they hate. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. The subjunctive mood, aanvoegende wijs, represents a thing under a condition , supposition , motive, wish, etc. accom- panied with a futurity , and preceded by a conjunction expressed or understood ; as , indien ik het koope , zal ik het betalen , if I buy it, I will pay for it ; leer opdat gij ver- standig wordet , learn that you may become wise. 64 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. PARTICIPLES. The participle, deelwoord, is a form of the verb partici- pating in the form of a verb and an adjective. In the conjugation of a verb three forms of the parti- ciple are present; as, The Present Participle; as from arbeiden, to work; arbeidende , working, in which is signified the act of wor- king at a time present. The Past Participle, which is formed by the particle ge and the root of the verb , and conveys an idea of time past in conjunction with the act; as, gcarbeid, worked; it is use4 in the formation of the compound past tenses of verbs in conjunction with the auxiliary ; as , ik heb gearbeid , I have worked. Those verbs compounded of an initial particle or an inseparable preposition do not take ge in the formation of the past-participle ; as , herstellen , to res- tore , hersteld , restored. The Future Participle is formed of the infinitive and the auxiliary zullen , and conveys an idea of future time with the action ; as , zullende arbeiden , about working. Participles are often used as adjectives but differ from them in this particular that they not only qualify the noun but mark also a time and an action ; as , een ar- beidende man , a working man , or a man who works , or is working; een fraai gewerkte doos, a beautifully wor- ked box. THE TENSES. Tense, tijd , is a modification of the verb as to time. There are three tenses : the present , de tegemvoordige ; the past , verledene ; and the future , de toekomende. PRESENT TENSE. The present tense , tegemvoordige tijd , expresses what is going on at the present time or at the time the person is speaking or writing ; as , ik schrijf nu aan mijnen broeder, I am now writing to my brother ; ik hoor wat gij zegt , I hear what you say ; zij slapen , they sleep. PAST TENSE. There are three past tenses , de onvolmaakt verledene tijd, DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. C5 the imperfect past tense ; de volmaakt verlcdene tijd , the perfect past tense ; and de zamengestelde verlcdene tijd , the compound past tense. IMPERFECT PAST TENSE. The imperfect past tense represents a time as imper- fectly or definitely past, or as having taken place at a certain specified time ; as , ik glng gisteren naar Amsterdam, I went yesterday to Amsterdam ; ik zag hem tocn hij hier was , I saw him when he was here; ik beminde haar voor hare deugd en zedigheid, I loved her for her virtue and modesty. PERFECT PAST TENSE. The perfect past tense , de volmaakt verledene tijd , re- presents a time as perfectly past without reference to any other time , or in reference to a time that is pas- sing away when speaking ; as , ik heb Hollandsch geleerd , I have learned Dutch ; wij zijn in Engeland geweest , we have been in England; ik heb hem van daag gezien, I have seen him to day. COMPOUND PAST TENSE. * The compound past tense , zamengestelde verledene tijd , represents an action as past before another event happen- ed ; as , ik was mrtrokken eer de kiok sloeg , I had depart- ed before the clock struck ; ik had mijnen brief geschreven tocn de post vertrok, I had written my letter when the post departed. FUTURE TENSE. There are two future tenses , toekomende tijden : the fu- ture tense , and the compound future tense. The future tense, de toekomende tijd, represents an ac- tion as yet to come, either with or without respect to the precise time ; as , wij zullen morgeti vertrekken , we shall depart to morrow ; wij zullen alien sterven, we shall all die. * This tense is commonly called the Meer dan volmaakt verledene tijd j Pluperfect past tense ; but improperly so. 5 «« DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. COMPOUND FUTURE TENSE. The compound future tense , zamengestelde toelwmende tijd , intimates that the action will be fully accomplished at or before the time of another future action or event ; as , eer de post wrtrekt , zal ik mjjnen brief geschreven hebben, before the post departs , I shall have written my letter. ' All the foregoing tenses belong also to the subjunctive mood , and convey the same idea of time as in the in- dicative , but are accompanied with a conjunction ex- pressed or understood , and have a connection with an- other verb which precedes or follows, carrying with it an idea of futurity; as, indien hij zich vlijtig oefene , zal hij geleerd worden , if he study diligently , he will become learned ; of hij home of niet , zal ik toch mijne reis voort- zetten , whether he come or not , I shall continue my journey ; indien hij het gedaan hadde , zoude ik op hem boos geweest zijh , if he had done it , I should have been an- gry with him ; indien gij zoudet naar Amsterdam gaan , zal ik ook derwaarls gaan, if you should go to Amsterdam, I will go thither also. OF NUMBER. Verbs have two numbers, a singular and plural, like nouns and pronouns with which the verbs must agree; as , ik leer , I learn ; wij spreken , we speak ; hij is vertrok- ken, he is gone; zij geven , they give; een vogel vliegt , a bird flies ; dieren loopen , animals walk. OF PERSON. Verbs have three persons , a first , second , and third , like personal pronouns with which the verbs must agree; nouns are always in the third person ; as , Enkelvoudig , Singular. Meerwudig , Plural. ik loop / run wij loopen we run gij loopt thou runnest gij loopt you run hij loopt he runs zij loopen they run de paarden loopen , horses run ; de leerling leert , the pupil learns; vogelen vliegen en dieren loopen, birds fly and ani- mals walk. DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. ci AUXILIARY VERBS. Auxiliary verbs are those which are used in conjuga- ting other verbs through their compound moods and ten- ses , tbey are zullen, shall or will J hebben, to have; ztjn, wezen or worden , to be. CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB ZULLEN. Zullen , shall or will , is used in expressing the future tense. ONBEPAALDE YVlJS, 1 te zullen N o Infinitive Mood, Deelwoord, nor Participle. zullende Aamoonende Wus , Indicative Mood. ik zal / shall wij zullen we shall gij zult thou wilt gij zult you will hij zal he will zij zullen they will Aanvoegende Wus , ik zou or zoude I should gij zoudet thou wouldst hij zoude he would Subjunctive Mood. wij zouden we should gij zoudet you would zij zouden they would CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY YERB HEBBEN. Hebben, to have , is used in expressing the past tenses of verbs. Gebiedende Wus , heb have Onbepaalde Wus , tegenw. tijd hebben veiled, tijd gehad hebben tOKkom. tijd te zullen hebben Deelwoorden , tegenw. tijd hebbende verled. tijd gehad toekom. tijd zullende hebben Imperative Mood. hebt have Infinitive Mood. present tense to have past tense to have had future tense about to have Participles. present tense having past tense had future tense about having 68 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. Aantoonende Wijs , Tegenwoordige Tijd , Ik heb I have gij hebt thou hast h.ij heeft he has Onvolmaakt Verledene Tijd , ik bad I had gij hadt thou hadst hij had he had Volmaalit Verledene Tijd , ik heb gehad / have had gij hebt gehad thou hast had hij heeft gehad he has had Zamengestelde Verledene Tijd, ik had gehad / had had gij hadt g( j had thou hadst had hij had gehad he had had Toekomende Tijd , ik zal hebben / shall have gij zult hebben thou wilt have hij zal hebben he will have Zamengest. Toekom. Tijd ik zal gehad hebben gij zult gehad hebben hij zal gehad hebben wij zullen gehad hebben gij zult gehad hebben zij zullen gehad hebben Aanvoegende Wijs , Tegenwoordige Tijd, dat ik hebbe that I have dat gij hebbet that thou have dat hij hebbe that he have Onvolmaakt Verledene Tijd, dat ik hadde that I had dat gij haddet that thou had dat hij hadde that he had Indicative Mood. Present tense. wij hebben we have gij hebt you have zij hebben they have Imperfect Past Tense. wij hadden we had gij hadt you had zij hadden they had Perfect Past Tense. wij hebben gehad we have had gij hebt gehad you have had zij hebben gehad they have had Compound Past Tense. wij hadden gehad we had had gij hadt gehad you had had zij hadden gehad they had had Future Tense. wij zullen hebben we shall have gij zult hebben you will have zij zullen hsbben they will have , Compound Future Tense. I shall have had thou unit have had he ivill have had we shall have had you will have had they will have had Subjunctive Mood. Present Tense. dat wij hebben that we have dat gij hebbet that you have dat zij hebben that they have Imperfect Past Tense. dat wij hadden that we had dat gij haddet that you had dat zij hadden that they had DITCH ETYMOLOGY r.» Volmaakt Yerlcd. Tijd, dat ik gehad hebbe dat BEPAALDE WlJS , tegenw. tijd zijn , or wezen verled. tijd zijn geweest toekom. tijd te zullen zijn Imperative Mood. weest, or zijt be Infinitive Mood. present tense to be past tense to have been future tense about to be *G DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. Beelwoorden , tegenw. tijd zijnds, or wezende verled. tijd geweest toekom. tijd zullende zijn AANTOONENDE Wus, Tegenwoordige Tijd , Participles. present tense being past tense been future tense about being Indicative Mood. Present Tense. ik ben / am gij "J* thou art hij is he is Onvolmaakt Verledene Tijd , ik was J was gij waart thou toast hij was he was wy zijn toe are gij z ijt you are zij zijn they are Yolmaakt Verledene Tijd , ik ben geweest / have been gij zijt geweest thou hast been hij is geweest he has been Zamengestelde Verledene Tijd , ik was geweest / had been gij waart geweest thou hadst been hij was geweest he had been Toekomende Tijd , ik zal zijn / shall he gij zult zijn thou icilt be hij zal zijn he will be Zamengest. Toekom. Tijd ik zal geweest zijn gij zult geweest zijn hij zal geweest zijn wij zullen geweest zijn gij zult geweest zijn zij zullen geweest zijn Aanvoegende Wus , Tegemvoordige Tijd , Imperfect Past Tense. wij war en we were gij waart you were zij waren they were Perfect Past Tense. wij waren geweest we have been gij waart geweest you have been zij waren geweest they have been Compound Past Tense. wij waren geweest we had been gij waart geweest you had been zij waren geweest they had been Future Tense. wij zullen zijn we shall be gij zult zijn zij zullen zijn we you will be they will be Compound Future Tense. I shall have been thou wilt have been, he will have been we shall have been you will have been they will have been Surjunctive Mood. Present Tense indien ik zij indien gij zijt indien hij zij if I be if thou be if he be indien wij zijn indien gij zijt indien zij zijn if we be if you be if they be DUTCH ETYMOLOGY Onvolmaakt Verledene Tijd, indien ik ware if J were indien gij waret if thou were indien hij ware if he were Volmaakl Verledene Tijd, indien ik zij geweest indien gij zijt geweest indien hij zij geweest indien wij zijn geweest indien gij zijt geweest indien zij zijn geweest Zamengestelde Verledene Tijd, indien ik ware geweest indien gij waret geweest indien hij ware geweest indien wij waren geweest indien gij waret geweest indien zij waren geweest Toekomende Tijd, indien ik zoude zijn indien gij zoudet zijn indien hij zonde zijn indien wij zouden zijn indien gij zoudet zijn indien zij zouden zijn Zamengestelde Toekomende. Tijd , indien ik zoude geweest zijn indien gij zoudet geweest zijn indien hij zoude geweest zijn indien wij zouden geweest zijn indien gij zoudet geweest zijn indien zij zouden geweest zijn Imperfect Past Tense. indien wij waren if we were indien gij waret if you were indien zij waren if they v;ere Perfect Past Tense. if I hare been if thou have been if he have been if ice have been if you have been if they have been Compound Past Tense. if I had been if thou had been if he had been if we had been if you had been if they had been Future Tense. if I should be if thou should be if he should be if we should be if you should be if they should be Compound Future Tense. if I should have been if thou should have been if he should have been if we should have been if you should have been if they should have been CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB WORDEN. Wordcn , to be , or become , or grow , is used in con- jugating verbs passive , and indicates a passive state , or a passive duration , or amelioration. Gebiedende Wijs, word be or become Imperative Mood. wordt be or become DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. Onbepaalde Wijs Infinitive Mood. tegenw. tijd worden present tense to be verled. tijd worden geweest past tense to have been toekom. tijd te zullen worden future tense about to be Deelwoorden , Participles. tegenw. tijd wordende present tense being verled. tijd geworden past tense been toekom. tijd zullende worden future tense about being Aantoonende Wijs , Indicative Mood. Tegenwoordige Tijd, Present Tense. ik word I am wij worden we are gij wordt thou art gij wordt you are hij wordt he is zij worden they are Onvolmaakt Verledene Tijd , Imperfect Past Tense. ik werd J was wij werden we were gij werdt thou wast gij werdt you were hij werdt he was zij werden they vjere Volmaakt Verleden Tijd , Perfect Past Tense. ik ben geworden I have been wij zijn geworden we have been gij zij t geworden thou hast been gij zijt geworden you hare been hij is geworden he has been zij zijn gewo"d2.:i they have been Compound Past Tense. he has been Zamengestelde Verledene Tijd ik was geworden I had been wij waren geworden we had been p-ij waart geworden thou hadst been gij waart geworden you had been hij was geworden he had been zij waren geworden they had been \ Future Tense. wij zullen worden we shall be gij zult worden you wul be zij zullen worden they will be Compound Future Tense. J shall have been Toekomende Tijd , ik zal worden J shall be gij zult worden thou tcilt be hij zal worden he will be Zamengest. Toekom. Tijd ik zal geworden zijn gij zult geworden zijn hij zal geworden zijn wij zullen geworden zijn gij zult geworden zijn zij zullen geworden zijn thou wilt have been he will have been we shall have been you will have been they will have been DUTCH ETYMOLOGY Aanvoegknde Wijs , legenwoordige Tijd , indien ik worde if I be indien gij wordet if thou be indien hij worde if he be Onvolmaakt Yerlcdene Tijd, indien ik wierdc indien gij wierdet indien hij wierde if I were if thou were if he were Yolmaakt Yerledene Tijd, indien ik zij geworden indien gij zijt gevvorden indien hij zij geworden indien wij zijn geworden indien gij zijt geworden indien zij zijn geworden Subjunctive Mood. Present Tense. indien wij worden if we b" indien gij wordet if you be indien zij worden if they be Imperfect Past Tense. indien wij wierden if we were indien gij wierdet if yon were indien zij wierden if they were Perfect Past Tense. if I have been if thou hate been if he have been if we have been if you hare been if they have been Zamengestelde Yerledene Tijd, Compound Past Tense. indien ik ware geworden indien gij waret geworden indien hij ware geworden indien wij waren geworden indien gij waret geworden indien zij waren geworden Toekomende Tijd, indien ik zoude worden indien gij zoudet worden indien hij zoude worden indien wij zouden worden indien gij zoudet worden indien zij zouden worden if I had been if thou had been if he had been if we had been if you had been if they had been Future Tense. if I should be if thou should be if he should be if we should be if you should be if they should be Zamengestelde Toekomende Tijd , Compound Future Tense. indien ik zoude geworden zijn indien gij zoudet geworden zijn indien hij zoude geworden zijn indien wij zouden geworden zijn indien gij zoudet geworden zijn indien iij zouden I hear ; zie , see , ik zie , I see. The Second Person is formed from the first by adding t ; as , ik zie, I see, gij ziet, thou seest; ik hoor, I hear, gij hoort , thou nearest. When the first person ends in t, the second remains unchanged ; as , ik zit , I sit , gij zit , you sit. The Third Person singular is like the second ; as , gij bemint , you love , hij bemint , he loves. The First and Third Person Plural are like the infini- tive ; and the Second Person Plural is like the second person singular. The Imperfect Past Tense is formed from the first per- son of the present indicative by taking de when it ends in b , d , g , i , I , m , n , r , u , t? , w , or z ; and by taking te , when it ends in f , k , p , s , J , or ch ; as , i/c fcemm , I love , ik beminde , I loved ; ik maak , I make , ik maakle , I made ; etc. When the First Person Present ends in d or t , the d or Ms doubled in the Past ; as , ik brand , I burn , ik brandde , I burned ; ik plant , I plant, ik planlte, I planted; etc. The Second Person of this tense is formed from the first by adding t ; as ; ik beminde , I loved , gij bemindet , thou lovedst ; ik redde , I deliver , gij reddet, thou deliveredst; etc. The Third Person is like the first. The First and Third Person plural are formed by adding en to the first person singular ; as , ik maakte , I made , wij maakten , we made , zij maakten , they made ; ik lachte , I laughed , wij lachten , we laughed , zij lachten , DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 79 they laughed. Those past tenses in dd or tt take de in the first and second persons plural ; as , ik redde, I deliv- ered , wij reddeden , we delivered ; ik vatte , I seized , wij vatleden , we seized ; etc. The Present Tense of the Subjunctive is formed from the infinitive by dropping the final n; as, hoopen, to hope, indien ik hoope , if I hope ; zien , to see , indien ik zie , if I see; maken , to make , indien ik make , if I make; etc. except monosyllabic verbs in aa which drop also the latter of the two vowels as well as the n ; as , gaan , to go , indien ik ga , if I go ; slaan , to stand , indien ik sta , if I stand. The Second Person of this mood and tense is formed by adding t to the first person ; as , indien ik make , if I make , indien gij maket , if thou make , indien ik hoope , if I hope , indien gij hoopet , if you hope ; ex- cept those ending in a which double the final vowel ; as , indien ik ga , if I go , indien gij gaat , if thou go. The Third Person is like the first. The First and Third Persons plural are like the infinitive ; and the Second Person plural is like that of the singular. The Imperfect Past Tense of the Subjunctive is like the imperfect of the indicative; as, ik maakte, I made, indien ik maakte , if I made ; but those verbs which have double t or d in the infinitive take de , as , ik zette , I set, indien ik zettede , if lset; etc. however for the sake of harmony the de is often omitted. After this manner are conjugated the following Regular Verbs , as examples : Imp. Mood. Inf. Mood. Present. Imperf. Partic. bouw build bouwen ik bouw ik bouwde gebouwd pak pack pakken ik pak ik pakte gepakt kook cook kooken ik kook ik kooktc gekookt antwoord answer anlwoorden ik antwoord ik anlwoordde geantvvoord punt point punten ik punt ik puntte gepnnt wed bet wedden ik wed ik wedde gewod leef live leven ik leef ik leefde gelcefd begeer desire h ."gocrcn ik begeer ik begeerde begeerd berhaal relate herhalen ik herhaal ik herhaalde herhaald IRREGULAR VERBS. Irregular verbs , ongelijkvloeijende vserkicoorden or onrc- 80 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY gelmatige werkwoorden , are those which differ from the foregoing in the formation of the past tense and past par- ticiple. The Dutch language , like others of Teutonic origin, contains many verbs which change the vowel of the root in the formation of the imperfect past tense; as, zie, see, zien , to see , ik zag , I saw , gezien , seen ; schrijf , write , schrijven, to write, ik schreef, I wrote, gesehreven, written; and some verbs change, as well, the final consonant, as, the radical vowel ; as , doe , do , doen , to do , deed , did , gedaan , done ; etc. The Irregular Verbs consist chiefly of those which change the vowels of the root , as follows : 1. ij into ee 2. ie — oo 3. i — o 4. ee — a 5. e into a G. e — ie 7. e — o 8. aa — ie 9. aa into oe 10. ui — oo n. an — i 12. ou ' — ie List of irregular Verbs, exhibiting the Root , the Infini- tive , the Past Imperfect , and the Past Participle. l. Those verbs which change ij into ee in the Past Im- perfect , and into e long in the Participle , which com- prehend upwards of one fourth of the whole : bezwijk bezwijken to faint bezweek bezweken bijt bij ten to bite. beet gebeten blijk blijken to seem bleek gebleken blijf blijven to remain bleef gebleven drijf drijven to drive dreef gedreven dijg dijgen to challenge deeg gedegen dvvijn dwijnen to disappear dween gedwenen gelijk gelijken to resemble geleek geleken sUJ d glijden to slide gleed gegleden s ri J n grijnen to wimper green gegrenen S ri JP grijpen to seize greep gegrepen hijg hijgen to pant heeg gehegen hijscb hijschen to hoist heesch geheschen kijk kijken to look keek gekeken kijf kijven to chide keef gekeven knijp knijpen to pinch kneep geknepen krijs krijgen to get kreeg gekregen krijt krijten to cry kreet gekreten kwijt kwijten to acquit kweet gekweten DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 81 lijd lijden to suffer leed geleden lijk lijken to resemble leek geleken mijd mijden to avoid meed gemeden "iJS nijgen to curtsy neeg genegen ni JP nijpen to pinch neep genepen PUP pijpen to pipe peep gepepen prijs prijzen to commend prees geprezen rijd rijden to ride reed gereden "jg rijgen to lace reeg geregen rijt rijten to slit reet gereten rijf rijven to grate reef gereven rijs rijzen to mount rees gerezen schijn schijn en to appear scheen geschenen 6chrijd schrijden to straddle schreed geschreden schrijf schrijven to write schreef geschreven slijp slijpen to grind sleep geslepen slijt slijten to wear sleet gesleten smijt smijten to throw smeet gesmeten snijd snijden to cut sneed gesneden spijt spijten to be sorry speet gespeten splijt splijten to split spleet gespleten «tiJS stijgen to mount steeg gestegen stijf stijven to starch steef gesteven strijd strijden to fight strecd gestredcn strijk strijken to strike streek gestreken UJS. tijgen to accuse teeg getegen wijk wijken to give way week geweken wijt wijten to impute weet geweten wijs wijzen to show wees gewezen wrijf wrijven to rub wreef gewreven zwijg zwijgen to be silent zweeg gezwegen zys zijgen to filtrate zeeg gezegen 2. Those which change ie into oo in the Past Imperfect , and into o long in the Past Participle : bedrieg bedriegen to deceive bedroog Ledrogen bied bied en to offer bood geboden geniet genieten to enjoy genoot genoten giet gieten to pour goot gegoten kies kiezen to choose koos gekozen klief klieven to cleave kloof gekloven lieg liegen to lie loog gelogen riek rieken to smell rook geroken ' 6 82 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. schiet schieten to shoot schoot geschoten verdriet verdrieten to sadden, verdroot verdroteri verlies verliezen to lose verloor verloren vlied vlieden to flee vlood gevloden vlieg vliegen to fly vloog gevlogeu vliet vlieten to flow vloot gevloten vries vriezen to freeze vroor gevroren zied zieden to seethe zood gezoden 3. Those which change i short into o short both in the Past Imperfect and Past Participle : begin beginnen to begin begon begonnen bezin bezinncn to ponder bezon bezonnen blink blinken to shine blonk geblonken bind binden to bind bond gebonden ding dingen to chaffer dong gedongen dring dringcn to press drong gedrongen drink drinken to drink dronk gcdronken dwing dwingen to force dwong gedwongen glim glimmen to shine glom geglommen klim klimrnen to climb klom geklommen klink klinken to sound klonk geklonken spin spinnen to spin spon gesponnen spring springen to leap sprong gesprongen stink stinkcn to stink stonk gestonken verzin verzinnen to invent verzon verzonnen verzwind verzwinden to disappear verzwond verzwonden vind vinden to find vend gevonden wind windcn to tcind wond gewonden win winnen to gain won gewonnen wring wringen to taring wrong gewrongen zing zingen to sing zong gczongen zink zinken to sink zonk gezonken 4. Those which change ee long into a short in the Past Imperfect , and into o or e long in the Past Participle : beveel bevelen to command beval bevolen breek breken to break brak gebroken eet eten to cat at gegeten genees genezen to cure genaa genezen geef geven to give gaf gegeven Jees lezen to read las gelezen DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 83 meet meten to measure mat gemeten neem nemen to take nam genomen spreek spreken to speak sprak gesproken steck steken to sting stak gestoken steel stelen to steal stal gestolen treed treden to tread trad getreden verged vergeten to forget vergat vergeten vreet vreten to devour vrat gevreten wees wezen to be was geweest Those which change e short into a short both in the Past Imperfect and Past Participle : breng denk brengen denken to bring to think bragt dacht gebragt gedacht 6. Those which change e short into ie in the Past Im- perfect and into o short, or e or a long, in the Past Participle : bederf bcderven to spoil bedierf bedorven hef heffen to heave hief geheven help helpen to help hielp geholpen schep scheppen to create schiep geschapen sterf sterven to die stierf gestorven werf werven to enlist wierf gaworven werp werp en to throw wierp geworpen 7. Those which change e short into o short both in the Past Imperfect tense and Past Participle : berst bersten to burst borst geborsten delf delven to dig dolf gedolven geld gelden to avail gold gegolden kerf kerven to hack korf gekorven melk melken to milk molk gemolken scheld schelden to scold schold gescholden achend schenden to spoil schond geschonden schenk schenken to pour schonk geschonken smelt smelten to melt sraolt gesmolten tref treffen to hit trof getroffen trek trekken to draw trok getrokken vecht vechteu to fight vocht gevochten ▼erzwelg verzwelgen to swallow verzwolg verzwolgen 84 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. ▼lecht vlechten to plait vlocht gevlochten zend zenden to send zond gezonden zwel zwellen to swell zwol gezwollen zwem zwemmen to swim zwom gezwommen zwerf zwcrven to stray zworf gezworven 8. Those which change aa and a short into ie in the Past Imperfect, and into a long or short in the Past Parti- ciple : blaas blazen to blow blies geblazen braad braden to roast bried or braadde gebraden laat laten to leave liet gelaten raad raden to councel ried geraden alaap slapen to sleep sliep geslapen val ▼alien to fall viel gevallen wasch wasschen to wash wiesch gcwasschen was wassen to grow wies gewaasen 9. Those which change aa into oe in the Past Imper- fect , and into a long in the Past Participle : draag dragen to carry droeg gedragen graaf graven to dig groef gegraven jaag jagen to hunt joeg or jaagde gejaagd laad laden to lade loed or laadde geladen vaar varen to navigate voer gevaren vraag vragen to ask vroeg or gevraagd vraagde 10. Those which change ui into oo in the Past Imper- fect , and into o long in the Past Participle : buig buigen to bend boog gebogen druip druipen to drop droop gedropen duik duiken to dive dook gedoken fluit fluiten to whistle floot gefloten kluif kluiven to gnaw kloof gekloven krui kruijen to wheel krooi gekrooijen kruip kruipen to creep kroop gekropen luik luiken to close look geloken pluis pluizen to ravel out ploos geplozen DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 85 ruik lulken to smell rook geroken schuil schuilen to shelter school gescholen schuif schuiven to push school geschoven sluik sluiken to smuggle slook gesloken sluip sluipen to sneak sloop geslopen shut sluiten to shut sloot gesloten snuit snuiten to snuff snoot gesnoten snuif snuiven to take snuff" snoof gesnoven spruit spruiten to sprout sprooi gesproten spuig 6puigen to spew spoog gespogen spuit spuiten to spout spoot gespoten stuif sluiven to raise dust stoof gestoven zuig zuigen to such zoog gezogen 'imp zuipen to tipple zoop gezopen 11. Those which change a short into i short in the Past Imperfect , and into a short in the Past Participle : hang vang hangen vangen to hang to catch hing ving gehangen gevangen 12. Those which change ou into ie in the Past Imper- fect , and into ou in the Past Participle : houd houw houden houwen to keep to hew hield hieuw gehouden gehouwen The following are also irregular in their conjugation, but do not come under either of the foregoing classifications : bid bidden to pray bad, gi^ baadt gebeden bak bakken to bake biek or bakte gebakken doe doen to do deed gedaan ga gaan to go ging gegaan heb hebben to have had gehad kom komen to come kwam , gij gekomen kwaamt koop koopen to buy kocht gekocht no imp. * kunnen to be able kon or konde gekonnen leg leggen to lay leide gelegd or geleid «g liggen to lie lag gelegen * Ind. Mood, Pres. Tense, ik kan, gij hunt , hij kan, icij kun- nen , enz. 86 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. lagch lagch en to laugh lachte gelagchen loop loopen to run liep geloopen no imp. * mogen (to) may mogt gemogt no imp. moeten (to) must moest gemoeten pleeg plegen to tise plagt gepleegd roep rocpen to call riep geroepen scheer scheeren to shave schoor geschoren si a slaan to strike sloeg gestagen sta staan to stand stond gestaan spuug spugen to spit spoog gespogen weeg wegen to weigh woog gewogen weet weten to know wist geweten werk werken to work wrocht^>r werkte gewrocht or gewerkt wreek wreken to avenge wreek te gewroken word worden fo be wierd geworden zeg zeggen to say zeide or zegde gezegd or gezeid «j zijn to be was geweest zie zien to see za S> Si) zaagt gezien zit zitten to sit zat gezeten zoek zoeken to seek zocht gezocht no imp. zullen (to) shall zoude zweer zweren to swear zwoer gezworen In like manner are conjugated the compounds of these verbs ; as , verzoeken , to request , ik verzocht , I reques- ted ; etc. The other moods and tenses as also the numbers and persons of the foregoing irregular verbs will be sufficiently apparent as they follow the rules and forms of the regu- lar verbs in all other particulars , and as conjugated at page 74 6 ; except the auxiliaries which are conjuga- ted throughout at page 67 — 73. CONJUGATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERB BIDDEN. Gebiedende Wijs, Imperavive Mood. bid pray bidt pray * In J. Mood, Pres. Tense, ik mag, gij moogt , hi} mag, wij mogen , cnz. DITCH ETYMOLOGY. ST Onbepaalde Wijs , tegenw. tijd bidden verled. tijd gebeden hebben torkom. tijd te zullen bidden Deelwoorden , tegenw. tijd biddende verled. tijd gebeden bebbende toekom. tijd zullende bidden Aantoonende Wijs , Tegenwoordige Tijd , Infinitive Mood. present tense post tense future tense to pray to hare prayed about to pray Participles. present tense past tense future tense praying having prayed about praying Indicative Mood. Present tense. ik bid i p™y gij bidt thou pray est hij bidt he prays wij bidden gij bidt zij bidden toe pray you pray they pray Onvolmaakt Verledene Tijd , ik bad / prayed gij baadt thou prayedst hij bad he prayed Volmaakt Verledene Tijd , ik heb gebeden 1 have prayed gij bebt gebeden thou hast prayed hij beef t gebeden he has prayed Zamengesielde Verledene Tijd , ik had gebeden / had prayed gij hadt gebeden thou hadst prayed gij hadt gebeden hij had gebeden he had prayed Tcekomende Tijd , ik zal bidden I shall pray gij zult bidden thou wilt pray hij zal bidden he will pray Zamengest. Toekom. Tijd ik zal gebeden hebben gij zult gebeden hebben hij zal gebeden hebben wij zullen gebeden hebben gij zult gebeden hebben zij zullen gebeden hebben Imperfect Past Tense. wij baden we prayed gij baadt you prayed zij baden they prayed Perfect Past Tense. wij hebben gebeden we have prayed gij hebt gebeden you have prayed zij hebben gebeden they haveprayed Compound Past Tense. wij hadden gebeden we had prayed you had prayed zij hadden gebeden they hadprayed Future Tense. wij zullen bidden we shall pray gij zult bidden you will pray zij zullen bidden they tcill pray Compound Future Tense. J shall have prayed thou wilt have prayed he will have prayed we shall have prayed you will have prayed they will have prayed 88 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. Aanvoegende Wijs , Tegenwoordige Tyd , indien ik bidde if J pray indien gij biddet if thou pray indien bij bidde if he pray Onvolmaakt Verledene Tyd, indien ik bade if I prayed indien gij badet if thou prayed indien bij bade if he prayed Volmaakt Verled. Tijd , indien ik bebbe gebeden indien gij hebbet gebeden indien hij hebbe gebeden indien wij hebben gebeden indien gij hebbet gebeden indien zij hebben gebeden Zamengest. Verled. Tijd , indien ik hadde gebeden indien gij haddet gebeden indien hij hadde gebeden indien wij hadden gebeden indien gij haddet gebeden indien zij hadden gebeden Toekomende Tyd , indien ik zoude bidden indien gij zoudet bidden indien hij zoude bidden indien wij zouden bidden indien gij zoudet bidden indien zij zouden bidden Zamengestelde Toekomende Tyd indien ik zoude gebeden hebben indien gij zoudet gebeden hebben indien hij zoude gebeden hebben indien wij zouden gebeden hebben indien gij zoudet gebeden hebben indien zij zouden gebeden hebben Subjunctive Mood, Present Tense. indien wij bidden if we pray indien gij biddet if you pray indien zij bidden if they pray Imperfect Past Tense. indien wij baden if toe prayed indien gij badet if you prayed ind ien zij baden if they prayed Perfect Past Tense. if 1 have prayed if thou have prayed if he have prayed if we have prayed if you have prayed if they have prayed Compound Past Tense, if I had prayed if thou had prayed if he had prayed if we had prayed if you had prayed if they had prayed Future Tense, if I should pray if thou should pray if he should pray if we should pray if you should pray if they should pray , Compound Future Tense, if I should have prayed if thou should have prayed if he should have prayed if we should have prayed if you should have prayed if they should have prayed VERBS PASSIVE. A verb passive expresses a passive state of its nomi- DUTCH ETYMpLOGY. 89 native , and is formed by the auxiliary verb zijn or worden and the past participle of the active state or voice ; as , het boek is geschreven , the book is written. Zijn is used in the passive voice when merely a passive state is implied without reference to any collateral state , as , bemind zijn , to be loved ; ik ben bemind , I am loved ; hij is geleerd , he is learned ; here the passive state ac- tually exists and is become fixed and determined. Worden is used for the passive voice when not only a passive state is implied but also a progression ; as , be- mind worden, to become loved; ik word bemind, I become loved ; ik word geleerd , I become learned ; here the pas- sive state is accompanied with a notion of progression in the passive state. The meaning of these auxiliaries is shown in these sentences: als ik mijne zes jaren op de hoogeschool zal doorgebragt hebben, zdl ik geleerd zijn; when I shall have passed my six years at the university I shall be learned; als ik vlijlig mijne zes jaren op de hoogeschool doorbrenge , zal ik geleerd worden , if I diligently pass my six years at the university I shall (be) become learned. As every subject from which a transitive action emanates , is called active or the active voice , so every subject which is under the action of the verb, is called passive or the passive voice; thus every active verb can become passive and take zijn or worden according as the sense requires. CONJUGATION OF THE VERB PASSIVE GELEERD ZIJN. GEBIEDENDE WlJS , IMPERATIVE MOOD. zij geleerd be learned zijt geleerd be learned Onbepaalde Wijs, Infinitive Mood. tegenw. tijd geleerd zijn pres. tense to be learned verled. tijd geleerd geweest zijn past tense to have been learned toekom. tijd geleerd te zuller. zijn future tense about to be learned Deelwoorden , Participles. tegenw. tijd geleerd zijnde pres. tense being learned verled. tijd geleerd geweest zijnde past tense having been learned toekom. tijd zullende geleerd zijn future tense about being learned Aantoonende Wijs , Indicative Mood. Tegenwoordige Tijd, Present tense. ik ben geleerd I am learned wij zijn geleerd %oe are learned G * 90 DUTCH .ETYMOLOGY. gij zijt geleerd thou art learned gij zijt geleerd you are learned hij is geleerd he is learned zij zijn geleerd they are learned Onvolmaakt Verledene Tyd, Imperfect Past Tense. ik was geleerd 1 was learned wij waren geleerd we were learned gij waart geleerd thou wast learned gij waart geleerd you were learned hij was geleerd he was learned zij waren geleerd they were learned Volmaakt Verledene Tijd , ik ben geleerd geweest gij zijt geleerd geweest hij is geleerd geweest wij zijn geleerd geweest gij zijt geleerd geweest zij zijn geleerd geweest Zamengestelde Verledene Tyd , ik was geleerd geweest gij waart geleerd geweest hij was geleerd geweest wij waren geleerd geweest gij waart geleerd geweest zij waren geleerd geweest Toekomende Tijd, ik zal geleerd zijn gij zult geleerd zijn hij zal geleerd zijn wij zullen geleerd zijn gij zult geleerd zijn zij zullen geleerd zijn Zamengest. Toekom. Tijd, ik zal geleerd geweest zijn gij zult geleerd geweest zijn hij zal geleerd geweest zijn wij zullen geleerd geweest zijn gij zult geleerd geweest zijn zij zullen geleerd geweest zijn Aanvoegende Wijs , Tegenwoordige Tyd, indien ik geleerd zij indien gij geleerd zijt indien hij geleerd zij Perfect Past Tense. I have been learned thou hast been learned he has been learned we have been learned you have been learned they have been learned Compound Past Tense. I had been learned thou hadst been learned he had been learned we had been learned you had been learned they had been learned Future Tense. I shall be learned thou wilt be learned he will be learned we shall be learned you will be learned they will be learned Compound Future Tense. J shall have been learned thou wilt have been learned he will have been learned we shall have been learned you will have been learned they will have been learned Subjunctive Mood. Present Tense. if I be learned if thou be learned if he be learned DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 91 indien wij geleerd zijn indien gij geleerd zijt indien zij geleerd zijn Onvolmaakt Verledene Tijd , indien ik geleerd ware indien gij geleerd waret indien hij geleerd ware indien wij geleerd waren indien gij geleerd waret indien zij geleerd waren Volmaakt Verledene Tijd , indien ik geleerd geweest zij indien gij geleerd geweest zijt indien hij geleerd geweest zij indien wij geleerd geweest zijn indien gij geleerd geweest zijt indien zij geleerd geweest zijn Zamengest. Verled. Tijd , indien ik geleerd geweest ware indien gij geleerd geweest waret indien hij geleerd geweeat ware indien wij geleerd geweest waren indien gij geleerd geweest waret indien zij geleerd geweest waren Toekomende Tijd , indien ik zoude geleerd zijn indien gij zoudet geleerd zijn ' indien hij zoude geleerd zijn indien wij zouden geleerd zijn indien gij zoudet geleerd zijn indien zij zouden geleerd zijn if we be learned if you be learned if they be learned Imperfect Past Tense. if J were learned if thou were learned if he were learned if we were learned if you were learned if they were learned Perfect Past Tense. if I have been learned if thou have been learned if he have been learned if we have been learned if you have been learned if they have been learned Compound Past Tense. if J had been learned if thou had been learned if he had been learned if we had been learned if you had been learned if they had been learned Future Tense. if I should be learned if thou should be learned if he should be learned if we should be learned if you should be learned if they should be learned Zamengestelde Toekomende Tijd, Compound Future Tense. indien ik zoude geleerd geweest zijn indien gij zoudet geleerd geweest zijn indien hij zoude geleerd geweest zijn indien wij zouden geleerd geweest zijn indien gij zoudet geleerd geweest zijn indien zij zouden geleerd geweest zijn if I should have been learned if thou should have been learned if he should have been learned if we should have been learned if you should have been learned if they should have been learned 92 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY, REFLECTIVE VERBS. Verbs reflective, wederkeerige werkwoorden, are those which have a personal pronoun after them of the same person as the nominative or subject which is thus also the object , the subject and object being one and the same person; in the infinitive and third persons they take always zich. There are about sixty verbs of this class; as, zich baden to bathe zich ontfermen to have mercy zich bedenken to reflect zich schamen to be ashamed zich behelpen to be content zich vergissen to be mistaken zich beroemen to boast zich verhoovaar- to vaunt digen zich bevinden to be (somewhere) zich verwaardi- to deign gen zich bezinnen to conceive zich verzetten zich matigen to be moderate zich verzinnen zich onthouden to abstain from zich verzweren to \be opposed to to deceive one's self, to err to bind one's self by oath and some others. The foregoing verbs reflective retain always this form; but also some active verbs often become verbs reflective ; as, zich beminnen to love one' s self zich wasschen to wash one's self and many others. CONJUGATION OF VERBS REFLECTIVE. As these verbs are active in their nature they are con- jugated through the compound tenses with heblen; thus, Gebiedende Wijs, beroem u boast Onbepaalde Wijs, Imperative Mood. beroemt u boast Infinitive Mood. tegenw. tijd zich beroemen pres. tense to boast verled. tijd zich beroemd hebben past tense to have boasted toekom. tijd zich te zullen beroemen future tense about to boast DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 93 Deelwoorden , Participles. tegenw. tijd zich beroemende pre$. tense boasting verled. tijd zich beroemd past tense boasted toekom. tijd zullendc zich beroemen future tense about boasting Aantoonende WlJS , Tegenwoordige Tijd , ik beroem mij gij beroemt u hij beroemt zich / boast thou boaslest he boasts Onvolmaakt Verledene Tijd Indicative Mood. Present Tense. wij beroemen ons we boast gij beroemt u you boast zij beroemen zich they boast Imperfect Past Tense. ik beroemde mij / boasted wij beroemden ons we boasted gij beroemdet u thou boastedst gij beroemdet u you boasted hij beroemde zich he boasted zij beroemden zich they boasted Perfect Past Tense. I have boasted etc. Volmaalit Verledene Tijd, ik heb mij beroemd enz. Zamengestelde Verledene Tijd ik had mij beroemd enz. Toekomende Tijd, ik zal mij beroemen ens. Zamengestelde Toekom. Tijd , ik zal mij beroemd hebben enz. Aanvoegende Wijs , Tegenwoordige Tijd, indien ik mij beroeme Compound Past Tense. I had boasted etc. Future Tense. I shall boast etc. Compound Future Tense. I shall have boasted etc. Surjunctive Mood. Present Tense, if I boast etc. Onvolmaakt Verledene Tijd, Imperfect Past Tense. indien ik mij beroemde if I boasted enz. etc. Volmaakt Verledene Tijd, indien ik mij hebbe beroemd Perfect Past Tense. if I have boasted etc. 94 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. Zamengestelde Verledene Tijd , Compound Past Tense. indien ik mij hadde beroemd if J had boasted enz. etc. Toekomende Tijd , Future Tense. indien ik mij zoude beroemen if I should boast enz. etc Zamengestelde Verledene Tijd , Compound Past Tense. indien ik mij zoude beroemd hebben if 1 should have boasted enz. etc. In like manner is translated the conjugation of a verb reflective when taking a neuter verb in English ; as , zich beroemen , to boast ; zich bedenken , to reflect ; etc. but when taking a verb active , the personal pro- noun is also translated ; as , zich verzweren , to perjure one's self ; ik verzweer mij, I perjure myself; gij verzweert u , you perjure yourself; hij verzweert zich, he perjures him- self ; wij verzweren ons , we perjure ourselves ; gij ver- zweert u , you purger yourselves ; zij verzweren zich , they perjure themselves ; etc. as also all verbs active when ta- king the reflective form ; as , zich bezeeren , to wound one's self ; ik bezeer mij , I wound myself ; etc. Verbs reflective compounded of a separable preposi- tion , as zich aankanten to be opposed to zich aanmatigen to presume zich inbeelden to imagine require the preposition after the verb and the pronoun in the imperative and in the indicative present and imper- fect, but in other tenses the pronoun is placed before the preposition and the verb; kant u aan be opposed to ik kant mij aan J am opposed ik kantte mij aan / was opposed to ik heb mij aangekant J have been opposed to ik zal mij aankanten / shall be opposed to VERBS NEUTER. Verbs neuter or intransitive , onzydige werkwoorden , are DUTCH E 1 YMOLOG Y. S>5 verbs which express that kind of action or state which has no effect upon any thing beyond their nominative, or they express merely a state or condition of their nomina- tive ; as , Johanna danst , Jane danses ; het paard slaapt , the horse sleeps. They are distinguished from verbs active by not taking an object after them. CONJUGATION OF VERBS NEUTEK. Verbs neuter are conjugated like verbs active , but in the compound tenses some are conjugated with hebben and others with zijn, and some neuters are in one state conjugated with the former and in another with the latter. Verbs neuter are conjugated with zijn when they ex- press more a state of existance or suffering than an action ; such are blijven to stay komen to come sterven to die beschimmelen to mould vail en to fall zij zijn gebleven , they have remained ; hij is gestorven , he is dead ; de brood is beschimmeld , the bread is moldy ; de bode is gekomen , the messenger is arrived. Verbs neuter are conjugated with hebben when an ac- tion is implied; as grazen to graze lagcben to laugh arbeiden to work weenen to cry eten to eat wandelen to walk hebt gij gespeeld of gearbeid? ik heb gearbeid, have you played or worked? I have worked; het kind heeft ge- weend, the child has wept. Verbs neuter signifying motion are sometimes conjuga- ted with zijn and at other times with hebben; of this class are draven to trot loopen to run drentelen to come slowly rijdeu to ride duikelen to gambol rollen to roll duiken to duck under slenderen to walk slowly gaan to go springen to jump 96 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. klimmen to climb wandelen to walk klouteren to climb zwemmen to swim vliegen to fly and many others. In the use of these and such like verbs , zijn is used when the place where the action occurred is designated; as> hij is naar Amsterdam gegaan he is gone to Amsterdam ik ben over dien steen gestruikeld / have stumbled over that stone wij rijn te vier uren van huis we went from home at four o' clock gereden gij zijt naar den Haag gewandeld you have walked to the Hague When merely the motion is indicated , without allusion to the place , the verb hebben is then used ; as , ik heb lang gegaan I have walked a long time hij heeft ook gestruikeld he has also stumbled wij hebben heden gewandeld we have walked to day VERBS IMPERSONAL. Some neuter verbs expressing certain operations or sta- tes of the elements , and taking het for the nominative , and being used in the infinitive mood and third person singular only, are called Verbs Impersonal, onpersoonlijke werkwoorden ; such are bliksemen het bliksemt it lightens ijzelen hetijzelt it freezes dooijen het dooit it thaws misten het mist it is misty donderen het dondert it thunders sneeuwen het sneeuwt it snows hagelen het hagelt it hails vriezen het vriest it freezes and some others. There are also some verbs in the active voice , which are only used in the third person singular with het for the nominative , and have a personal pronoun for object ; as , berouwen to regret lusten to wish betreffen to concern spijten to be sorry bevreemden to surprise verdrieten to distress gelukken to succeed verwonderen to astonish jammeren to pity walgen to disgust they are thus employed DUTCH E I Y M OLOGY. 97 het betreft mij it concerns me het berouwt mij / regret it het jamraert u you pity het verwondert hem he is astonislwd het gelukt oris tee succeed het spijt hem he is sorry , or he regrets VERBS USED INTERROGATIVELY AND NEGATIVELY. Verbs throughout their conjugation can be used Inter- rogatively or Negatively , or Negatively Interrogatively. Verbs when used Interrogatively take then the nomi- native after the verb ; as, leert gij ? do you learn? schrij- ven zij ? do they write ? in the compound tenses of verbs the nominative is placed between the auxiliary and the principal verb ; as , heeft hij gelezen ? has he read ? zullen icij gaan ? shall we go ? Verbs when used Negatively take the adverb niet, not, after them ; as , hij spreekt niet , he does not speak ; het regent niet , it does not rain : in the compound tenses of verbs , the adverb niet is placed between the auxiliary and the principal verb ; as , ik zal niet vertrekken , I shall not depart ; zij hebben niet geschreven , they have not written. When verbs are used Negatively and Interrogatively , the nominative is placed after the verb , and the adverb niet after the nominative ; as , komt hij niet ? does he not come ? vriest het niet ? does it not freeze ? In the com- pound tenses the nominative and the adverb are placed between the auxiliary and the verb ; as , heeft hij niet gesproken ? has he not spoken ? zullen wij niet gaan ? shall we not go? CONJUGATION OF COMPOUND VERBS. In the conjugation of Compound Verbs , the adjunct sometimes becomes separated from the simple verb and sometimes not. Verbs are compounded of 1. Verb and noun. 2. Verb and adjective or adverb. 3. Verb and particle. 4. Verb and preposition. »8 DUTGH ETYMOLOGY. 1 . Verbs compounded of a noun and another verb, are inseparable when the verb and noun , taken seperately , do not convey each a partial idea of the compound idea; as , beeldhouwen , to sculpture ; brandmerken , to brand ; dagvaarden , to summons ; handhaven , to maintain ; kiel- halen , to careen ; houwen , to hew ; merken , to mark ; warden — haven — halen , to fetch , not conveying the most distant idea of the signification of the compound , remain inseparable in their conjugation ; as , ik heb ge- beeldhouwd , I have carved ; hij is gedagvaard , he is sum- monsed ; hij was gebrandmerkt , he was branded ; ik zal gekielhaald hebben , I shall have careened. The Compounds , brandslichten , to set on fire ; houthakken, to hew wood; woordhouden , to keep word; etc. , are se- perable , because stichten , to cause ; hakken , to hew ; hou- den , to Seep ; convey a distinct idea which leads to a comprehension of the compound idea ; and therefore be- come disunited in conjugation ; as , brand te stichten , to set on fire ; hout te hakken , to hew wood. In the formation of the simple tenses of the indicative , the noun is placed last ; as , ik sticht brand , I set on fire ; ik hakte hout , I hewed wood. In tenses compoun- ded of the past participle , the particle ge is placed between the noun and the verb ; as , ik heb brand gesticht ; ik had hout gehakt ; ik zal woord gehouden hebben. In the simple future , the form of the infinitive is retained ; as , ik zal brand stichten. In the subjunctive mood the simple tenses are formed as in other verbs ; as , dot ik brandstichte ; dat ik hout hakte ; etc. and the compound tenses of this mood are formed like those of the indicative. The Imperative is like the present Indicative; as, sticht brand; hak hout. 2. The greater part of verbs compounded of an adjec- tive or adverb and a simple verb are separable, and fol- low the same forms as those of the noun and verb ; as , nadoen , to imitate , ik heb nagedaan , na te doen , etc. ; except, liefkozen, to caress; weerlichten, to lighten, which are inseparable and follow the form of simple verbs in their conjugation; as, hij heeft geliefdkoosd ; het zal geweer- licht hebben , etc. 5. The initial particles of verbs be, er , ge , her, mis , DITCH ETYMOLOGY. 99 ont , ver , never admit ge in the formation of the past participle , anil merely serve to modify the meaning of the verb ; they are always inseparable, and the verbs are conjugated as when simple. 4. Verbs taking a preposition, as an adjunct, are some- times separable and sometimes not. Verbs compounded of an inseparable preposition and a simple verb are of the same nature as those compoun ded of a verb and particle , and , like them , do not admit the particle ge in the formation of the past participle ; except, ant , and wan; as in antwoorden , to answer; ge- antwoord; wanhoopen, to despair, gewanhoopt; wantrouwen, to mistrust , gewantrouwd. Verbs compounded of a separable preposition are , l. those taken in a direct and positive sense , 2. those employed also in a figurative sense, but which in their direct acceptation are also conjugated sometimes inseparably; 3. those which are always employed separably in their direct and material signification , and are inseparable in their figurative acceptations ouly. 1. Verbs compounded of a separable preposition pre- sent a direct idea of its signification; and the verbs, in conjugation , follow the same form as verbs compoun- ded of a noun and verb when separable. When the pre- position is separable , the principal accent of the word falls upon it , it being considered as presenting the prin- cipal idea. 2. Verbs taking a preposition as adjunct , the sense of which is sometimes direct and sometimes figurative , follow both forms of conjugation according as the signification and use require. Thus the preposition serves to modify the signification of the verb. The following are examples : Direct Meaning. Indirect Meaning. doorboren to bore through doorboren to penetrate doorkijken to look through doorkijken to examine doorklieven to split in two doorklieven to plough the waves doorknagen to knaw through doorknagen to grin with anger doorkruipen to creep through doorkruipen to penetrate doormengen to mix together doormengen to interfere doorschieten to shoot through doorschieten to intermix 100 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY, doorsteken to cut through doorzoeken to search through misrekenen to misreckon mistellen to miscount overstijgen to pass over doorsteken to pierce doorzoeken to examine misrekenen to deceive mistellen to deceive overstijgen to surmount (difficulties) The two forms of conjugation assumed by this sort of compound verbs may be shown thus Direct Meaning. ik boor door ik boorde door ik heb doorgeboord ik had doorgeboord ik zal doorboren ik zal doorgeboord hebben enz. Indirect Meaning. ik doorboor ik doorboorde ik heb doorboord ik had doorboord ik zal doorboren ik zal doorboord hebben etc. 3. Those verbs having a preposition always separable in the direct signification , and inseparable in the indirect or figurative sense , are more numerous than the former. The literal meaning of the componant parts of the com- pound taken separately, as well as the figurative mean- ing , is always obvious. In conjugation these verbs follow the same form as the preceding. The following are specimens of this sort : Direct Meaning. doorbladeren to turn over leaves (of a book) doordringen to pierce misdoen to do wrongly misgrijpen to take the wrong (one) omboorden to border round omzeilen to upset (a ship) ondervinden to find under overwegen to weigh again overzien to resee voorzeggen to dictate wederroepen to recall Indirect Meaning. doorbladeren to peruse (a book) doordringen to penetrate misdoen to offend against misgrijpen to misconceive omboorden to encompass omzeilen to sail round ondervinden to experience overwegen to consider overzien to overlook voorzeggen to predict wederroepen to revoke and many others. DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. • 101 PRAXIS ON THE USE OF VERBS WITH NOUNS AND PRONOUNS. Het land is bekoorlijk. De velden zijn welriekend. Een zachte wind is verkoelend. Een spelonk is eenzaam. Olifanten zijn sterk. De leerling wordt vlijtig. Het wordt donker. Het spijt mij dat ik het gedaan neb. Het is niet noodig dat gij aan hem spreekt. Hebt gij mijnen broeder gesproken? Ja, ik heb hem gesproken. Aan wien hoort dat mooi paard? Zijn de brieven aangekomen ? Neen Mijnheer, zij zijn niet aan- gekomen. Hoe vaart gij ? Ik ben ongesteld. Hoe vaart Mevrouw, uwe moeder ? Zij is niet wel. Ik ben blijde u te zien. Neem plaats. Ga zitten. laat ons gaan Waar zulien wij gaan ? Laat ons eene wandeling doen. Daar is een schip. Het schip zeilt. Wij zulien naar huis gaan. Lees voor mij. Lees op. Spel dat woord. Leg uw boek weg. Blader door. Ik heb doorgebladerd. Wees stil , maak geen geraas. Uilen vliegen in den donker. Moiled wonen in den grond. Ik houd van het lezen. Wat zal ik leaen ? The country is delightful. The fields arc fragrant. A soft wind is cooling. A cave is solitary. Elephants are strong. The pupil becomes diligent. It grows dark. I am sorry that I have done it. It is not necessary that you speak to him. Have you spoken to my brother ? Yes , / have spoken to him . To whom does that fine horse be- long? Are the letters arrived? No Sir , they are not arrived. How do you do? 1 am indisposed. How does your mother do ? She is not well. I am glad to see you. Take a place. Sit down. Let us go. Whither shall we go ? Let us take a walk. There is a ship. The ship sails. We will go home. Read to me. Head out. Spell that word. Put your book aside. Turn over. I have turned over. Be still , do not make a noise. Owls fly in the dark. Moles live in the ground. I am fond of reading. What shall I read? io§ DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. Waar is mijn boek ? Heeft Antje haar werk af? Zij heeft het nog niet afgedaan? Wie klopt aan de dour ? Van welke dour spreekt gij ? Rofp de meid. Al de boomen zijn groen. De honden knaauwen de beenen door. Weet gij hoe laat het is ? Het is elf uren. Wij moeten gaan. Waar is uwe zuster? Mijne zuster is op reis door Hol- land. Hebt gij England doorgereisd ? Wij hebben Engeland doorreisd , en Schotland doorgereisd. Wanneer gaat gij weder op reis. Wij zijn voornemens morgen we- der op reis te gaan. Zullen wij zamen reizen ? Hebben zij zich gebaden ? Zij zullen zich morgen baden. Hoor ! wat voor een geraas is dat? Het is een inuis die piept. Hebt gij de hond hooren blaffen? Kom bij mij. Het wordt licht , de zon schijnt. Is de zon op ? Jan , haal mijnen hoed. Het is zulke mooi weer, laat ons uitgaan. Het wordt koudt, het vuur brandt niet. Het is een koude dag. Regent het? Het regent, sneeuwt , en hagelt. Hoe was het weer gisteren ? Het dooide? Zal het morgen vriezen ? Whore is my book? Has Anna done her work ? She has not done it yet. Who knocks at the door? Of which door do you speak ? Call the maid-servant. All the trees are green. The dogs knaw the bones through. Do you know how late it is 7 7/ is eleven o'clock. We must go. Where is your sister ? My sister is on a tour through Holland. Have you traveled through Eng- land? We have travelled over England and through Scotland, When do you set out again on your journey? We intend to set out again to morrow. Shall ive travail together? Have they bathed? They will bathe to morrow. Hark ! what noise is that ? It is a mouse which squeaks. Have you heard the dog hark ? Come near me. It grows light, the sun shines. Js the sun risen ? John , fetch my hat. It is such fine weather , let us go out. It grows cold , the fire does not burn. It is a cold day. Does it rain ? It rains , snows , and hails. How was the weather yesterday ? It thaioed. IP ill it freeze to morrow ? DUTCH ETYMOLOGY 103 Ik weet het niet. Ik ben koufl. Hebt gij honger ? Neen , maar ik heb dorst. Jaag de kat de kamer uit. De kat maauwt. Wat een verschrikkelijk geraas. Het is een ezel die balkt. Doe de dcur toe. / do not know. J am cold. Are yon hungry ? No , but 1 am thirsty. Drive the cat out of the room. The cat mew*. What a dreadful noise! It is an ass that brays. Put the door to. ADVERBS. An adverb, bijwoord, serves lo qualify tbe action signi- fied by a verb , or it qualifies an adjective or another adverb ; as , hij spreeht duidelyk , he speaks distinctly ; het is een zeer goed man , it is a very good man ; het is bui- tengewoon duidelijk geschreven , it is very distinctly written. Tbe adverb is always placed before the adjective which it qualifies , but generally after the verb. Many words are used sometimes as adjectives and at other times as adverbs ; their situation in the sentence , renders it obvious to which class they belong. Adverbs are the most simple of all those words called subordinate or qualifying words ; they are imdeclinable , however some of them , like adjectives , can be com- pared ; as , min little minder less minst least na near nader nearer naast nearest veel much meer more meest most ver far verder farther verdste farthest wel well betcr better best best Adverbs may be divided into the following ten classes which comprehend those most in common use : BlJWOORDEN VAN TlJD , heden , van daag to day eergisteren the day before yesterday morgen to morrow overmorgen the day after to morrow eerstdaags shortly bij dag by day Adverbs of Time. bij nacht by night des nachts nightly altijd always nu now voor dezen formerly onverwachts suddenly 104 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. zondags on a sunday voorheen \ formerly straks presently voormaals eertijds formerly voortaan henceforth oudtijds anciently Bijwoorden van Plaats , Adverbs of Place. hier here regts to the right daar there links to the left ergens somewhere boven above nergens nowhere beneden below overal 1 regt uit straight along , > everywhere , . . ... alom J hier been this way elders other places ver far allerwegen everywhere berwaarts hither Bijwoorden van Hoegrootheid , Adverbs of Quantity. zeer very genoeg enough veel many gebeellijk entirely te veel too many ongevaar "| 7 T > about oneven odds ongeveer J Bijwoorden van Hoedanigheid , Adverbs of Quality. wel well eerlijk honorably ligtelijk easily naauwelijks scarcely ongaarne unwillingly . billijk justly zachtelijk softly gaarne willingly Bijwoorden van Bevestiging , Adverbs of Affirmation. Ja yes zeker certainly waarlijk surely onfeilbaar infallibly werkelijk really ongetwijfeld undoubtedly altoos always nog tans always Bijwoorden van Ontkenning, Adverbs of Negation. neen no noch nor niet not nog met not yet geen not niets nothing DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 105 BlJWOORDEN VAN TWIJFELING , Adverbs of Doubt. misschien 1 bezwaarlijk difficultly welligt J P erha P s twijfelachtig doubtfully mogelijk possibly onwaarschijnlijk improbably BlJWOORDEN VAN VeRGELIJKING , Adverbs of Comparison. als of as if naauwelijks scarcely zoo als so as zoo veel so much eerder rather meer more BlJWOORDEN VAN ONDERVRAGING , Adverbs of Interrogation. waar ? where ? hoeveel ? how much ? hoe ? how ? sedert wanneer ? how long waarom? why? since? hoedanig ? in what manner? BlJWOORDEN VAN ORDE , Adverbs of Order. eerst firstly aanvankelijk 1 ii / \ fi rstl r vervolgens I , vooreerst I , > afterwards daarna J J ovengens moreover Beside those words properly classed as adverbs , there are in all languages certain expressions or idioms used adverbially ; as , amongst others , blootshoofds bear headed regt toe, regt ult straight on in der daad in reality nueens ... dan weder now and again mijns bedunkens in my opinion al of niet then or not \ des anderen daags the next day al dan niet van nu af aan henceforth blootsvoets barefooted daags te voren the day previous eens voor al once for all ten ontijde inopportunely zoo veel te minder so much the less ten einde in order van het oogenblik from the moment veel te veel much too much van af thence al ware het 1 van dan af ) i i . , * r c^en were it . j from that time al ware het zelfs J van toen at j in het geheel niet not at all van der jeugd af from youth up voor alles first of all wat dies meer is I , , ... J .» J , . 1 and the like mijnentwege I wat des meer is I ... (as for me mijnenthalve J J 106 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY het is dusdanig mede gelegen I het 13 er zoodanig mede gelegen \ U is SO » mch ia th& *■* and many others of a like nature. PRAXIS ON THE USE OF ADVERBS. Wandel langzaam. Loop zoo gaauw niet. Zwanen zwemmen trotsch. Deze jongen schrijft hoe langer hoc slechter. Jttijne zuster teekent hoe langer hoe beter. Verledene nacht ging ik vroeg te bed. Hij wierd dezen morgen plotseling wakker. Wij zullen stellig morgen ochtend vertrekken. Hij zal waarschijnlijk de aan- staande week terugkomen. De leerlingen hebben hunne op- etellen bijna af. Waar is u\v paard ? Waarheen gaat gij ? De reizigers zullen in tijds gereed zijn. Die daglooners werken vlijtig van den morgen tot den avond. Deze kooplieden zullen trapswijze groote schatten verzamelen. Die man doet niets dan heen en weer loopen. Voortaan moet gij uwe lessen vlij- tig leeren , want tot dus ver hebt gij dezelve verzuimd , en somtijds zijt gij lui gewee»t. Hij komt hier niet dikwijls maar thans meer dan eertijds. Eenman die eerlijk handelt houdt getrouwelijk zijn woord. Vervul stiptelijk uwe beloften. Doe altijd uwen pligt. Walk slowly. Do not go so fast. Stoans swim proudly. This box writes worse and fcorse. My sister draws better and better. I went early to bed last night. He awoke suddenly this morning. We shall certainly leave to mor- row morning. He will probably return next week. The pupils have almost finished their exdrcises. Where is your horse? Whither are you going ? The travellers will be ready in time. Those day laborers work dili- gently from morning till night. These merchants will by degrees hoard up great riches. That man does nothing but walk to and fro. In future you must learn your lessons diligently , for hitherto you have neglected them , and sometimes you have been idle. He seldom comes here but now more than formerly. A man who acts honorably keeps his word faithfully. Fulfill your promises punctually. Do always your duty. DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 407 Verzuim nooit te doen hetgene Never neglect to do what falls u te beurt valt. to your lot. Leef zuinig en wees tevreden met Live economically and be satisfied uw lot. with your lot. Houd u niet op met beuzeling^n. Never occupy yourself with trifles. PREPOSITIONS. Prepositions , voorzetsels , express the relation which words bear to one another; they are commonly placed after verbs , before nouns and pronouns , influencing or modifying their meanings , and always have the accusa- tive case after them. These words are of great use and importance in lan- guage , they mainly characterise its genius and beauty , and their number and use may be considered as com- mensurate with the advancement of the nation in refine- ment and civilization. No language , perhaps, abounds more in the number of prepositions than the Dutch and English. As prepositions modify the relations between words , and as their meanings are varied and often arbitrary , a knowledge of their use and power is of importance to the student, and is to be acquired only by a careful study and exercise of the language. Prepositions may be divided into two classes : Particles , voor- en achterwegsels ; and Prepositions , voorzetsels , these latter being Prepositions properly so called. PARTICLES. Particles are divided into Initial Particles , voorwegsels; and Terminational Particles , achtervoegsels. INITIAL PARTICLES, Initial Particles are placed before verbs, and sometimes before nouns and adjectives , to give them an accessory meaning , or to qualify their general acceptation ; they are be , er , ge , her , mis , on , ont , ver , wan. Their use and influence may be exhibited in the follow- ing examples 408 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. BE schrijven to write denken to think graven to dig legeren to encamp liegen to lie gieten to pour ER and HER langen to hand leven to live zien to see halen to fetch denken to think beschrijven to describe bedenken to reflect begraven to inter belegeren to besiege beliegen to belie begieten to pour on erlangen to obtain herleven to revive herzien to review herhalen to repeat herdenken to reflect GE , this Particle is the sign of the past participle , and is also placed before some verbs, adverbs, and neuter nouns , and gives them additional energy. bieden to offer leiden to lead rust rest lach a laugh geboden offered geleiden to conduct gerust reposedly gelach a laughter MIS has a privative or opposing acceptation : achten to esteem daad action moedig courageous handeling treatment misachten to neglect misdaad crime mismoedig low spirited mishandeling ill treatment ON is equivalent to the English particle un and conveys the idea of a negative to the word to which it is joined : vruchtbaar fruitful matig temperate mondig of age dankbaar grateful onvruchtbaar fruitless onmatig intemperate onmondig under age ondankbaar ungrateful ONT marks a privation or a negation : dekken to cover erven to inherit laden to load doen to do ontdekken to uncover onterven to disinherit ontladen to discharge ontdoen to undo DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. 109 It sometimes gives additonal force to the meaning : blooten to skin or shear ledigen to empty loopen to run ontblooten to uncover ontledigen to empty ontloopen to escape VER not only serves to modify the meaning but influ- ences it also as to quality ; as , arbciden to work bidden to pray drukken to press grijpen to seize klagen to complain maken to make timmeren to carpenter verarbeiden to use verbidden to intreat verdrukken to oppress vergrijpen to do wrong or ill verklagen to accuse vermaken to remake vertimmeren to rebuild WAN changes the meaning of the word to that of op- position : bedrijf action hoop hope geloof belief trouw faith wanbedrijf crime wanhoop despair wangeloof incredulity wantrouw mistrust TERMINATIONS PARTICLES. The terminational particles are much more numerous than the foregoing ; they are joined to nouns, adjectives , and adverbs , arid modify their meanings ; as , -aar as in liegen to lie liegenaar a liar -achtig » waar true waarachtig truly -baar » dank thank dankbaar thankful -dom » rijk rich rijkdom riches -eel p rond round rond eel roundlet -en » goud gold gouden golden -er » bedriegen to deceive bedrieger deceiver -je » kind child kindje little child -»g » vlijt industry vlijtig industrious -ij » brander distiller branderij distillery -ing » verkort shorten verkorting shortening -is » belijden to confess belijdenis confession -lei » aller all allerlei all sorts -Ujk 7> minne love minnelijk lovely ■110 D U T C H B TYMOLOG Y. ■ lijn as in oog an eye ooglijn o Wftfe eye -ling » ellonde misery ellendeling a wretch -loos » geld money geldeloos moneyless -ooi » pleit a lawsuit pleidooi a lawsuit -sch 9 groot grrea* grootsch ostentatious -schap » blijd g/ad blijdschap gladness -sel 9 borduurwerk embroidery borduursel galloon or lace -ster 9 vrijer a 6ea» vrijster a belle •voudig 9 een one eenvoudig single ■waarts » daar f/iere daarwaarts thither wege » zijnent /us zijnentwege respecting hint PRINCIPAL PREPOSITIONS. The following is a list of the principal prepositions with many of their respective meanings and modifications of meanings , which will shew their use and importance in writing and discourse : aan to aan mij to me 9 on aan alle kanten on all sides 9 against het hangt aan de muur it hangs against the wall » of aan zijn geluk wanhoopen to despair of his hope chter behind achter de kerk behind the church k« h bij geluk by good fortune achter behind k« h 9 near 9 at • 9 for lehalve except door by 9 through in in 9 into met with 9 by na after naar to 9 according to » for » after bij de kerk wonen to live near the church bij mijne moeder at my mother's bij gebrek aan geld for want of money behalve uwen broeder except your brother door mij by me door de rivier waden to wade through the river in de kerk in the church in misbruik geraken to fall into disuse met mij with me met list by intrigue na dit voorval after this event naar Amsterdam . gaan to go to Amsterdam naar de berigten according to the intelli- gences naar iemand zoeken to look for any one naar de natuur schilderen to paint after nature DUTCH ETYMOLOGY !fl naar to om for 9 round » in consequence of » upon om aan to onder under » during » amongst s with or between op on » upon » in » in » to » with te to x> by » in tegen against » at ten at » to tot to » to » M tussche a between uit out of for with dit gelijkt naar dat this resembles that om Gods wil for God's will om de stad wandelen to walk round the eit;/ om zijne misdaden in consequence of his crimes, hij viel hem om den hala he fell upon his neck. het is om aan den kost to komen it is to get a living onder het ongeluk bezwijken to sink under the misfortune onder den maaltijd during the meal onder raijne papieren amongst my papers dat wordt gezegd onder ons that is said bettceen ourselves op de tafel on the table leg het op de tafel lay it upon the table op de straat ontmoeten to meet in the street op eenen ernstigen toon in an earnest tone op een feest noodigen to invite to a feast hij is op u misnoegd he is dissatisfied with you te bed gaan to go to bed te water reizen to travel by water te midden van de menigte in the midst of the crowd tegen de muur against the wall tegen een gulden het pond at a guilder a pound ten mijnen huize at my house heden ten dage to this day van Rotterdam tot Amsterdam from Rot- terdam to Amsterdam tot op onzen tijd to our time het is tot uw best it is for your best tusschcn twee gevaren between two dangers zij komen uit de kerk they come out of the church uit ondervinding weten to know by expe- rience uit hoofde van on account uit alle magt achreeuwen to cry with all force fl2 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. uit from van from » "/ » by voor before « for » to » of zondei without ik zie uit uwen brief / see from your letter van Holland komen to come from Holland van icmand spreken to speak of any one van buiten leeren to learn by heart de vijand is voor de deur the enemy is before the door hij is voor alien gestorven he died for all voor iemand wijken to give way to any one wacht u voor hem take care of him zonder mijne hulp without my help PRAXIS ON THE PREPOSITIONS. Hij reed door de stad. De hoed hangt aan den wand. I) it is voor sommige menschen nadeelig. Het bevel van den koning wordt den volk aangekondigd. Ik heb het aan de kinderen ge- geven. Ik woon te Amsterdam. Zij komen van Leiden en gaan naar Utrecht. Hij houdt zijn verblijf te Dord- recht. Ik stond tusschen hem en haar. Hij rijdt te paard. Onder de regering van Koning "Willem den Tweeden. Hij verhief zich geenszins op deze onderscheiding. Zij wandelden buiten de stad. Op zekeren tijd stierf debroeder. Met de eerstkomende lente, ging het huisgezin naar buiten , om daar in de vrije natuur den zomer door te brengen. Hij heeft het regt , in geval van nood, zijn landgoed te ver- koopen. Het is uit dit boek vertaald. Hij bemint iedereen , tot zijne vijanden toe. He rode through the city. The hat hangs against the wall. This is injurious to some people. The king y s order is anounced to the people. J have given it to the children. 1 live at Amsterdam. They come from Leiden, and are going to Utrecht. He resides at Dordrecht. 1 stood between him and her. He rides on horseback. Under the governement of king William the Second. He did not exalt himself on this distinction. They walked out of the city. At a certain time the brother died. The first spring , the family went into the country to pass the summer in the enjoyment of the open air. He has the right to sell his es- tate in case of need. It is translated out of this book. He loves every one , even his ene- mies. DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. lis Hij is tot hooglecraar beroepen. He is nominated professor. Wij zorgen voor dc toekomst. Wc provide for the future. Den hoed voor iemand afnemen. To take off the hat to any one. CONJUNCTIONS. A Conjunction, voegwoord, is a word used to join com- plete or elliptical sentences together ; as , hij en ilc moeten naar Amsterdam gaan , doch Pieter kan te huis blijven , he and I must go to Amsterdam, but Peter can remain at home. Prepositions and Conjunctions are those connecting bonds which serve to express the relation and connection which things bear to one another , their mutual influence , de- pendences, and coherences, thereby joining sentences to- gether into intelligible and significant propositions. They are indispensable in rational discourse which is no other than the connection of thought , and thus their num- ber has increased as mankind has advanced in the art of reasoning and reflection. The more any nation is improved by the arts and sciences , the more will the language abound with connective particles , which are necessary in expressing that concatination of things and transition of thought which would escape grosser views. LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL CONJUNCTIONS. en and verder further ook also insgelijks likewise niet alleen not only eindelijk finally raaar ook but also dat is that is hoe how dat that op dat 1 namelijk namely . . (in order that . ten einde J ah as om dat because daarom therefore want for zoo so dewijl as derhalve therefore maar but doch but fchter however gelijk as nogtans yet gelijk ala 50 as daarentegen on the contrary zoo als so as daarenboven moreover schoon though hehalve besides alhoewel I uitgezonderd except hoewel J 114 DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. indien if ten zij | } provided that ten ware J ten eerste firstly toch but terwijl as inmiddels at the same time voor als nog as yet Some Conjunctions take only an indicative mood after them , others , both indicative and subjunctive , and others take always a subjunctive. It will be observed also that relative pronouns per- form the function of conjunctions , and even render the connection of sentences closer and more intimate than conjunctions do , though the latter convey sufficient dis- tinctness of connection in sentences. PRAXIS ON THE CONJUNCTIONS. Verstand en moed treffen hunne doelen met altijd. Huis en tuin zijn zonder koopers gebleven , zij zijn vervallen, en reeds in hunne waarde vermin- derd. Dewijl de zon opgegaan is , zullen wij onze arbeiden beginnen. Hij is zwak van Iigcbaam maar niet van geest. Iletzij hij wint of verliest hij is altijd dezelfde. Ik zal hem beloonen milis hij zijn pligt doet. Wij hebben noch boeken noch pennen , maar wij hebben goede zwarte inkt en goed papier. Hij deed eene poging om tot de keizsrin toegang te krijgen, doch dit inislukte hem te eenen male. Hij werdt door eenen aanzienlijken persoon , onder allerlei voor- wendsels, afgewezen, hetzij zijne jeugd daartoe de aanleidende oorzaak was , of dat deze man daartoe zijne bijzondere reden had. Understanding and courage do not ahcays attain their aim. House and garden have remained without purchasers , they are fallen to ruin?, and are already diminished in value. As the sun is up we will begin our labours. He is weak in body but not in mind. Whether he wins or loses he is always the same. I shall reward him if he do his duly. We have neither books nor pens , but we have good black ink and good paper. He made an attempt to get admis- sion to the Empress , but he failed in this altogether. He was put off by all sorts of pretences by some considerable person , either on account of his youth , or because this man had some private reasons for it DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. INTERJECTIONS. 115 Interjections , iusschenwerpsels , are words expressive of some passion or emotion in the mind of the speaker or writer. Before words were invented and known, men could have had no other method of communicating to one an- other what they felt than by gesticulation and the inar- ticulate cries of passion ; these various modifications of utterance , interjections , were therefore probably the first elements or beginning of speech. The following are the principal ejaculations and words of this class made use of by the Dutch TUSSCUENWERPSELS VAN Verwondering : Interjections of Admiration. o , ach , ei , ha , he ! e! VAN SMEEKING, of Praying. ach , ei ! ah! VAN WENSCHING , of Wishing. och , ha ! ah , ha ! VAN BEDREIGING , of Threatening. wee ! We! VAN DROEFHEID, of Grief. ach , och , helaas , wee ! ah, alas! VAN BLIJDSCHAP , of Joy. el , hei9a , ha ! ay! VAN VERSMADING OF A FREER , of Disgust or Aversion foei , fij , weg ! fie , begone ! VAN GEROEP, of Calling to. hem , p»t , holla , he ! hem, ho, sohol VAN AANMOEDIGTNG , of Encouraging. sa , ei , hul ! ay, come come ! VAN STILTE, of Silence. st, sua, ho, hei, hou , holla, hem! hush 9 hut! VAN GROETING, of Saluting. heil , alle heil ! hail, all hail\ HO DUTCH ETYMOLOGY. PRAXIS ON THE INTERJECTIONS. Helaas ! Ik ben ongelukkig gewor- den ! Huis en erve zijn weg ; vriendenenbloedverwanten heb- ben mij verlaten! lnderdaad ! Ik sta verwonderd ! , godsdienst , , deugd ! hoe onverschillig ben ik geweest aan uwe bekoorlijkheden ! Ah! de verleidingen van het ver- maak. , hoop ! gij troosteres des levens. Helaas? met welke beuzelingen heb ik mij bezig gehouden! O! de jammeren der ondeugd! Houd moed ! Gave God ! dat het moge beter gaan. Wee u ! booswicht ! Ah ! Mijn Heer ! mijne moeder is dood ! Kijk ! De heldere zon komt we- der te voorschijn ! Wees ver- heugd mijne kinderen. Alas ! J am become unfortunate 1 . House and land are gone; friends and relatives have deserted mel Really I J am astonished] , religion ! , Virtue ! how insensible 1 have been your charms ! Alas ! the delusions of pleasure. Oh ! hope , thou balm of life. Alas] with what trifles have J been occupied] ] the miseries of vice ! Keep courage ! God grant ! that it may go better ! JVo to yon ! wicked wretch ! Ah] Sir, my mother is dead] Behold ] the bright sun appears again ! rejoice my children. DUTCH SYNTAX Dutch Syntax , Hollandsche Woordvoeging , is the art of combining words conformable to the genius of the Dutch language , in order to express a proposition which is called a sentenee. SENTENCE. A Sentence , eene Zinsnede , is that due combination of words expressive of a proposition, or as Aristotle defines it: It is a form of speech which has a beginning, a mid- dle , and an end within itself, and may be comprehen- ded at one view ; as , het leven is kort , life is short ; de man slaapt , the man sleeps; dejongen speelt , the boy plays. Sentences are divided into three sorts : explicative , in- terrogative , and imperative. EXPLICATIVE SENTENCE. An Explicative Sentence , Verldarende Zinsnede , is that in which something is affirmed or denied in a direct manner as , de mensch is sterfelijk , man is mortal ; water is vloeibaar , water is liquid ; de man slaal het paard , the man strikes the horse. INTERROGATIVE SENTENCE. An Interrogative Sentence , Vragende Zinsnede , is one in which something is asked, and has this distinguishing characteristic from the foregoing that the subject is pla- ced after the verb instead of before it ; as , is de aarde rond ? is the earth round ? heeft hij den brief geschreven ? has he written the letter? 418 DUTCH SYNTAX. IMPERATIVE SENTENCE. An Imperative Sentence , Bevelende Zinmede , is that in which an order is given; as, ga weg , go away; kom hier, come hither ; wees op uw hoede , be on your guard. A Sentence may be either simple or compound. A SIMPLE SENTENCE, A Simple Sentence , Eenvoudige Zinsnede , consists of three essential materials : a subject or nominative , an attribute , and an object. The subject or nominative , het voorwerp , is the thing spoken of: the attribute, het gezegde, or geiveigerde, which expresses a state or action of the nominative : and the object, het onderwerp, which is the thing affected by the attribute when an action is expressed ; as , ik sla den hond , I strike the dog ; here I is the subject of which something is said, strikes is the attribute which expresses the state of its subject, and dog is the object on which the attribute acts. Those sentences which have a neuter verb for attribute do not take an object; as, de wereld is mrgankelijk , the world is transitory ; in this sentence world is the subject of which something is said as to its state , is , is the attribute which expresses the state or existence of the subject ; and transitory is an adjunct which merely serves to qualify the noun world; in such expressions the attribute goes back to the nominative instead of passing on to another thing or object ; so in the assertion , Johanna slaapt , or is sla- pend , Jane sleeps , or is sleeping ; here the state sleep applies to Jane , the subject or nominative , and the sen- tence is complete. COMPOUND SENTENCE. A Compound Sentence, Zamengestelde Zinsnede, is a sen- tence which contains two or more propositions which are connected sometiaies by a conjunction and sometimes not ; as , naarstigheid is lofwaardig en verschaft genoegen , diligence is praiseworthy and yields satisfaction. A com- pound sentence can be extended at pleasure provided it does not extend so far as to weary the attention of the hearer or reader ; as , DUTCH SYNTA X. 119 Vrede vanen wapperen, vrede leu- Peace banners are /lying , peace zen schitteren; geen gevveer of garlands glisten; neither fire schietgevaarte braakt meer ver- arms nor artillery spread rfe- wocsting en dood ; de musket- vastation and death ; muskets ten knallen vrede ! de kanonnen announce peace ! the artillery bulderen vrede ! roars peace ! J. van der Palm. this sentence consists , first , of two simple sentences , then of a compound sentence , and then of four simple sen- tences , thus in all , of seven sentences or members united. Syntax is divided into two parts : Concord and Gover- nement. CONCORD. Concord , Verbinding , is the agreement which one word has with another with respect to gender , number , and person ; and consists of four principal rules : 1. The Article with the noun. 2. The Adjective with the noun. 3. The Pronoun with the noun. 4. The Verb with its nominative. De mensch is een redelijk schepsel, toch hij dwaalt dikwijls , man is a rational being, but he often errs; here the verb is agrees with man in number and person; and the pronoun he agrees with man in gender and number. GOVERNMENT. Government , Beheersching , is the power which one word has over another with respect to mood , tense , and case , and consists principally of the following rules : 1. Adjectives with respect to case. 2. Verbs with respect to case , and infinitive mood. 3. Prepositions with respect to case. Indien hij daar zij , zullen wij hem straffen , if he be there we will punish him ; here , if governs the subjunc- tive mood ; punish governs Mm in the objective. The principles of Syntax are for the most part the same in all languages ; however every language has its peculiarities in construction arising out of the genius of the people with which the genius of the language will ever be found to carry with it a remarkable conformity. 120 DUTCHSYNTAX. In the construction and union of sentences there must be a due arrangement of the succession of ideas so as readily to catch the conception of the hearer or reader , and at the same time , the words , whether principal or qualifying , must be so chosen , that their succession of sounds falls harmoniously on the ear. The following are the principal rules of Dutch Syntax, and such as are essential to be followed in order to pro- duce the right disposition of words in a sentence. RULE I. Concord of Article and Noun. The article must agree with the noun in gender, num- ber , and case ; as , Een zeeoverste heeft , boven eenen A naval commander has, above veldheer, het uiterste belang in that of a military commander, de hoedanigheden van zijn volk. the greatest interest in the S. Stijl. quality of his people. RULE II. Omission of the Article. No article is used before nouns taken in a general signification ; as , Verlichting, deugd, en tijd,zijn Enlightening, virtue, and time, denkbeelden welke elkander in are ideas which follow each orde opvolgen. other in succession and order. A. F. Simons. Except when a preposition goes before ; as , Voorlezingen over de verlichting, Lectures on enlightening, virtue, de deugd , en den tijd. and time. A. F. Simons. No article is used before nouns when used addressingly; as, Moet ik u noemen , Vorst der Must I mention you , Prince of Nederlandsche bardsn! Nooit Netherlands bards ! Von del r volprezen V o n d e 1. never fully praised. J. M. Schraet DUTCH SYNTAX. 121 Much nice attention and judgment are required in the due use and omission of the article in sentences , as it de- pends more on good taste than on any fixed rules ; as in the following sentence , Op den maalstroom van gedurige To the whirlpool of constant re- oomentelingen en oorlogen volgf tolutions and tears , follows a een ataat van evenwigt en state of equalization and peace. vrede. Overvloed neerat de Abundance taken the place of plaats in van behoefte , gerust- want , quietude that of con- heid die van gedurige vreeze. stant fear. D. J. v. Lenn ep. Proper names of persons , countries , and cities , do not take an article; as, Hugo de Groot; Kornelis de Witt; Holland; Frankrijk; Amsterdam; Londen. Except when proper names are taken in a general sense, as an individual for a species, by way of emi- nence; as, de Be Ruiters en de Tromps der laatste eeuw , the De Ruiters and the Tromps of the last century; Leiden, liet Athene van Holland, Leiden, the Athens of Holland. Except also the names of certain countries and cities which take an article before them; as, de Nedcrlanden, the Netherlands; de Haag, the Hague; de Vereenigde Sta- ten, the United States; de Havana, the Havana; de Ca- raccas, the Caraccas. The definite article is used befor proper names when spoken of by way of pre-eminence ; as, de schriften van eenen Erasmus, of van eenen Hugo de Groot, the writings of an Erasmus or a Grotius. Proper names preceded by an adjective, require the definite article; as, het handel drijvende Holland, the tra- ding country of Holland; de oorlogzuchtige Napoleon, the war aspiring Napoleon. RULE III. Ellipses of the Article. To avoid disagreeable repetitions in speaking or writing and to express our ideas in few words, an ellipsis or omission of some word or words is frequently admitted; but this must not be done if the sentence should thereby be obscured, or its force weakened. 122 DUTCH SYNTAX. When two or more nouns of the same gender and number follow each other in a sentence, the article is pla- ced before the first and omitted by ellipsis before the following ones; as, Do aarde , hemel , en maan lijn The earth , heaven, and moon are Goda werken. God's works. except when particular emphasis is required ; as , De lof, en de heerlijkheid , en Praise , and majesty, and wis- dewijsheid, en de dankzegging , dom , and thanksgiving, and en de eere , en de kracht, en honor, and power, and strength, de sterkte , zij onzen Gode in be unto our God unto eternity . alle eeuwigheid. B. A. B orger. Except also when the nouns are of different genders and numbers; as, de man, de vrouw, en het kind, the man, woman, and child; however when several plural nouns follow each other, though of different genders, the definite article de need not be repeated ; as , de mannen, paarden, en ossen, the men, horses, and oxen. In writing and speaking abreviations of the articles are sometimes used , however this must not be done too freely, it being a violation of polite style , except by a poetical licence, or to avoid a monotony or breach of harmony; as , een' for eenen , 't for het , '& for des , and Leg u op de lijdzaamheid en on- schuld toe j want gene (lijd- zaamheid) lecrt u de weder- waardigheden verdragen , doze (onschuld) dezelve overwinnen. Apply yourself to forbearance and innocency; for the former teach- es you to endure adversities , the latter to conquer them. RULE XXIII. The Pronouns DEGENE, DIEGENE, and HETGENE. The Demonstrative Pronouns degene and diegene must be followed by a relative pronoun ; as , Degene die mij vriendschap bewijst. Wij apraken van degenen die zich zoo dapper gedragen hebben. Diegenen welke zich daaraan heb- ben vergrepen. He who shows me friendship. We spoke of those wlw have con- ducted themselves so bravely. Those who have rendered them- selves therein culpable. The Demonstrative hetgeen or hetgene , what or that which, including a relative within itself, does not take a relative after it ; as , Hetgeen hij ondervonden heeft weet What he has experienced no man geen mensch. knows. RULE XXIV. The Pronouns DEZELVE and DEZE. The Pronouns dezelve and deze are often used indiscri- minately , and to avoid their too frequent repetition. The pronouns hij and zij , and particularly ze , are frequently substituted for them ; as , Alva hoorende de tijding , kon hij ze in het eerst naauwelijka gelooven. De zaak leed geen uitstel, ze werd dadelijk verhandeld. Hij vond de papieren en bragt ze aan den eigenaar. Hier deed de vreugde de oogen schitteren , daar benevelde zij ze met den zoeten daauw der natuur. Alva hearing the news could at first scarcely believe it. The affair allowed no delay , it mas instantly treated upon. He found the papers and brought them to the proprietor. Here joy made the eyes sparkle there it obscured them with the 9weet de\o of nature. 136 DUTCH SYNTAX. RULE XXV. The Pronouns DUSDANIG and ZOODANIG. Dusdanig and zoodanig may serve as answers to the in- terrogative hoedanig; as, Hoedanig is die fcaak afgeloopen? How has that affair passed over? Zoodanig als ik het gewenscht so as I wished. heb. Hoedanig zult gij u hierin gedra- Bow will you conduct yourself gen? Dusdanig als overeenkom- herein ? so as is consistent with stig is met de goede trouw. good faith* RULE XXVI. Concord of the Relative and Antecedent. The Relative Pronoun agrees with the noun to which it relates , called its antecedent , in gender and number ; and when no nominative comes between it and the verb it is then the nominative to the verb; as, En waar zult gij eenen mensch And where will you find a per- vinden die voor uwe maat- son who is so justly formed schappij zoo juist gevormd i9 for your society as the true als de ware Christus? Christ? R. van Ommeren. But when, a nominative comes between the relative and the verb, the case of the relative is governed by the word which follows; as, De vorst wiens dood wij betreu- The prince whose death we la- ren. ment. De man wien wij zoo veel te dan- The man whom toe have so much ken hebben. to thank. When the relative has two or more antecedents it must then be put in the plural number; as, De tuin en het hufc welke ver- The house and garden which will kocht zullen worden. be sold. Sometimes a sentence is the antecedent to a relative, it is then put in the neuter gender; as, DUTCH SYNTAX. Zij sprakcn over deugd en gods- vrucht , dat mij zeer aangenaam was. De kinderen leerden hunae lessen, dat hun meester met genoegen rag. They conversed on virtue and piety , which was very agree- able to me. The children learned their les- sons , which their master saw with pleasure. If the phrase consists of several members the norm which is the principal subject can be repeated in order to give additional precision; as, De algemeene en bijzondere ge- schiedenis moet zooveel moge- lijk wijsgeerig behandsld wor- den , en op een oordeelkundig onderzoek van de drijfveeren dor daden en gabeurtenissen steu- nen ; welke geschiedenis dan inzonderheid nuttige wenken en lessen bevat. Universal and particular history must be treated upon as philo- sophically as possible, and be based on a critical examination of the motives of actions and events- which history then in- deed contains useful hints and lessons. RULE XXVII. The Relatives DIE, WELKE, WIE and WAT. The Relatives die and welke are used indiscriminately in familiar style, though sometimes the former is pre- ferred to the latter. Die is moreover preferred in fa- miliar style after a noun signifying a person , or after a personal pronoun if the relative should be in the nomi- native ; but when in any other case than the nominative , then the relative wie for the singular , and wie or welke for the plural is preferred ; as , Ik die steeds uw vriend ben ge- / who have always been your weest. friend. Zij die uw broeders ongeluk zoe- They who seek your brother's ken. misfortune. Ik, wien gij zoo vele weten- /, whom you have to thank schappelijke kundigheden te for so much scientific know- danken hebt. ledge. When the relative wie is used for persons, and is fol- lowed by a noun, it is then put in the possessive case; as, 9 * 158 DUTCH SYNTAX. De Heer K. wiens dood nog on- zeker is, heeft eene fraaije boekerij, Zij , wier bedoelingen de zuiverste zijn. De armen , wier weldoener hij is. De man , wiens vriend gij zijt. Mr. K. whose death is yet un- certain , has a fine library. They , whose aims are the pu- rest. The poor, whose benefactor he is. The man , whose friend you are. When die , wie , wat , and welke, are used as relatives for animals and inanimate objects , and the pronouns must take a preposition before them, then the pronoun die is replaced by daar , wie by wat , welke by waar , and daar and waar are followed by the preposition ; as , De gronden waarmede gij hem denkt te overtuigen. De pen waarvan gij spreekt. Het onderwerp waarover de hoog- leeraar handelt. De gebeurtenisssn daar wij van gehoord hebben. De brief waar aan zij haar behoud te danken heeft. Het misdrijf waarvoor hij gevan- gen zit. The proofs ly which you think to convince him. The" pen of which you speak. The subject on which the profes- sor treats. The events of which we have heard. The letter to which she is indebt- ed for her safelty. The crime for which he is confi - ned. Sometimes the preposition is placed at a distance from daar or waar ; as , Sprekende oogen , waar een vurig Expressive eyes in which a warm en opregt karakter in door- and an upright character ylan- straalde. ced. The relatives die and wie are often met with in the same phrase. When they are both in the nominative , and die is placed after wie, the former can generally be omitted; when die is not in the nominative it must then be always expressed; as, Wie erkentelijkheid van anderen begeert, moet zelfs dankbaar zijn. Wie u vriendschap bewijst, dien moet gij geene vijandschap be- toonen. He who expects gratitude from others , must be grateful him- self. He who shows you friendship , to him you must not show enmity. \) I T C H S Y N T A X \7rt RULE XXVIII. Interrogalives and Answers. An agreement in gender , number, and case , must ex- ist between Interrogative Pronouns and answers; as, Welke dieren zijn de nuttigste ? de schapen. Wiens huis is dit ? des buurmana. Van wien hebt gij deze pennen ? van onzen meester. Uit wier schriften hebt gij deze daadzaken getrokken ? uit de uwe en de' zijne. Which animals are the mos fate- ful ? the shee/j. yVhose house is this? the neigh- bor's. From whom hate you these pens? from our master. Out of whose writings have you extracted these facts? out of yours and his. RULE XXIX. The Interrogates WAT and WELKE. The Interrogates wat and welke, preceded by a pre- position , are often replaced by waar , and the substantive which ought to follow welke omitted , and the preposition follows waar ; as , and might follow wat is Waarmede heeft hij hem vereerd ? Wherewith has he honored him ? Waarvan heeft uwe zuster tijding Of what has your sister received gekregen ? news. Waaraan i8 uw broeder gestorven ? Of what did your brother die? Waarover heeft men in de les Of what did they treat in the gehandeld ? lesson? Waarmede werd uw oudoom be- Of what was your giand-unclc tigt ? accused ? The Interrogative Pronouns are variously used ; as , wie , wat are followed by verbs ; as , wie spreekt ? who speaks? wat zegt gij? what do you say? welke is followed by a substantive; as, welke pen verkiest gij ? which pen do you choose? wat is also followed by a substantive and a preposition ; as , wat paard is dot ? what horse is that? wat wor een landsman zijt gij? what countryman are you? Hoedanig is followed by the substantive or the verb ; as , Hoedanig mensck is dot ? what sort of man is that? 140 DUTCH SYNTAX. RULE XXX. Concord of Verb and Nominative. A verb must agree with its nominative in number and person ; as , De uitgestrektheid der kwaadspre- The extent of calumny shows kendheid vertoont zichnogdui- itself more plainly, if we take delijker , als wij in aanmerking into consideration, that it can nemen , dat zij zoo wel lijdelijk be committed as well passively als dadelijk gepleegd kan wor- as actively. den. J. H. v. d. Palm. Sometimes an infinitive or part of a sentence is the nominative to a verb ; as , God lief te hebben en te gehoor- To love and obey God is the zamen is 's menschen pligt. duty of man. Het roer van staat te besturen is To direct the rudder of state is eene moeijelijke kunst. a difficult art. Het haten van hen die ons wel- To hate those who do us good doen is afschuwelijk. is dreadful. When two or more nominatives precede the verb , the verb is then put in the plural ; as , Heldenmoed en menscblievendheid Bravery and humanity wereuni- waren in hem vereenigd. ted in him. The Imperative mood alone is used without the no- minative being expressed ; as , Zie den worstelaar. See the wrestler. Aanschouw de hooge bergtoppen ! Behold the mountain tops. Except when a noun precedes the verb , then a pro- noun can come after or before it ; as , Gij , Almagtige Vader ! help mij Thou , Almighty father ! help me uit mijn lijden ! out of my sufferings I Gij moeder ! heb medelijden met Thou mother ! have pity on thy uwe dochter. daughter. Gaat heen , gij onbezonnen! Go hence, ye foolish ! DUTCH SYNTAX. 1U RULE XXXI. Ellipsis of the Nominative. When two or more verbs require the same nomina- tive , it is expressed to the first only and omitted by ellipsis to the following; as, Gij leest en vertaalt wel. You read and translate well. Hij had beloofd te koraen maar He had promised to come but did kwam niet. not come. The nominative may sometimes be repeated for the sake of energy ; as , Gij leest en gij vertaalt wel. You read and you translate well. Also when the members of the phrase would place the nominative at too great a distance from the verb; as, Hij had beloofd hedcn namiddag He had promised to come to me bij mij te komen , maar hij is this afternoon , but he is not niet gekomen. come. Gij verstaat vrij wel en echter You understand very well and yet vertaalt gij slecht. you translate badly. Whenever the nominative comes after the verb it must then be repeated ; as , Handelt gij tegen mijne waarschu- Jf you act against my teaming wing en stort gij dus u zelven and plunge yourself into mis- in het ongeluk , zoo moet gij fortune, then you must no! rely op mijne hulp niet rekenen. on my assistance. RULE XXXII. First Second or Third Person as Nominative. If the first person is joined with the second or third person as subjects of the phrase , the verb agrees with the first person , but this person is repeated in the plu- ral ; as , Gij en ik , wij kennen deze ge- You and J know this event. gebeurtenis. Mijne moeder en ik , wij gaan wan- My mother and J are going to delen. take a walk. 142 DUfCH SYNTAX. Wij , mijne moeder, mijne zuster, My mother, sister, and i, en ik , gaan uit. going out. are When a second and third person come together as the nominative to the same verb , the verb agrees with the second person which must be placed next the verb ; as , Uw broeder en gij gaat te Leiden. Yourl brother and you are going uwe studien eindigen. to Leiden to finish your studies. Uwe zusters en gij hebt wel ge- You and your sisters have done daan. ice//. a RULE XXXIII. Singular and Plural as Nominative. When a Singular and Plural nominative belong to the same verb, the verb agrees with the plural and it is placed next the] verb ; as , Hij en zijne neven komen van de lie and his nephews come from hoogeschool te Utrecht. the university of Utrecht. RULE XXXIV. Tense. There must be a due observance of time through the whole phrase , and the same tense must be used throughout; and in questions and answers the same uni- formity must be observed ; as , Hij gaf mij alles wat hij had. He gave me all that he had. Wij zullen u schrijven zc-odrawij We shall write to yon as soon iets zullen weten. os we shall know any thing. Van wien spreekt gij ? van uwen Of whom do you speak ? of your oom. unclc - Welk onderwerp heeft hij bezon- What subject has he sung? he tren ? Hij heeft de verdiensten has sung the merits ofR u be n s. vaii Rubens bezongen. The present tense is sometimes used for the future; as, Ik kc-m aanstonds weder. / return immediately. Ik vertrek morgen naar buiten. / go into the country to-morrow. DUTCH S V N T A X. u: Sometimes the Present is substituted for the Past Im- perfect ; as , Ik word uit mijne boekenkamer geroepen; ik kom beneden, zie een' onbekenden die geen woord «preekt , ik beschouw hem met aandacht en vlieg in zijne ar- men : het is mijn brooder, dieri ik in geen twaalf jaren gezien had. / am called out of my library; I come below, see a strange per- son who does not speak a word, J look at him attentively and fly into his arms: it is my brother whom J had not seen for twelve years. It often happens that the sense of the phrase does not admit of its being continued in the same tense. The agreement of time then requires that a phrase beginning in the Indicative Present should be continued by a Per- fect Past , or a Future , or Compound Future of the In- dicative ; if the phrase begins with an Imperfect Past , it should be continued by a Compound Past , as also by a Future and a Compound Future of the Subjunctive; as, Ik kwam nadat gij vertrokken waart. Hij kwam terug , toen hij den brief weg gebragt had. Gij gaat , maar zult morgen niet terug zijn. Karel vertrok gisteren en zal weldra terug komen. Wij hebben het gedaan , doch zullen het niet weder doen. Mijn broeder bezocht hem ; maar zonder u t zoude hij hem niet bezocht hebben. 1 came after you had departed. He came back , when he had ta- ken the letter. You go, but you will not be back to morroxo. Charles departed yesterday and will soon return. We hate done it but tot 11 not do it again. My brother visited him; but with- out you he would not have vi- sited him. The Imperfect Tense of the Subjunctive is often used instead of the Compound Future ; as , Ik wilde hem wel helpen, for I would indeed help him. Ik zoude hem wel willen helpen. J should be willing to help him. Hij koride reeds hier zijn , for He could already be here. Hij zoude reeds hier kunnen zijn. He should already be here. Also the Imperfect Tense of the Indicative is used for the Compound ; as , 144 DUTCH SYNTAX. Ik hadde hem raaar laten vertrek- / ought to have let him go. ken , for Ik zoude hem maar hebben laten / should have let him go. vertrekken. RULE XXXV. Mood. An action represented in a positive manner is put in the Indicative mood, and the same mood must be obser- ved throughout the phrase if the sense does not require otherwise ; as , Zij gelooven u niet , en zullen They do not believe you , and mij ook niet gelooven. they tvill not believe me alio. An uncertain , doubtful / or conditional action is ex- pressed in the Subjunctive ; as also a wish , a desire , or an apprehension. The presence of the subjunctive mood depends also on the presence of a conjunction expressed or understood , and a futurity ; as , Uw grijs haar herinnere u dat het That your gray hairs may re- tijd is wijs te worden. mind you that it is time to be wise. Al kwame hij nu , zou het reeds // he came now , it would be te laat zijn. already too late. RULE XXXVI. Infinitive Mood. The Infinitive is often used substantively , in which case it can be preceded by an article , or an adverb , or an- other substantive ; as , Weldoen is pligt. To do good is a duty. Ik ben vermoeid van het wandelen. I am tired with walking. Spelen moet tot verpozing dienen. Play must serve for recreation. Veel werken. To work much. Te gulzig drenken. To drink greedily. Voedsel gebruiken. To take food. The Future Infinitive is little used , the Indicative Fu- ture conveying the same sense ; as , DUTCH SYNTAX. 145 Hi) heeft beloofd morgcn te zul- len komen , or, hij heeft be- loofd dat hij morgen komen zal. Ho has promised to come to mor- row , or, he has promised that he will come to morrow. RULE XXXVII. Participles. Present and Past Participles are used as adjectives to qualify nouns , and agree with the noun in gender , num- ber and case ; and they convey an active as well as a passive sense ; as , De ploegende landman. De moeder , hare kinderen bemin- nende en voor hen zorgende. Het winstgevende bedrijf. De ingebeelde ziekte. De geteekende landschap. De opgehoopte schatten. The ploughing peasant. The mother, loving her children and caring for them. The profitable occupation. The imaginary" disease. The drawn landscape. The heaped up riches. Besides the present and past participle there is the Future Participle , which however is seldom used, the future indicative conveying the same sense ; as , Ik begeer niet dat gij het doet , zullende ik zelf het doen (of, daar ik het zelf zal doen). Wij vertrekken te twaalf uur , zullende bij uwen broeder het middagmaal houden (of daar wij zullen enz). Hij gaat een uur vroeger naar school , zullende daar zijne taak afwerken , (of daar hij daar zijne taak zal afwerken). About do it myself, I do not wish you to do it, {or, as I myself shall do it). About to dine toith your brother, \or as we shall dine with. your brother) we depart at twelve o' clock. lie goes an hour earlier to school, as he will finish his task there. RULE XXXVIII Two Verbs. One verb governs another that follows it, or depends upon it , in the infinitive mood which takes te before it ; as , Ik kom u 1e spreken. lam come to speak to you. 10 146 DUTCH SYNTAX. Hij is daar altijd te vinden. He is always to be found there. Zij verlangen te vertrekken. They desire to depart. On3 staat veel te duchten. We have much to fear. Wij wenschen u te zien. We wish to sec you. Sometimes the Preposition om or zonder is placed before the infinitive to qualify the relation of the two verbs; as, Ik ga om hem gezelschap te hou- / am going te keep him company den. (or for the purpose of keeping him company). De mensch eet omteleven, maar Man eats to live [and by no means leeft geenszins om te eten. lives to eat. Hij vertrok zonder zich te ont- He departed without excusing him- schuldigcn. self. When the Perfect Past Infinitive is used, the participle is placed first and the preposition te between it and the infinitive; as, Ik wenschte hem gezien te hebben. / wished to have seen him. Gij gelooft van uwe kinderen be- You believe to have been beloved mind te zijn geweest. by your children. However zonder is sometimes employed without te; as, Hij is zonder vreezen. He is without fear. Sometimes verbs do not take te in the infinitive , as when followed by the auxiliary zullen ; as also the verbs durven to dare doen to do kunnen to be able laten lo let mogen may leeren to learn voelen to feel blijven to remain komen to come will en to will heeten to call helpen to help hooren to hear noemen to name zien to see gaan to go vinden to find. as , Ik zal gaan. I shall go. Hij durft niet uitgaan. He dares not go out. Hij kan niet vallen. He cannot fall. Wij moeten hem betalen. We must pay him. Hij doet mij lezen. He makes me read. Zij wilden die beginselen niet toe- They will not agree to those prin- stemmen. ciples. Ik mag u niet gelooven. / may not believe you. DUTCH SYNTAX. 147 Sometimes a Participle is employed in the place of an infinitive ; as , Ik zag den brief geschreven. I saw the letter written. Wij vonden hem sukkelende. We found him suffering. Ik hoor imen broeder zingende. / hear your brother singing. When the Auxiliaries zjjn and hebben are used to imply possibility , necessity , or obligation , the verb which fol- lows in the infinitive takes te before it ; as , Er was een huis te zien. There was a home to be seen. Hij had eene groote som te betalen. He had a great sum to nay. Ik heb te leeren. 1 have to learn. The verb komen must be followed by te when it is employed in the sense of happening or taking place ; as , Zijne zuster kwain te overlijden. Eis sister happened to die. Mijn broeder kwam te sneuvelen. My brother happened to be killed. The verbs staan , zitten , and liggen , in the present and imperfect tense, require te to the infinitive following them ; but these verbs in the perfect and compound past tense do not take te in the infinitive after them ; as , Ik sta of stond te wachten. / stand or stood waiting. Hij ligt of lag te slapen. Ee lies or lay sleeping. Ik zit of zat te schrijven. / sit or sat writing. Hij heeft of had liggen slapen. Ee has or had lain sleeping. Ik heb of had zitten schrijven. i have or had sat writing. RULE XXXIX. The Verbs ZIJN and WORDEN. The verbs zijn and worden , to be ; and also blijven to remain , heeten to call , schijnen to seem , take the same case after them as before them ; as , Hij is een man. Ee is a man. Jan wordt een rijk koopman. John becomes a rich merchant. Hij bhjft de opregte en openhar- Ee remains the upright and open- tige vricnd mijner jeugd. hearted friend of my youth. 148 DUTCH SYNTAX. Jacob heet de eerlijkste koop- Jacob is called the most honest man van de stad. merchant of the city*. Deze knechfc schijnt erft eerlijk This servant seems to he an roan te zijn. honest man. When the verb is followed by als the same case is used after it as before ; as , Jan van Schaffel a a* gedroeg John van Schaffelaar beha- zich als een dapper en zeldzaam red as a singularly amiable man . liefderijk raensch. Uw broeder leeft als een kluize- Your brother lives as a hermit. naar. RULE XL. Verb and Possessive Case. In solemn style some verbs take the possessive case after them ; as , Gedenk onzer. Think of us. Ontferm u onzer. Have merry upon us. Erbarm u mijner. Pity me. Ik schaam mij uwer. / am ashamed of you. However in familiar style it is better to employ a pre- position after such verbs , and say or write gedenk aan ons ; ontferm u over ons ; erbarm u over mij ; ik schaam mij over w. RULE XLT. Verb and Dative Case. When a noun comes after a verb as an indirect ob- ject to the verb , it is put in the dative case; and also when a verb active is used in the passive voice ; as , Hij leerde den jongeling de aard- He taught the boy geography. rijkskunde. De aard rijkskunde werd den jon- Geography was taught the boy geling door hem geleerd. by him. The verbs beloven , to promise ; berigten , to inform ; betalen , to pay ; borgen ; to lend ; brengen , to bring ; gc- DUTCH SYNTAX. 149 ven , to give ; klagen , to complain ; schenken , to serve ; etc. and many verbs compounded of the preposition aan , af , toe, or ont , have the dative case after them; as, Hij heeft zijnen broeder die goe- He has sent his brother those deren toegezonden. goods. Ik gaf hem zijn boek. J gate him his booh. Breng den meester deze papieren. Take these papers to the master. Uw vader klaagde mij zijnen nood. Your father complained to me of his want. Many verbs neuter require also a dative case after them ; as behoorcn , to belong to ; bevallen , to please ; blijven , to remain ; gelijken , to resemble ; etc. and also some impersonals as blijken , to seem ; berouwen , to re- pent ; etc. as , De waarheid ia mij gisteren ge- The truth appeared to me ycs- bleken. terday. Deze kneeht bevalt aan mijne on- This servant pleases my parents. ders. IHjj ge8cbiedt een groot onregt. A great injustice is done me. RULE XLH. Verb Active and Objective Case. Verbs active require an objective case after them ; as , De arbeid veraterkt den menach. Labor strengthens man. Two or more objectives can follow the same verb, the verb being used only to the first and omitted to the fol- lowing by ellipsis ; as , Zij onderwcea haren zoon en hare She taught her son and daughter. dochter. Deze zaak betreft mij en u. This affair concerns me and you. RULE XLIII. Verb Neuter and Preposition. Verbs neuter require a preposition after them ; as , 150 DUTCH SYNTAX. Ik lach over u. Ik denk van hem. / laugh at you. J think of him. However some neuter verbs take an objective case after them when they signify an action passing to an object or as passing back to the object ; as , Eenen geweldigen dood sterven. To die a violent death. Den langsten weg gaan. To go the longest road. Men vischt barnsteen in de oost- They fish for amber in the Baltic, zee. Deze ieerling gaat steeds zijnen This pupil always continues his gang. course. Determination of length , breadth , height , weight , va- lue , and price of things expressed after neuter verbs, are in the objective case ; as , Hi| keerde den derden dag na zijn vertrek terug. Hij is eenen duim gegroeid. Het kost eenen gulden. He returned on the third day after his departure. He has grown an inch. It costs a guilder. RULE XLIV. Position of Subject or Nominative , Verb or Attribute , and Object, in Sentences. In positive sentences the subject or nominative is pla- ced at the commencement of the phrase and the verb immediately after it, and the object at the end of the phrase ; as , De kinderen volgen het voorbeeld hunner ouders. De overheid waakt voor het wel- zijn der burgers. The children follow the example of their parents. The magistrate watches over the welfare of the citizens. In compound tenses of verbs the auxiliary immediately follows the subject of the phrase and the past participle or infinitive is placed at the end ; as , Ikzoudeuwenbroedergaarnedaar- l[should willingly have spoken over gesproken hebben. with your brother on that affair. Mijn vader zal morgen ochtend met My father will depart to morrow de postkoets naar Utrecht ver- with the mail-coach to Utrecht. trekken. DUTCH SYNTAX. 151 Ik heb zoowel den man als de / hate seen the man as well ax vrouw gezien. the woman. If the verb is compounded of a separable preposition , the preposition is placed at the end of the phrase in the imperative , and in the present or the imperfect of the indicative ; but in the same tenses of the subjunc- tive mood the preposition precedes the verb ; and in the remainder tenses of both moods, the preposition precedes the past participle or infinitive of the verb ; as , Rijd snel de stad door. Rido rapidly through the city. Hij haalde vele schrijvers in zijne lie quoted many authors in his verhandeling aan. treatise. Hij zag van zijne eerste voorne- He relinquished his former in- mens af. tentions. Feith heeft in zijne verhandeling Feith has quoted many authors over het heldendicht, vele schrij- in his treatise on heroic poems. vers aangehaald. In phrases having a relative pronoun which acts at the same time as a conjunction , the nominative immediately follows the pronoun and the verb is placed at the end of the phrase ; as , De omstandighedcn , die ik alien 7he circumstances, all of which J heb opgenoemd. have enumerated. Het geloof dat gij aan zijne woor- The belief thai you cm attach den kunt hschten. to his words. De erkentenis die ons geslacht The gratitude which our family aan zijne belangeloosheid ver- awes to his disinterestedness. schuldigd is. Veroorloof dat ik weinige werken Permit that I quote a few works over het g.^schilpunt aanhale. on the point in dispute. RULE XLV. Adverbs. Adverbs must be placed next those words which they qualify and generally before adjectives , after simple verbs, and between the auxiliary and the verb in compound tenses of verbs ; as , Een zeer kostbaar geschenk. A very costly present. 152 DUTCH SYNTAX. Wij hadden weinig, Het is mij met geoorloofd te gaan. Het is mij geoorloofd niet te gaan. Zij zullen dagelijks weldaden ont- vangen. Hi] heeft weinig papier gehad. We had little. I am not permitted to go. I am permitted not to go. They will receive benefits daily. Re has had little paper. When a conjunction or relative pronoun is at the be- ginning of a phrase , the verb is then placed at the end , and the adverb precedes it ; as , Wanneer zij u nimnier gekend // they had never known you. hadden. Uwe moeder beweert dat zij u Your mother shows that she can nooit gelooven kan. never believe you. Indien hij u dagelijks kwame be- // ho visited you daily. zoeken. When the same quality or the same action is accom- panied by several adverbs , then that of time takes pre- cedence , then that of place , and then that of quantity , quality, or manner; as, Wij lezen van eene doorbraak die 's vrijdag nachts den 4 n . van sprokkelraaand 1825, te Durger- dam , geweldig vele vewoestin- gen aanrigtede. Mijn grootvader is gisteren namid- dag, van hier, ongaarne, en to voet vertrokken. W@ read of a rupture of a dyke which took place in the night of the 4th. of February , at Durgerdam, and caused much destruction. My grandfather departed- hence yesterday afternoon , with re~ gret , and on foot. Sometimes an adverb begins the phrase ; as , Naauwelijks had hij mij verstaan He had scarcely understood me of hij gehoorzaamde. but he obeyed. Terstond kom ik terug. / return immediately. Nergens heeft de booswicht rust The tascal has not found repose gevonden. anywhere. The adverb generally precedes the infinitive of verbs ; as , Er is genoeg te gebruiken, Naar elders gaan. Naar meer te trachten. There is enough to use. To go elsewhere. To try for more. 1) U T Cil S Y X i A X. 155 RULE XLVI. Preposition and Objective. Prepositions govern the objective case, am! are placed immediately before the words on which they acl; except when they are joined to verbs ; as , Ik heb het aaa de kinderen gcgeven. / hnve given it to the children. De zoon van den vriendmijns ooms. The so)i of my uncle's friend. If the same preposition governs two or more substan- tives joined by copulative conjunctions , the preposition is expressed to the first only , and omitted to the fol- lowing by ellipsis; as, Deze redenaar munt ait in geluk- kige wendingen en gepastheid van uitdrukking. De geleerde van wien wij spreken , onderscheidt zich door uitge- breide kennis , grondige geleerd- heid , en ongeveinsde zedigheid. This orator excells in happy tur- nings and appropriate expres- sions. The learned man of whom we speak , distinguishes himself by an extensive knowledge , pro- found learning and genuine modesty. But when the substantives are joined by adversative or conditional conjunctions , the preposition must be repeat- ed ; as , Ifij heeft het gedaan deels tot zijne verstrooijing , en deels tot genoegen zijner vrouw. U\v zoon doet het noch uil fiefde, noch ait pligt. Mijne dochter heeft zich op ver- schillende handwerken toege- legd , niet alleen om mij te vol- doen , maar ook om zichzelve bezigheid te geven. He has done it partly for his distraction , and partly for the pleasure of his wife. Your son does it neither from love, n or from duty. My daughter has applied herself to different hind* of work, not only to satisfy me , but also to find herself employment. The preposition is sometimes repealed before each noun for the sake of energy ; as , De landgenoot wiens ontijdig ver- The fellow countryman whose un- ites wij betreuren , muntte uit timely loss we lament, wasdis- 10 * 154 DUTCH SYNTAX. onder zijrie medeburgeren, door tinguished amongst his fellow algemeene omvattende kenni8 , citizens , for his general cow- door diepdringende geleerdheid, prehensive knowledge , pene- door vlughfid van bevatting , trating learning, quickness of door scherpzinnigheid van oor- apprehension , perspicacity of deel , door gemakkelijkheid en judgement , for facility and or - door sierlijkheid van voordragt. nament of elocution. The preposition te has a wide signification and use ; and is equivalent to some other preposition and an ar- ticle ; as , te paard riiden , for 1 '- ride on horse back .:/ > to ric riiden J op een paard rijde Te before nouns masculine and neuter , sometimes be- comes ten, and before nouns feminine, ter ; as, ten voordeele to the advantage ter plaatse at the place ter waarde to the value ten behoeve for the profit ten nadeele to the disadvantage ter gunste »» favor ten hemel to the heavens ter maaltijd to the feast te veld in the field te land by land RULE XLVII. Conjunctions. Conjunctions connect the same cases of nouns and pro- nouns , and the same moods and tenses of verbs ; as , Ik zag uwen vader en uwe moe- J mto your father and mother, der , en ook uwe zuster. and also your sister. Wij zagen en hoorden dien rede- We saw and heard that orator. naar. Compound tenses connected by a conjunction have the auxiliary repeated to the first verb in the sentence but omitted by ellipsis to the following ; as , Hij zal slechts schrijven en rekenen. He will only write and cypher. Wij hebben niet alleen gedanst We have not only dansed but also maar ook gezongen. sung. Ik had noch geteekend, noch ge- / had neither drawn, nor read r lezen , noch geschreven. nor written. DUTCH S Y N T A X. 155 However for the sake of energy , the auxiliary is some times repeated ; as , Alva werd in de Nederlanden Alva was not only feared in the niet ulleen gevreesd , hij werd Netherlands , but he teas hated ook gehaat , hij werd zelfa ge- also, he was even cursed. vloekt. When three or more nouns or verbs follow each other in a sentence , the ^conjunction is expressed before the last only ; as , Zij hebben aan het huis van uwen They have sung , dansed , and broeder , gezongen , gedanst , played at your brother's. en gespeeld. Hij die eenmaal hare waarde heeft He who has once learned to know \ leeren kennen , en gevoelen , and feel her worth , will not sell zal haar noch voor goud of eer- her for gold, or honors , nor ambten veil hebben", noch voor offer her up for marble statues. marmeren ^tandbeelden op- offeren. When the conjunction is negative , it is repeated before all the nouns and verbs following in the sentence ; as , Zij gaf mij noch boeken , noch She gave me neither books , nor pennen, noch papier, noch inkt. pens , nor paper , nor ink. The conjunction is also repeated before each noun or other word in a more elevated style , for the sake of energy ; as ; Hij heeft alles verloren, en bezit- He\haslost all, possessions, friends, tingen , en vrienden , en eer. and honor. Hij bezit geestdrift voor al wat He posseses enthusiasm for all groot , en schoon , en goed is. that is great , and beautiful , and good. RULE XLVIII. Conjunction and Indicative. Some Conjunctions will generally have an indicative mood after them ; as , als , alzoo , dewijl , naardien , nmdat 156 I) U T C H S Y N T A X. torn , vermits , waarom , want , weshalve , zoodat , zoodra . and such like ; as , Hij doet het oradat gij het gedaan Re does it because you have hebt. done it. Zij ontdekten het eiland toen het They discovered the island wh<>n licht werd. it teas light. Ik zal het nalaten , alzoo mijn J shall leave it, because my fa- vader zulks begeert. ther desires it. RULE XLIX. Conjunction and Subjunctive. There are also some conjunctions which convey a con- ditional or subjunctive meaning , and when futurity is implied, are generally followed by the subjunctive mood ; they are mits , opdat , ten einde , ten ware , ten zij ; as , Hij verlangtnaar meer boeken , op- He desires more books, to the end dat hij te beter aan zijne lees- that he may satisfy his incli- lust kunne voldoen. nation for reading. Gij zult nooit leeren, ten ware gij You will never learn unless you oplettender wordet. are more attentive. Ik zal mij verdedigen , mits hij / shall defend mysslf provided aiij gehoor wille geven. he listen to me. RULE L. Some Conjunctions require other Conjunctions. Certain conjunctions require other certain conjunctions them ; as , niet alleen requires maar ook even — als niet slechts — maar ook zoo — dan even zoo — als zoo wel — als hoe — hoe Ik geloof niet alleen uwe veront- / not only believe your justifi- schuldiging , maar ook zal ik cation , but 1 will also make die bij uwen vader doen gelden. it available with your father. 1) I T C H sn 1 A \ Hij heelt die beginselen zoo wcl nageloefd als aangenomen. Ora niet slecbts 1c volharden waar pligt gebiedt; maar ook om to kunnen buigen waar eer en trouw het gedoogen. Zoo hij het doet,danzaI hij ge- etraft worden. Zoowel bij als zijn medepligtige waren schuldig verklaard. Gij schrijft hoe langer hoe beter. Ho has fallowed those prineipli i as tcell as accepted I hem. Not only to persevere where duty calls-, but also to be submissive where honor and fidelity permit '• If ho do it, he shall be punished. Uoth he and his accomplice were pronounced guilty. You write better and better. RULE LI. Power of Conjunctions in Sentences. The Conjunctions dock , en , maar, may be termed simple conjunctions , as serving to connect the parts of a phrase , and do not influence or alter the arrangement of the words in the sentence; as, Mijn vader sprak hem aan , doch My father spoke to him , but he hij antwoordde niet. did not answer. Ik onderhield hem daarover en hij J drew his attention to this sub - beloofde niet meer zoo nalatig ject and he promised not to te zijn. be more so negligent. The following Conjunctions may be termed adverbial conjunctions , daarom , daarentegen , daarenboven , derhalve , echter , cvemvel , hierom , dan , maar ook , niet alleen , niet slechts, nogtans , niettemiri', and in simple tenses of verbs are immediately followed by the verb, and in compound tenses they are immediately followed by the auxiliary , whilst the past participle or infinitive or the separable preposition is placed at the conclusion of the phrase: as, Daarentegen is hij een man van On the contrary he is a man of eer. honor. Derhalve zal hij met het schip ver- Therefore he will depart with trekken. the ship. Daarom neemt hij deze goederen Therefore he accepts these goods. Niettemin heb ik dcze taak op mij Notxoithslanding I hate taker genomen. this task upon me. 15S DUTCH SYNTAX. The conjunctions dewfjl , daar , hoe , hoewel , hoedanig , hoezeer , indien , ate , naardien , naardien zulks , o/* , omdaJ , na dat , vermits , waar , and the compounds of waar , wan- neer , toen , Jo£ da£ , zoo , schoon , ofschoon , may be called relative conjunctions, and , in sentences in which they are used , will have the verb placed at the end ; as , Indien zijn vader zich daartoe ver- bonden had. Dewijl gij uwen tijd met ijdelhe- den doorbrengt. If his father had engaged in it. As you spend your time in fri- volities. RULE LII. Interjections. Interjections must be placed in that part of the sentence in which they produce the most effect; as, Eensklaps hoorde men : holla ! houdt op. Hoe ongelukkig ben ik , helaas ! Fij ! de booswicht. Ach ! hoe langdurig heeft dat huis- gezin geaukkeld. Ei! knaapje, zijt gij daar? menschlievende Trijheids-leer ! On a sudden was heard ; holla ! stop. How unfortunate am I , alass ! Fye ! the wretch. Ah ! what a length of time has that family endured calamity. Eh I my lad, are you there? Oh humane doctrine of liberty ! PROSODY. Prosody is that division of grammar which treats on the pronunciation of words , comprising the accent and quantity of syllables in them , and the Emphasis , Pause , and Tone of words in sentences ; and it treats also on the Laws of Versification. The Accent and Quantity of syllables have already been cursorily treated upon in the former part of this work , under Orthography , and do not seem to require further elucidation here. Emphasis , Pause , and Tone, cannot be treated upon in books with advantage to the student , and indeed these are matters belonging more particularly to the art of Rhetoric , a higher branch of Grammar , and are of importance to those only , who aspire to the acquisition of eloquence in public speaking; and must be taught orally. As to Versification, though belonging , in some measure, to the grammatical art , it cannot be expected to find a place here. To treat on the various Feet or Measures into which verse is divided , or on the different kinds of verse , would be of use and interest to none but those of poetical taste and genius. We will therefore dismis these matters and supply the place with a few Extracts from one or other of the Dutch Prose-Writers of the last and present century. The Dutch language will be found to be sonorous and emphatic , and possessed of much vigor. It has retained more of its original character than any other of the Teutonic branches. The affinity which exists between this language and our own is calculated to raise our warmest sympathy and esteem. This affinity is exhibited in the following Old Dutch Proverb : ICO PROSODY, Wtnn ben hinn t£ in tien man/ 3«i be hinsljeia in bz ftm. TRANSLATION. When the wine is in the man , Is the wisdom in the can. Indeed no language claims a closer kindred with ours than this , as will be further seen on a perusal of the following specimens. The number of Dutch Writers of eminence , as also that of men of genius distinguished in the arts , is per- haps greater than that of any other country of Europe , in proportion to the number of inhabitants ; yet 1 » strange it is" » says M r . Bowring ," that there is a country almost within sight of the shores of our island , whose literature is Jess known than that of Persia or Hindostan , a country too distinguished for its civilization and its important con- tributions to the mass of human knowledge — It is in- deed most strange , that , while the Poets of Germany have found hundreds of admirers and thousands of critics, those of a land nearer in position — more allied by habit and by history with our thoughts and recollections — should have been passed by unnoticed — yet there are many among them , whose reputation is as firmly established , though not so widely diffused , as that of the most re- nowned among the sons of fame. Rut Vondel himself, ingenious , emphatic , and sublime , as he is , has never found an interpreter , scarcely a reader , in England/' The English Version adjoined to the Praxis is as literal as the genius and analogy of the two languages will admit ; indeed all translations , to be faithful, ought to be as literal as the genius and the structure of the language into which the translation is made, will allow, observing, however, that the laws of Syntax and harmony are not violated ; as it is by this means that the sense and style of the au- thor is conveyed into the language , into which the trans- lation is rendered , whilst a deviation from this particu- lar , or what is termed a free translation , is rather an imitation , than , strictly speaking , a translation. The following Praxis on Dutch Grammar can be em- ployed by the student as exercises in reading and for P K S O D Y. 161 translation ; to which end it is recommended that he make a translation from the Dutch into the English , without looking to the English Version on the opposite page ; having completed which , he can compare his trans- lation with that in the book, and correct where necessary; and then translate it back into Dutch in the same man- ner. The contents of the piece being well understood , the studentcan then derive advantage from a repeated rea- ding of it. II 165 OEFENINGEN Uitircksels nit Nieuwe Holiandsche Proza-Schrijvers. Met Fort Erfprins aan den H elder. Het Fort Erfprins is eerie van die schoone sterkten, welk zijn aanzijn aan Napoleon verschuldigd is. Bij den gelukkigen ommekeer van zaken, in het jaar 1813, ontving het den naam van Erfprins, eenen titel , welke ieder INederlander den dapperen Vorst te binnen brengt, die in de velden van Waterloo bloed en leven voor de vrijheid en onafkankelijklieid van Nederland toonde veil te liebben , en die thans on der den naam van Willem den Tweeden den scepter voert over liel vrije land, dat wij het onze noemen • een land, klein van omvang, doch sterk door eendragt , en dat , lioe dan ook door opstand, afval , en verraad verkleind, dank hebbe den Opperbestuurder der volkeren , tot heden zijne onaf- hankelijklieid heeft weten te handhaven , en bevrijd is gebleven voor den schok der omwentelingen en tegen- omwentelingen , die, sedert 1830, een groot deel van Europa, in vuur en vlam hebben gezet. PRAXIS on the ZRutch Grammar, Extracts from Modern Dutch Prose- Writers. The Fort (Erfprins) Crownprince at the Helder. The Fori [Erfprins) Crownprince is one of those beautiful fortresses , which is indebted to Napoleon for its existence. On the fortunate turn of affairs in the year J8J3 , it received the name of Erfprince , a title , which brings to tJie mind of every Netherlander , the heroic prince , who showed, in the field of Waterloo , t/ial he was ready to sacrifice his life Jor the liberty and independence of the Netherlands , and who now under the name of William the Second sways the scepter over that free country which we call ours ; a country small in circuit , but strong by union , and that, though diminished by rebellion, revolt, and treach- ery , thanks be to the Supreme Ruler of nations , has been able to maintain its independence ; and has re- mained free from the shock of the revolutions and coun- ter revolutions , which, since J830 , have set a grea portion of Europe in a flame. ir.i PRAXIS ON THE Ik ben geen vesting-bouwkundige , gij kunt dan ook van mij geenszins eene naaawkeurfge beschrijving van dit fort yerwachten. Alleen wil ik u mededeelen , dat deskundigen het eene schoone sterkte noemen , omringd van hooge aarden wallen en breede grachten , die het binnenkomen van een' vijand zeer moeijelijkzouden maken. Napoleon, wiens ijzeren wil alles deed doorzetten , wat hij voor de bereikinp zijner oogmerking dienstig of noodzakelijk oordeelde , begreep , dat de Helder door deszelfs Jigging al de noodige vereischten had , om een- maal aan den mond der Noordzee datgene te worden , wat Antwerpen aan de Schelde is. Hij begreep daaren- boven , dat het voor de veiligheid van zijn rijk een te gevaarlijk punt was , om langer zoo ongedekt te blijven als het toen was , want de landing der Engelschen was hem nog geenszins door het hoofd gegaan. Hij wilde dergelijke gebeurtenissen in het vervolg voorkomen, daar hij de innerlijke overt uiging bezat , dat die roodrokken geenszins tot het getal zijner beste vrienden behoorden. De Helder moest dus worden versterkt ; het moest eene vesting, en wel eene zeer belangrijke sterkte worden; en daar besluiten en uitvoeren niet zelden het werk was van hetzelfde oogenblik, zoo dagteekenen zich ook van dien stond af aan de verbazende veranderingen , welke deze plaats in de laatste dertig jaren heeft ondergaan. Na den val des Keizers is het Nederlandsche Gouver- nement den door hem ingeslagen weg blijven bewande- len , en heeft het de nog niet uitgevoerde plannen van Napoleon, ofschoon eenigzins gewijzigd, ten uitvoer laten brengen ; doch voorzeker zou de Helder nn reeds lang onder de aanzienhjkste steden der Nederlanden eene gewigtige plaats hebben bekleed, als de grootsche plannen van den vroegeren wereldbeheerscher waren ten uitvoer gebragt. A. R. Stoos. D l T C li G K A M M A R. / am no military Architecht , therefore you must not expect from me a minute description of this fort. I will merely inform you, that competent judges pro- nounce it a beautiful fortress , surrounded with lofty earthen ramparts , and broad ditches, which would ren- der the entrance of an enemy very difficult, Napoleon , whose iron will , prosecuted every thing that he deemed necessary or serviceable for the accom- plishment of Ids designs , conceived , that the Helder , from, its situation, possessed all the requisites of 'becom- ing , for the mouth of the North-sea , what Antwerp is for the Schelt. He conceived moreover , that it was a too dangerous spot for the safety of his empire , to remain longer exposed as it then did ; for the landing of the English [there) was not yet out of his head. He desired to avoid similar events in the future , as he was fully convinced that those red jacketed [lads) were not by any means to be ranked in tlie list of his best friends. The Helder must therefore be fortified ; it must become a fortified place and an important for- tress f and as it generally happened with the Emperor, that resolutions and executions were the work of one and the same instant , so , the astonishing changes } which this place has undergone in the last thirty years, are dated from that period. After the fall of the Emperor , the Netherlands Go- vernment prosecuted the plan commenced by him , and has executed, however with some modifications, the unfinished plans of Napoleon ; but it is certain, that the Helder would long eer this have occupied a place among the most important cities of the Netherlands , if the gigantic plans of the previous ruler of the world had been accomplished. 166 PRAXIS ON THE Opkomst, bloei, en verval der Letter ew. Op den maalstroom van gedurige orawentelingen en oorlogen volgt een staat van evenwigt en vrede. Over- vloed neemt de plaats in van behoefte , gerustheid die van gedurige vreeze. Geen wonder , zoo men zicli nu van zijnen overvloed bedienen wil , om den kring der genoegens van het leven uit te breiden; genoegens, die men nu in veiligheid genieten , en , zonder gevaar van stoornis ; smaken kan. De weelde moet alsdan geboren worden. Het noodlottig , onvermijdelijk tijdstip is daar. Gelukkig , zoo als dan ook de letteren tot een heilzaam tegengift ontluiken ; zoo , naarmate de weelde het lig- chaam in veerkracht en sterkte doet afnemen , deze de vermogens van den geest ontwikkelen ; zoo , naarmate de aanlokselen tot ondeugd vermeerderen , het verstand de hartstogten leert bestieren en in toorn houden ; zoo , wanneer de natuurdrift, die de helden vormde, zich al- lengs door de weelde belezen laat en in vuur verflaauwt , de letteren daarentegen hare stem verheffen, den niensch naar het gebod des pligts doen hooren , zijne deugd te- gen de verleiding der ondeugden wapenen, en , door het te bovenstreven aller hinderpalen ; werkelijk den naam van deugd doen verdienen. Rampzalig daarentegen het volk , dat , door een toevalligen zamenloop van omstan- digheden , eerder met de weelde , dan met de lelteren , bekend wierd; aan ; t welk bruisende hartstogten gretig het vergift deden inzwelgen , zonder dat het tegengift nog daar was. Vloek over de Europeers , die aan zoo vele volkeren der onderscheidene werelddeelen de nood- lottige voortbrengselen hunner weelde toedienden , eer zij hen door beschaving tot kennis, tot het regte gebruik hunner geestvermogens hadden opgeleid. D. J. van Lennef. D I T C H GRAM >1 A B. igt Rise, prosperity, and decline of Learning. To the whirlpool of continual revolutions and wars follows a state of equalization and peace. Superfluity occupies the place of want , quietude that of continual fear, JS/o wonder, if we desire to avail of our su- perfluity to extend the range of the comforts of life ; comforts , which are now enjoyed in security , and which we can taste without apprehension of disturbance. Luxury must tlien be bom. The fatal and inevitable period is there. Fortunate if then learning springs forth as a salutary antidote; so that in proportion as luxury deprives the body of its elasticity and force , the former may unfold the powers of the mind; so, that in proportion as the allurements of vice increase , the understanding may learn to guide the passions and check them (in their progress); so , that when the pas- sion of nature which formed heroes, allows itself to be gradually seduced by luxury, and loses its energy , learning on the other hand may raise its voice , tell to man tlie calls of duty , arm his virtue against the seduction of vice , and , by subduing all resistance , virtually merit t/ie name of virtue. IVretched on the other hand is that nation, which, by an accidental combination of circumstances , rather embraced luxury than learning ; besides which , foaming passions greedily swallowed tJie poison, whilst the antidote was out of reach. JL curse on the Europeans , who distributed to so many nations of different parts of the world the fatal productions of their luxury f before first leading them to knowledge and to a right use of their mental faculties. 1(>8 P R A X I 8 G N T H E De Aokoshoom. U zal ik het eerst bewonderen , — prachtige kokos- boom ! — die uwen ronden en gladden stam lijnregt in de hoogte verheft , en met #e lange bladeren de wol- ken geesselt ; eenige boom van den weldadigen Schepper uit het Paradijs aan de bewoners der lieete werelddee- len geschonken ! onwaardeerbare gift ! die alleen genoeg- zaam is tot de meeste noodwendigheden des levens ! die in den onvruchtbaarsten bodem groeit, en het dorre zand met de prachtige kroon beschaduwt, en uit den ziltigen oever der zee zelfs verkwikkelijk vocht zuigt. Het bittere zeewater spoelt onschadelijk om zijtien slan- ken stam , hij bloeit met te meerder luister , buigt zich over de donderpnde golven en lacht om hun geweld ; kjaterende slaan de zware noten tegen elkander, doch geen eenige valt daardoor ter aarde. J. Haafner Reize te poet door het eiland Ceilon. Hu.XG DE GHOOT. Huio de Groot stamde af van een der aanzienlijkste hollandsche geslachten , dat reeds sedert eeuwen de hoogste waardigheden in de stad Delft bekleed had. Zijn vader was Burgemeester dier stad, en tevens bezorger der hoogeschool te Leiden , tot welken laatsten post , ten dien tijde , geene dan de aanzienlijkste personen werden gekozen. Deze was een geleerd man en vlijtig beoefenaar der letterkunde , en tevens , door zijn aan- zien en middelen een bevorderaar van dezelve. Hier trof men dan alies te zamen : goed zaad , uitmuntenden grond, en de beste opkweekers. Hoe veel goeds kon men van de kinderen dezes mans niet verwachten ! Reeds in de vroegste jeugd van de Groot ontluikten DUTC H (i K A M M A R. iflfl The Cocoa-tree. 1 will first admire thee , — sumptuous cocoa-tree I — who raiseth thy round and smooth trunk perpendicularly on high, and bujfeteth the clouds with thy long leaves; the only tree of the beneficent Creator out of paradise presented to the inhabitants of the torrid zone ! inesti- mable gift / which is sufficient of itself for most of the necessaries of life ! which grows on the most barren soil, and shadows the parched sand with its sumptuous crown } and absorbs even refreshing moisture from the briny strand of the sea. The bitter sea-water washes harmlessly around its slender stem, it flourishes with increased lustre, bends over the roaring waves , and smiles at their fury ; the ponderous nuts dash against each other, but not one of them falls to the earth. J. Haafner , Pedestrian Tour through the island of Ceylon. Hugo de Ghoot , (Ghotius.) Hugo de Groot , better known in England by tlie name of Grotius descended from one of the most res- pectable families of Holland , which had for several centuries filled the highest offices in the city of Delft. His father was Mayor of that city , and also Pro- curator of the University of Leiden , to which office , at that time , none but the most respectable were cho- sen. He was a man of learning and a zealous cul- tivator of literature , and also , by his respectability and means , a promoter of it. Therefore every thing was found here concentrated: good seed, excellent soil, and the best cultivators. How much good was there not to be expected from the children of this man / Already , in the earliest years of Grotius , abilities 170 PKAXiS ON THE vermogens en talenten , die duidelijk voorspelden , welk eenen trap van grootlieid hij ten eenigen tijd kon beklim- men. Verre boven zijne jaren, waren zijti geheagen , zijne opinerkzaamlieid , vatbaarheid, en zijn oordeel. Deze onschatbare gaven werden gelnkkig aangeprikkeld door eene blakende leerzucht en onvernioeide werk- zaamheid. Op zijn zevende jaar reeds begon hij Latijn en Giieksch te leeren ; een jaar zich hierop toegelegd hebbende , schreef hij Latijnsche verzen , waarvan een waardig geaclit werd, om aan den Prins van Oranje vertoond te worden. Zijn ijver was zoo groot, dat hij zelfs een groot gedeelte van den nacht tot leeren be- sleedde , en, daar zijne ouders , nit zorg voor zijne ge- zondheid , hem daartoe licht weigerden , kocht hij van zijn zondagsgeld heimelijk kaarsen. Intusschen bepaalde hij zich alleen tot deze oefeningeu. Op zijn eifde jaar vertrok hij reeds naar de hoogeschool te Leijden, om daar het onderwijs der Hoogleeraren te genieten. C. R.OGGE. Prosodie. De Prosodie van eene taal is dat gedeelte van hare spraakkunst , waardoor de regels der uitspraak bepaald worden. Zal eene Prosodie dus volledig zijn ; dan moet men in dezelve niet alleen die regels aanlreffen, waarbij de langheid of kortheid der lettergrepen aangetoond wordt, maar ook die , welke , in het algemeen , tot het toon- kundige van eene spraak behooren : want ook het spre- ken, schoon van het eigenlijk gezegde zingen onder- scheiden , is een, van de kracht en beteekenis der woor- den afhangende , en door den smaak des sprekers ge- wijzigde zang, die wel minder aangehonden , vloeijend, en zamensmeltend is dan die des rangers ; maar daarom niet minder in toon , maal , en folding bestaat , dan de DUTCH GHA M M A K. 171 and talents developed themselves , which clearly prog- nosticated to what a high degree of celebrity he might at sometime arrive. His memory, observation, capacity, and judgment , were far beyond his years. These invalua- ble gifts were luckily encouraged by a passionate desire for learning and an indefatigable industry. In his seventh year he began to learn Latin and Greek , and having applied himself to them a year , he wrote Latin verses / one of which was considered worthy of being shown to the Prince of Orange. His zeal was so great, that he passed a great part of the night in study ; and, when his parents , from a regard for his /wait h , denied him a light for that purpose, he secretly bought candles with his sunday pocket-money. In the mean time he devoted himself exclusively to this study- In his eleventh year he went to the University of Leiden, for the purpose of enjoying the instruction of the Pro- fessors. Prosody. Tlie Prosody of a language is that part of its gram- mar , by which the rules of its pronunciation are de- termined. If a Prosody be therefore perfect ; tJien , we shall not only find there those rules , by which the length or shortness of syllables is shown , but also those, which, in general , belong to the harmony of a language : for speaking , also , though differing from singing , literally . so called , is a song dependent on the power and mean- ing of the words , and modified by the taste of the speaker , which is indeed less continued , flowing , and incorporated than that of a singer ; but tJierefore does not depend less on tone , measure, and guidance , than song. TVe can perceive this not only in the reheasal 172 ' P K A X 1 S N T H E zang zelve. Niet alleen in het opzeggen van verzen en net uitspreken eener redevoering , maar ook in het ge- wone spreken eener taal , in tie dagelijksche zamenle* ving , kunnen wij dit opmerken. Nimmer worden wij bedrogen in den toon , waardoor bijv. eene vraag , of een geeindigde volzin aangednid wordt. Het toestemmende of ontkennende wordt niet alleen door woorden, maar ook door den toon, te ken- nen gegeven. Het vervolg eener rede , waarin meer aangedrongen wordt door een a want/' is, in den klank, gelieel anders dan dat, waarin een, j) maar" uitzonde- ringen of nadere bepalingen opgeeft. Ik zwijg van de levendige uitdrukking der hartstogten , welke, door bet verheffen en nederdrukken der toonen , de leiding der stem , de snelheid of traaglieid der elkander in liet spre- ken opvolgende woorden , bijna alleen , geboren wordt Mr. J. KlNKER. De Batavieren- De Batavieren waren de oudste bewoners van een gedeelte van het tegenwoordige Kleefsland, Gelderland, en Holland , oorspronkelijk een Germaanscli volk , uit Hessen afkomstig ; zij kwamen , ten gevolge van een' twist met hunne naburen , op den raad hunner pries- ters , zich hier te lande nederzetten , ruim 100 jaren voor Jesus Christtjs. Zij werden weldra door de Ro- meinen beoorloogd , en , na een' hardnekkigen en dap- peren tegenstand , eindelijk wel overwonnen , maar toch als vrienden en bondgenooten des Romeinschen volks aangemerkt, hetwelk inderdaad goede diensten van de Batavieren genoot , maar dezen met ondank en onder- drukking beloonde. Deze behandeling eindelijk moede , spoorde Claudius Civilis, een aanzienlijk, onderne- mend, en dapper Batavier, zijne landslieden tot opstand aan } voerde langen tijd opcnbaren coring met de Ro- !) I 1 C H G H A M M A K. I7r> of verses or the delivery of an oration, but also in tlie familiar speaking of a language , arid in daily conversation. T^Ve are never deceived in the tone , whereby , for example, a question or the conclusion of a sentence is shown. The admitting or denying is not communica- ted by words merely, but by the tone. The continua- tion of a discourse , in which more is enforced by a )) because , " is , in sound , quite otherwise than that , in which a )) but " gives exceptions of closer limitations. I say nothing of the lively expressions of the passions, which almost exclusively arise out of the rising or fall ing of the tone , the conducting of the voice , and the velocity or slowness of the words in following each other. The Batayians. The Batavians were the oldest inhabitants of apart of the present Cleefland , Guelderland , and Holland , originally a German people , from Hesse ; they came and established themselves in this country, at the ad- vice of their Priests, in consequence of a quarrel with their neighbors , about JOO years before Christ. The Romans soon made war upon them, and, after an ob- stinate and brave resistance , finally conquered them , but were considered as friends and allies of the Ro- mans y who enjoyed indeed important services from the BatavianS , but rewarded them with ingratitude and oppression. Finally , becoming weary of this treatment, Claudius Civilis excited his countrymen to a revolt, carried on for some time an open war with the Romans, and Jorced them to an honorable peace ; but (the Ro- man Emperors) Trajan and Adrian brought them again 174 PRAXIS ON THE meinen ? en dvvong hen tot een' eervollen vrede ; doch Tea j anus en Hadrjamus bragten hen weder tot onder- werping. Allengs vermengden zij zich met de Vriezen; en op het einde der derde eenw maakten de Salische Franken zich meester van het land der Batavieren , na- derhand de Saksers ; en onder dezen versmolt hunne zelfs tandigheid , en de naam zelfs des lands , Batavie , werd in Neder-Saksen veranderd. Het Eiland der Batavieren. Dit Eiland zoo geheeten in de oude Aardrijkskimde , is de landstreek tusschen den Rijn en de Waal , be- vattende een gedeelte van Kleefsland, Gelderland, en Zuid-Holland , vroeger bewoond door de Cimberen , doch door dezen , uit hoofde der geweldige overstroo- raingen ? verlaten , en door de Batavieren in bezit ge- nomen en bebouwd. Gesehiktheid van Europa in het algemeen voor Zeevaart en Handel. Wanneer wij de gesteldheid van ons werelddeel in het algemeen beschouwen , en dezelve met die van an- dere -werelddeelen vergelij ken , dan moeten wij erkezi- nen, dat Europa door de natuur geenszins bevoorregt is. Oorspronkelijk gaf het weinig meer dan vleeseh en broody fijnere vruchten en kruiderijen behoorden hier niet te huis, en zullen hier ook thans slechts in zeer enkele landen welig tieren. Ook in kleedingstoffen kon men op geen rijkdom roemen ; purper , zijde , en zelfs katoen is van elders. Paarlen en edelges teen ten, zoo begeerlijk in der menschen oogen , vond men hier even- min , behalve den barnsteen in Praissen. Maar juist deze armoede aan eigene voortbrengselen maakte de Eu~ D U T C H G R A M M A R. 175 under subjection. In the course of time they associated themselves with the Prisons ; and , at the end of the third century , the Salic Franks, afterwards the Saxons , became masters of the country of the Batavians ; and under the latter , tJieir existence as a distinct nation ceased , and even tJie name of the country , Batavia , became changed into that of Lower Saxony, The Island of the Batavians. This Island } which is so called in, ^indent geo- graphy , is the country situated between the Rhine and the Waal, embracing a part of Cleefland , Guelder- land y and South Holland, in earlier times it was in- habited by the Cimbrens , but was abandoned by that people , in consequence of dreadful inundations , and afterwards was taken possession of by the Batavians , and was brought by them into cultivation. Adaptation of Europe in general for NaYi- gation and Trade. If we view the position of our part of the world in general , and compare it with that of the other parts , then we must confess , that Europe is by no means fa" vored by Nature. At first it yielded very little else than meat and bread; delicate fruits and spices were not indige- nous to it, and they will flourish here only in very few coun- tries- Also as to articles of dress we can boast of no rich- es ; purple , silk , and even cotton, belong to other parts. Pearls and precious stones , so attractive to the sight of man, are also not found here, except amber in Prussia, But just this poverty in its own productions , made the Europeans solicitous to visit other parts of the world , and it was a strong excitement to Navigation 176 PRAXIS ON THE ropeanen begeerig , om andere werelddeelen te bezoeken , en was een sterke prikkel voor Zeevaart en Handel. En hierin was de Schepper der TSatuur den bewoneren van dit werelddeel te gemoet gekomen. Bijna aan alle kan- ten omringd door zeeen en baaijen, allerwegen doorsne- den met bevaarbare rivieren en meeren , lokte deze ge- steldheid reeds vroeg de menschen uit, om zich op bet onzeker element te wagen. Wat voor de zuidelijke Eu- ropeanen de Middelandsche zee geweest was , werd voor de noordelijke de Oost- en Noordzee: eene oefenscbool namelijk voor Koophandel en Zeevaart , niet louter be- spiegelend, maar met dadelijke proeven verbonden. Geschlktheid van ons Racier land in het bijzonder voor Zeevaart en Handel. En wat alzoo waar is omtrent Europa in het alge- meen, geldt niet minder ten opzigte van ons Vaderland in het bijzonder. In vroegere dagen vooral, toen onze velden nog minder door dijken en zeeweringen beschut waren tegen de woede der zee , kon de akkerbouw onmogelijk een voornaam middel van bestaan opleveren. Ook was de grond daartoe velerwegen te moerassig. Met de veeteelt ging het beter, wegens de menigte on- zer vette beemden. Maar vooral moest ons laag , wa- terachtig en van rivieren , meren , en poelen doorsneden land uitlokken tot Visscherij , Scheepvaart , en Handel. Een lange , smalle knstzoom aan twee zijden bood daar- toe de schoonste gelegenheid aanj en geplaatst in het middelpunt van Enropa, werden wij ; als door onze ligging, tevens het middelpunt der handeldrijvende na- tien van ons werelddeel ; hebbende ten westen een volk van mededingende kooplieden in de Engelschen, terwijl drie groote rivieren , die hier hare uit watering hebben , ons met de binnenlanden vereenigen. Aldus op de grenzen van het vaste land en den oceaan geplaatst _, 1> I T C H (i B A M M AH. 17T and 2 rude. And in this particular the Creator of Nature came to the assistance of the inhabitants of it. Surrounded almost on all sides by seas and bays , intersected in all directions with navigable rivers and lake:;, the people were soon invited out , to venture on the unstable element. JVhat the Mediterranean was to tfie Sout/iern Europeans , the East and the North sea were to the Northern ; a nursery , namely , for Com- merce and Navigation, not merely theoretical , but combined with actual operations. Adaptation of our Mother-Country in partic- ular for Navigation and Commerce. And what is true with respect to Europe in general, is not less applicable to our MotJier-Country in parti- cular. In former days especially , when our fields were still less protected from the raging of the sea , by dykes and sea -mounds , agriculture could then by no means have yielded a principal source of subsistence. The land was also in many respects too marshy for that purpose. In the breeding of cattle it went better, in consequence of our numerous luxuriant pastures. But our low and watery country intersected with rivers , lakes , and pools, invited the natives to fishery , navi- gation, and trade. A low small sea- border on two sides presented the finest opportunities thereto ; and situated in the centre of Europe , we became, as it were, by our position, at the same time, the central point of the commercial nations of our quatter of the world; having on the west the English, commercial competitors, whilst three great rivers , which here empty themselves into the sea, connect us with the inland countries. Thus situated on the boundaries of the continent and t/u 12 178 PRAXIS ON THE kon het niet missen , of wij moesten , bij de toeneraing van zeevaart , de markt- en stapelplaats verkrijgen van verschillende landen en voortbrengselen. Aan zulk eene gnnstige ligging hebben ook de grootste koopsteden der oudheid en der middeieeuwen , Tyrus , Cartago, Alexandria , Venetie , en Genua 7 derzelver opkomst te danken gehad. * De geschiktheid der Nederlanders daarvoor. Uit het bovenstaande is duidelijk , dat natnur en lig- ging van het land onze vaderen wel tot liandeidrijvenden eu zeevarenden vor men moesten. En er is inderdaad scliaars een land , waar men in het algemeen zoo veel van scheepvaart en ban del heeft geleerd. Maar om zeevaart en handel tot dien trap van luis- ter en welvaart op te voeren , welken zij bij onze va- deren hebben bereikt , daartoe werd meer vereischt , dan eene uitnoodiging der natuur en de geschiktheid onzer ligging. Daartoe was zulk eene geaardheid noodig , als de Nederlander bezit , zulk een welberaden overleg , zulk eene zucht tot werkzaamheid , zulk een bedaarde moed in de grootste gevaren , kortom , zulk eene zelf- standigheid, als onze vaderen hebben aan den dag ge- legd , en die , Gode zij dank ! ook bij het nageslacht nog niet verdwenen is, De handel vereischt een be- daarden , welwikkenden geest , een ijverig , werkzaam leven, bedachtzaamheid en volharding in voor- en te- genspoed ; en wie erkent hier niet onzen koopman van den ouden, degelijken stempel? De zeevaart, aan dui- zend wisselvalligheden , aan duizend kwellingen van hitte en koude blootgesteld , bij gedurigen strijd tegen wind en golven , wil een vast ligchaamsgestel , aan de snelste veranderingen van lucht en weder gewoon; wil 1) U T C il G R A 11MA R. 173 ocean , it could not fail , but that we must secure the market and staple-place of different CQUtHrhes and products. To a such like favorable position the great- er commercial towns of antiquity and of the middle ages , Tyre , Carthage , Alexandria , Venice , and Crenoa , owe their rise. Adaptation of the Netherlander for Trade and Navigation. From what has been said , it is evident that the na- ture and position of the country must indeed have for- med our ancestors for a commercial and navigating people. And there is indeed scarcely any country , where the people in general have advanced so far in navigation and trade. But to bring navigation and trade to that state of importance find prosperity which they attained under our ancestors , more was required than the invita- tion of nature , and the suitableness of our situation. To this end , such a natural disposition was wanting , as the Netherlander possesses } such a well conducted contrivance , such an industrious disposition , such a cool courage in the greatest dangers , in short, such a self-sufficiency , as our ancestors have displayed, and which , thank God ! has not disappeared in their offspring. Commerce requires a deliberate and consid- erate mind , a zealous , industrious life , thought-ful- ness and perseverance in fortune and adversity ; and who does not discover here our merchant of the old genuine stamp? Navigation , exposed to a thousand changes , to a thousand inconveniences of heat and cold , in incessant contests against wind and waves , requires a firm constitution , accustomed to the speediest changes of air and weather ; requires the same enter- 180 P R A XISrON THE dezelfde ondememingszucht en standvastigen moed ; en wie denfct hier niet aan onzen ouden schipper en ma- troos ? En indien wij aldus zoowel de geaardheid van den Nederlander als de natuiir en ligging van zijn land, in aanmerking nenien , dan worden die werken en plannen 6ns begrijpelijk, welke aan vele vreemde natien ais wondereri moeten toeschijnen. J, Blaupot Ten Gate. De gewigtige gevolgen van Schoolonderwijs, Is Jiet niet eerie onbetwistbare waarheid , dat geene staatsinrigtingen , geene wetten , geene maatregelen van welke n aard , geene zekei heidsmiddelen , lioe doelmatig ook, de gewetensvrijiieid zoo krachtig onderstennen en verzekeren , als het onderwijs znlks doet ? Imtners , gelijk de ziel van elk kind in bet bijzonder zicli door- gaans gemakkelijk iaat kneden naar de denkbeelden , die het eerst in dezelve geprent worden , en de plooi aan- neemt, die de school aan dezelfde geef t ; gelijk de meeste gemoederen de rigting behonden , welk zij aldaar ver~ kregen ; gelijk allerbijzonderst bet geval is ten aanzien der talrijkste volksklasse , die , in meer of min kommer- lijke levenszorgen verloren , bijna geene zielsontwikkeling bekomt, dan door bet schoolonderwijs; zoo ook wordt die bijzondere plooi, die bijzondere rigting, door gedu- rige oefening en mededeeling , tot eene algemeene, eene nationale plooi , tot een volkskarakter verheven ; en de lagere school stemt de algemeene denk- en handelwijze, althans van de lagere standen. Wat men in die school onderwijst , dat blijft de onverteerbare stoffe, die een- maal slechts eene vonk zal behoeven , om de ganscbe volksmenigte te doen ontvlammen. Wordt in de school onzen kinderen achting voor knnde en wetenschap, eerbied voor den koning , liefde tot het vaderland,, ont- D I T C ii U K A M M A R. 181 prise, spirit, and steadfast courage; and who dees not think here oj our old captain and sailor? And if we thus take into consideration as well the character of the Netherlander as lite nature and situation of his coun- try , then are those achievements and plans comprehen- sive to us , which must appear astonishing to many fo- reign nations. The important consequences of School-Instr uc tion . Is it not an indisputable truth , that no political re- gulations , no laws 9 no measures of whatsoever nature, no measures of security however applicable , can main- tain and ensure liberty of conscience so effectually as instruction? Of course , as the mind of every child in particular is easily moulded uccording to the ideas which are first impressed upon it , and takes the fold which the school gives it ; so most tempers preserve the direction which they acquire there ; as this is most particularly tlie case with respect to that numerous class of people i which , lost more or less in the trouble- some cares of life , acquires scarcely any expansion of the mind , beyond that imparted by school instruc- tion; so likewise is that particular fold f that particu- lar inclination , by a constant practice and communica- tion , raised to a national and general fold, to a national character ; and the lower school modifies at present the notions and conduct of the lower class. That which is taught in those schools remains the imperishable material , which at one time will only require a spark to excite the whole populace. If a love oj ( knowledge and science , respect for the king , patriotism , veneration for reli" gion and virtue, and estimation of liberty of conscience, be imprinted upon our children at school, our country 189 PRAXIS, OK THE zag voor godsdienst en deugd, hoogscbatfiug voor ge- wetensvrijheid ingeboezemd, ons land zal in veiliglieid verkeeren ; want het zal deugdzanie, vaderlaudslievende en gasivrijkeid waarderende burgers zien opgroeijen , die te alien tijde gereed zullen zijn ora de grondzuilen van den siaat met himnen arm te scbragen 7 en des noods met him bloed te verdedigen ; ten einde de rijke erfenis der vaderen ongesclionden op het nageslacht over te brengen. Mogen daarentegen onze lagere scho- len dienstbaar gemaakt worden aan de verspreiding van tegenoverstaande denkbeelden , mogen alien , die er zich bevoegd toe achten , lagere scholen openen ; dan kunnen weelnieten onzen kinderen lust tot onwetendheid iii- boezemen , deugnieten lien behagen doen scheppen in de ondeugd , ongeloovigen kunnen dan ongeloof, bijge- loovigen bijgeloof } d weepers dweeperij , geestdrijvers en valsche ijveraars godsdiensthaat en vervolgzucht , — twislzoekers en rusfcverstoorders oproer en tweespalt leeren en vers pre i den ; allerlei soort van menschen, hoe ongescliikt : ja, hoe gevaarlijk ook , kunnen dan, mid- den in ons gezegend vaderland , scholen oprigten , zich meester maken van onze kinderen , de jeugdige liar ten met vreemde , onvaderlandsche denkbeelden vervullen , de zeden bederveii , het verstand benevelen , en langza- merhand een nienw geslacht in de maatschappij doen optreden, hetwelk alzoo gevormd en geleid door vijan- den van ons volksgeluk, zich niet ontzien zal aan de liartader van den staat te knagen , en eindelijk de oude en echte vrijheid op te offeren aan eene vergulde sla- vernij. P. de Raadt. Invloed van eigenbelang op de juistheid onzer waarnemingen. Er is iets , waardoor het eigenbelang op de juist- heid onzer waarnemingen eenen verslorenden invloed D U T C H (i U A M M A R. 183 tW// re.9£ secure ; for it will see virtuous , patriotic citizens , appreciators of hospitality , spring up , who will always be ready to support with their arms the pillars of the state , and in case of need to defend it with their blood , in order to transfer unpolluted the rich heritage of their fitliars to their offspring. If on, the contrary our lower schools are rendered subservient to the dissemination of opposite notions , if every one who imagines himself competent commence a school \ then the ignorant may imprint upon our children a taste for ignorance, ignorants may inspire them with a pleasure in vice , disbelievers can teach and disseminate disbelief the superstitious superstition , fanatics fanatism , bigots and false zealots hale of religion and persecution , — cavillers and disturbers of public peace , rebellion and contests', all sorts of men however ill adapted , indeed however dangerous , would then be able to establish schools in our highly favored country , gain a mas- tery over our children, Jill their juvenile minds with strange and unpatriotic notions , corrupt the morals j blind the understanding , and by degrees form in so- ciety a new generation , which so formed and led by the enemies of the happiness cf the people , will not scruple to hnaw at the very heart of the state and finally saj, crifice tlie ancient and genuine liberty to a gilded sla- very. Influence of self-interest on the accuracy of our observation. There is something , by which self-interest preju- dicially influences our observations. It induces us , 184 PRAXIS ON THE lieeft. Het doet oris , namelijk , zoo ligt een denkbeeld opvalten van eene zaak, nog voor dat wij die hebben beschouwd; wel een denkbeeld, waarin wij behagen scheppen, dat onze gebeele ziel inneemt. Het zijn die kinderen onzer verbeelding , die kleur en gedaante geven aan de voorwerpen , welke deze geenszins hebben, ja ons voor de oogen tooveren , wat in bet gebeel nietbestaat. Ik beboef niij geenszins le beroepen op bet dom- sle bijgeioof , dat al da hersenschimmen , die men bet eenmaai in het boofd lieeft gepraat , buiten zich kan zien , nocli op d weepers , zoo boog en fijn van luclit , dat het gezond verstand er niet in kan ademen. Ik zou op ge- leerde kuuneu wijzen , om hnnne uitgebreide kennis , heldere inzigten en diep nadenken beroemd. Geschied- kundigen van grooten naam hebben eerst de loop der gebenrtenissen naar hunne denkbeelden ontworpen ; — daarna onderzoekende , vonden zij inderdaad ook alles 3nist zoodanig geschied , als het door hen was gedacht. Niet anders is het met vele en groote stelselmakers in allerlei wetenschappen gegaan , en beroernde oordeel- kundigen en uitleggers van gewijde en ongewijdcj schrif- ten. Dat , meenen zij , terwijl zij het boek openen , dat moet er staan, en dat moet het beteekenen. En zij zien toe , en het staat er voor hen ook zoo te lezen , en het lieeft ook dien zin. Zoo hebben wij, gewone raen- schen in het gewone leven , ook onze te voren opgevatte gedachtenis over gebenrtenissen, gevoelens, woorden hoe die gesproken ziillen. zijn en wat er mede is gemeend; en zoo wordt het dan ook bevonden te zijn, Wij zijn hierin niet geheel ongelijk aan den man , die meende een voor- werp voor zijnen kijker te hebben, en tegen iets aanzag, dat in den kijker zat. S. K. de Waard. Het hetrachten der Deugd. De Deugd is de staat der gezondheid van de ziel, en de ondeugd derzelver menievnldisre sebreken en ziekten. DUTCH GRAMMAR. 185 namely , to come to a conclusion on a matter before we have investigated it; truly, a conclusion in which we take delight , which gratifies our whole soul. It is that child of our imagination which gives color and shape to objects which they no way possess , nay , be- witchingly sets before our eyes what does not at all exist. I need not allude to the blindest superstition , that can externally behold all the chimeras , which have been talked into men's heads , nor yet of fanatics , of so high and ratified an air that sound understanding cannot breathe in it. I could instance learned men , celebrated for their extensive knowledge , clear views , and deep thought. Celebrated historians have framed events according to their notions; — who, subsequently investigating them , found that every thing had fallen out precisely as they had imagined. It has gone thus with many great projectors of new systems in every science, and with celebrated critics and expounders of the sacred and heathen writings. That, they conclude, whilst they are opening the book , that must be related there , and that it must imply that. And they look , and it is there before their eyes , and it has just that meaning. So we , like ordinary men in ordinary life, have also our previously conceived ideas of events, of opinions , of words how they must be pronounced and what they mean ; and so it is found to be. M^e are not altogether unlike the man , who imagined that he had an object before his telescope , and he was looking at something that sat in the telescope. The Practising: of Yirtue Virtue is the healthy state of the soul , and Vice is its numerous defects and diseases. 186 PRAXIS ON THE Er zijn verscheidene zij den waarop men de deagd betrachten kan ; verscheidene geneesmiddelen waarmede men de zieke ziel tracht te herstellen , en tot den staat van gezondheid weder te brengen , en deze middelen zijn de lessen , welke de deugden-leeraar zijne toehoor- ders voordraagt. Men kan naamlijk, die lessen, op een' norsclien en gebiedenden toon uitknorren — men kan dezelven op een' deftigen en statigen trant leeraaren, — en eindelijk, — men kan ze op eene vrolijke en lucbtige wijze voordragen. — De eerste wijze doet zeer weinig nut , en verwekt meer afkeer dan genegenheid tot der- zelver beoefening , en dit blijkt genoegzaam uit de groote zelfverveling , waarmede de aanhoorders van de, opzulk een' toon uitgebiilderde lessen , vervuld worden , waar- door dezelven geen den minsten ingang bij hen vinden , daar ze slechts verlangen dat de spreker een beslnit make, en zij gelegenheid hebben van zich uit hunnen staat van gevangenschap in vrijheid te stellen , om , met niet weinig ongenoegen tegen den grompot, hnnnen ou- den weg weder op te wandelen , hij moge dan kwaad of goed zijn. in dit geval wordt het geneesmiddel in een allerbitterst pehiculum van coloquint en aloe toege- diend; de lijder walgt er tegen, en kan hetzelve niet innemen. De tweede wijze , naamlijk om de Deugd door eenen ernstigen en statigen redeneertrant aan het verstand aan- genaam te maken, is verre verkiesselijk boven de eerst- genoemde ; doch vereischt ook in 't algemeen zulke toe- hoorders , die alien zoodanig gestemd zijn , dat zij , met gemak , voorwerpen van een eenigzins afgetrokken en min zinnelijken aard , zoodanig oogenblikkelijk kuunen bevatten , dat ze inderdaad door de waarheden , die in het onderwerp dier voordragten gelegen zijn, getroffen worden. Doch zoodanige toehoorders hebben minst noodig om door de lessen der Deugd in hunnen pligt gehouden te worden, zij zijn reeds het beschaafde ge- D U i CH GRAMMA R. 187 Titer e are many ways in which one can practise virtue ; many remedies with which one endeavours to cure the disordered mind , and to bring it back again, to a state of sanity , and these remedies are the les- sons which the moralizer offers to his auditors. One can , for example , grumble out those lessons in an an- gry and imperative tone. — ■ One can teach them in a grav3 and dignified manner , — and finally — one can bring them forward also in a merry and humorous manner. — The first method does little good , and creates more disgust than inclination for the practice of it , and this is sufficiently evident from the great ennui with which the auditors of such like blusteringly delivered lessons are affected,' whereby the lessons do not make the least impression upon them , as they are only longing that the speaker may come to a conclu- sion j and that they may have an opportunity to be set free from their state of imprisonment , and thus not best pleased with this grumbler , be enabled to follow their old course , which may be good or ill. In this case the remedy is administered in a most bitter veiii- culum of coloquinlida and aloes ; the patient loathes it , and cannot take it off. The second method, which is, to present Virtue to the understanding in an earnest and dignified manner of reasoning , is a far preferable manner to the first mentioned; but it requires generally such auditors, as are so adapted , that they can in an instant easily Catch objects of a somewhat abstract and less signifi- cant nature , and that they are really struck with the truths which lie in the subject of those propositions. But such auditors have least need of being reminded of their obligations by lessons of virtue ; these are al- ready the enlightened part of society , and that which is proposed to them is tlierefore more a catling to mind , 188 PRAXIS ON THE deelte van liet menschdom , en het is dus meer eene herin- nering dan eene nieuwe leer, welke aan dezelven voor- gesteld wordt; hunne toevallige ongesteldheid is sleclits een haast voorbijgaande zielen Rhumatismus , die van z el ven uitsliji. In dit geval dient de Geneesiieer zijne zieken deszelfs middelen enkel in Ugno dulci , of in zoet hout, toe j inaar er blijft toch altijd een apothecars geurtjen aan , zoo dat alleen bedaarde lieden lietzelve kunnen gebrui- ken , omdat ze weten dat het voor hun welzijn dient ; maar ze zijn toch altijd blijd als 't binnen is, en zullen er , buiten noodzakeiijkheid ; niet naar verlangen. De derde , naamiijk de luchtige en vrolijke wijze om de beoefening der deugd onder de menschen algemeen te maken , is ineer nieuw en meer zeldzaam dan de twee opgenoemde wijzen ; doch zoo ze meer algemeen konde worden , zoude ze welligt van eenig nut voor de maatschappij kunnen wezen; waarvan men de volgende reden zou kunnen geven. De mensch schijnt ait zijn' aard tot vrolijke gewaar- wordingen genegen te zijn , en de Geneesheer dient in alles het gestel te besluderen , en de werkingen der na- tuur voorziglig te volgen ; van daar zou men kunnen afleiden , dat wanneer de Deugd op eene vrolijke wijze geleerd wierde ; dezelve meer aanneeming bij het meer- der gedeelte van het menschdom zoude aantreffen , en daardoor beter in het geheugen bewaard en opgevolgd worden. In dit laatste geval wordt de pil niet alleen verguld , maar zelfs in banketdeeg gewikkeld en zoo smakelijk gemaakt, dat zelfs kindereii en onberedeneerde mede- cijnhaters er trek in krijgen , en ze met gretigheid bin- nen slokken. Evenwel behoort men behoedzaatn te zijn in het voorschrijven van zoodanige pilleuj immers het zoete en sraakelijke kan de maag ligt hinder! ijk worden, en DUTCH liRA M M A B 189 than a new doctrine , their casual indisposition is merely a temporary rhumatism of the soul, which cures of itself. In this case the physician administers to his patient remedies merely of ligno dulci , or liquorice root ; how- ever an apothecary* s scent always remains to be ad- ded , so that none hut sedate people can use it, as they know that it is for their advantage ; but they are also glad when it is down , and will not long for it except in cases of necessity. The third method , namely, the humorous and merry method of making the practice of Kirtue amongst men universal , is newer and more rare than the two fore- mentioned methods ; but if it could be more general , it might perhaps be of some advantage to society ; as to which , the following reasons may be adduced. Man appears by nature to be inclined to cheerful perceptions , and the physician ought to study the tem- perament in every particular, and cautiously to follow the operations of nature ; from this it may be inferred , that if virtue were taught in a witty manner, it would obtain a better reception with the greater part of so- ciety , and by this means would be fixed better in the memory and would be better followed. In this last case the pill is not only gilt , but is even rolled up in pastry and made so nice that even children and irrational detesters of physic take a liking to it , and swallow it greedily. However one ought to be cautions in prescribing such pills ; indeed tlie sweet and delicious portion can easily injure the stomach , and prevent the operation 190 PRAXIS ON THE de daar ingewikkeld medecijn in hare werking belelten; men behoort zich derhalven ? in zware ziele-ziekten , daaxvan te onthouden , aizoo de maag dan reeds te zwak is om het vehiculum, behoorlijk te kunnen vertee- ren \ in zoo een geval zoude ik voor de tweede genees-^ wijze , en voor de pillen in zoet hout gewikkeld , plei- ten ; — maar de banketpillen , altijd voor de nog sterke lijders , en in de beginselen der ziekte , voorschrijven , wanneer s er wel eenige ongesteldheid in 't hoofd plaats heeft, maar dat het hart nog gezond is, — In die staat zijn echter de meeste geneesselijke zielen- ziekten , en daarom zouden die zoete lekkere pillen ook wel van het grootste en algemeenste gebruik zijn ; laat ons derhalven met deze opmerking onze tweede afdee- ling besluiten , en tot de derde en laatste overgaan , waarin wij zoodanig een aangenaam recept voor uw aller ooren zulleu trachten te bereiden. Onder al de ondeugden , welke in de burgerlijke maatschappij als hoogst schadelijk mag gerekend worden , en zelfs als eene besmettende JEpidemie grasseren , is zekerlijk de ongevoeligheid voor de ongemakken en moeijelijkheden onzer mederaenschen , vergezeld van eene Aristocratische heerschzucht , valschheid, bedrog, dwin- gelandij , entijrannij die wel de lastigste is \ wijl men daar- door eens anders welvaren stuit , en zich zelven in de onaangename gesteldheid brengt, van, in tijdvannood, ook bij anderen , geene hnlp te vinden , en in zijne be- hoeften te worden afgewezen. De ondeugden , welke men onaandoenlijkheid } ongevoeligheid y ongastvrijheid , en onmedogenheid noercit, behooren daarom bij uitzon- dering door den zielen - doctor , is het mogelijk , het eerst uitgeroeid worden , wijl ze den mensch voor brave en vaderlandslievende daden in de maatschappij onbe- kwaam maken, uit een schadelijk egoismus ontstaan, de Vrijheid overschreiden , de Broederschap tegenwer- ken , en daarbij niet onder bedwang der Wet vallen , DUTCH G K A M M A K. 191 of tiie medicine in it ; one ought therefore to abstain from the use of it in severe diseases of the mind , as the stomach is already too weak to be able properly to digest the vehiculum ; in such a case I should prefer the second remedy , and vote for the pills made up in liquorice root : — but always prescribe the pastry pills for the severe sufferers , and in the early stages of diseases , when there is an affection in the head , but the heart still healthy. Most curable diseases of the mind are in this state , and therefore these sweet delicious pills might be of very great and general use; let us tlierefore conclude our second division with this observation , and pass on to the third , in which we shall endeavour to prepare such a prescription as shall sound agreeable to all your ears. The most troublesome of all the Vices , which are considered tJie most destructive in civil society , and which even rage like an Epidemic , is , certainly , an insensibility to the inconve ninences and difficulties of our fellow- creatures , accompanied by an aritocratic dominancy, falsehood, deceit , oppression , and tyranny; as one thereby checks the welfare of some , and brings oneself into the unpleasant condition of not finding help also from others , in cases of need , and of being turned away when in want. The vices which are ter- med insensibility , unfeelingness , inhospitality , and in- compassion , ought therefore particularly to be first ex- terpated by the physician of the mind , if it be possi- ble , as they make man unfit for honorable and pa- triotic actions in society , they originate in a hurtful egotism , violate liberty , destroy equality , oppose brotherhood, and, with all, do not fall under the ope- ration of the laws , and are of that nature , that no legal authority can avail against them , as belonging 192 PRAXIS ON THE en van dien aard zijn, dat geen wettig gezag het tegen- deel derzelven bevelen kan , als behoorende onder de officio, imperfectae obligationis , of pligten van eerie on- volkomene verpligting. In een woord, de ongevoeligheid voor de klagten onzer natnurgenooten , besluit in zich de zaden van dwingelandij , despotismus, en de allerhateiijkste en ver- achtelijkste eigenbaat ; alhoewel ze , in derzelver begin- sel , meer aan eene zwakheid van het hoofd , dan wel aan een bederf van bet hart te wijlen is ; daar die on- gevoeligheid , de lijders in den aanvang voorkomt , ais ware zij een gevolg van hun meer doorzicht, voorzich- tig beleid en wijze oeconomie, A. Fokke Symons. Kwaadsprekendhei d. Er is, onder het beschaafde gedeelte des menschdoms, geen gebrek algemeener , dan dat der kwaadsprekend- heidj het heerscht in alle standen en kringen der za- menleving; het is van geene bijeenkomsten uitgesloten , en maakt niet zelden de levendigheid derzelve uit ; ja ! hoe zeer alle menschen zich vereenigen, om de kwaad- sprekendheid als eene hatelijke ondeugd te veroordeelen, er zal echter bezwaarlijk iemand gevonden worden, die zich aan dezelve niet heeft schnldig gemaakt , en niet gednrig , in meerdere of mindere mate , voortgaat zich met dit euvel te besmetten. De uitgestrektheid dezer ondeugd vertoont zich nog duidelijker , als wij in aan- merking nemen , dat zij zoo wel lijdelijk , als dadeiijk ge- pleegd kan worden ; dat men ook zwijgende kwaad kan spreken , en dat hij , die kwaad van een ander met ge- noegen aanhoort, terstond de medepligtige wordt van hem , die het verbreidt , vermits er welhaast geene kwaadsprekers meer zijn zouden, indien er geene men- schen waren, die het kwade liever hoorden, dan het DUTCH G 1U M M A K. 195 to the officia imperfectae obligations , or duties of an imperfect obligation. In a word, a regardlessness to the complaints of our fellow creatures , embraces in it the seeds of ty- r limy , despotism , and the most hateful and most de- testable selfishness ; though , in its principle , it is to be ascribed more to a weakness of intellect than to a corruption of the heart ; as that regardlessness strikes the patients at first , as if it was a consequence of their greater penetration , prudent conduct , and wise eco- nomy. Slander. 2 here is not, in the higlier class of society , a more common defect, than that of slander ; it prevails in every stage and circle of social intercourse ; it is pre- sent in every meeting , and often constitutes its viva- city ; nay ! though men generally agree in pronouncing slander as a destestable pice , it is still difficult to find any one who has not rendered himself culpable of it , and incessantly continued in some degree to corrupt himself with this evil. The extent of this vice shows itself still more evidently , when we consider that it can be practised as well passively as operatively ; that one caii slander tacitly, and that he who hears evil of another with satisfaction , becomes instantly the accom- plice of him who disseminates it ; for there would scarcely exist any more slanderers , if there were no men who prefer Jiearing evil to good; the receiver, seller , or exchanger of stolen goods is justly punislied as an abettor of the thief 13 194 PRAXIS ON THE goede : de heeler, verkooper, of verrailer van gestolen goederen wordt met regt als medestander van den dief gestraft. Wij zijn er echter ver van a£, de verb as te ring onzer menschelijke natnur zoo ver uittestrekken , dat zij eene eigenlijk gezegde vijandschap, van alien jegens alien, zou medebrengen : het is alleen verborgen hoogmoed en ijdelheid, dock die helaas ! dezelfde uitwerkselen hebben , als of het wezenlijke vijandschap ware, die ze voortbragt. Als wij van anderen kwaad zeggen of hoo- ren , smaakt onze eigenliefde het zoet van een kleinen trinmf, en heimelijk verheffen wij ons boven hem 9 wiens gebreken of misslagen wij verbreiden , of door auderen hooren ophalen, Daarenboven , die bijzondere gebreken , die wij van onzen medeniensch hooren ver- melden , oi zelve in hem berispen , schijnen wij even daardoor te verfoeijen , en althans zelve er van vrij te zijn , waardoor, naar onzen waan , het denkbeeld on- zer zedelijke waardij in het oog van anderen moet rij- zen. Het is uit ditzelfde beginsel van hoogmoed, dat wij Hefst het kwaad hooren van menschen , die door hunne deugd , verdiensten of aanzien beroemd zijn , omdat wij hen daardoor, als 't ware, uit den kring hunner grootheid , nader brengen aan onze eigene nietig- heid, en zelfs , in zekeren zin , beter schijnen dan zij. Doch wat spreek ik van hoogmoed en eigenliefde ? veel geringer drijfveeren dan deze zijn genoegzaam , ora onze zucht tot kwaadsprekendheid uittelokken, de enkele be- geerte , om in de zamenleving mede te spreken , om aan den een* of ander* van het gezelschap te behagen , ja zelfs ! om het gesprek niet te doen verflaauwen , maakt van den mensch een verbreider van het kwaad gerucht zijns naasten ! J. H. van der Palm. ]) I I C 11 Ci H A M M A K. jFVzr 6e t£ however from us , to extend the degenerate* ness of our human nature so far , that it compre- hends a literal enmity of all towards all others : it is merely a concealed -pride and vanity , but which alas ! has the same effects , as if it was in reality enmity which produced it* If we speak ill or hear ill of others , our self-love tasts the sweet of a little triumph , and we secretly raise ourselves above him, whose defects or faults we disseminate , or hear rela~ ted by others. Moreover , by seeming to detest those particular defects, which we hear related of our fel- low creature , or which we ourselves contemn in him , we seem at the same time to be free from them , by which means , according to our opinion, the idea of our own moral worth must be advanced in the eyes of others. It is from this principle of ostentation that we prefer hearing evil of those who are known for their virtue , services, or respectability , because , we thereby bring tJiem, as it were, from the circle of their elevation nearer to our own insignificance , and even in some re- spects seem to be better than they are. But what am I saying of pride and self-love ? far more trivial im- pulses than these are sufficient to raise our inclination to slander ; the abstract desire of saying something in company , in order to please one or another of the party , nay indeed ! in order to keep up the conversa- tion , makes a man a disseminator of the evil report of his neighbor. iw BIJV OEGSEL I Koninklijke, Adelijke, en Burgerlijke titels? met derzelver verkortingen , sop afe ze gehruikt worden in staatszaken, briefwisseling en JV*ieuwsb laden . NBL ( ) Titeh tusschen haakjes worden weggelaten bij de Engelschen. 1. beteekent de aanspraak, 2. . de titel of benaming in den zamenhang* 3. . het onderschrift. £, , bet opschrift , de naam der plaais of de» persoons in bianco. Aan WlLLEM II, Koning der JVederlanden. 1. Sire. 2. Uwe Majesteit; en in den derden per soon , Hoogst- dezelve , of Zijne Majesteit. Z. M. 3. Van Uwe Majesteit de gekoorzaamste dienaar en getrouwe onderdaan. 4. Aan Zijne Majesieit, den Koning der Nederlanden* Aan den Kroonprins der JVederlanden. 1. Doorluchtige Prins, of Vorst. 2. Uwe Koninklijke Hoogbeid ; en in den derden per- soon, Hoogstdezelve, of Zyne Koninklijke Hoog- heid, Z. K. H. 197 APPENDIX 1 Titles of Royalty, Nobility, and Civil Rank, with their abbreviations , as used in di- plomatic documents, correspondence, and Newspapers. NB. ( ) The Titles in parentheses are not used by the English. J, denotes the address , or commencement. 2. ■■ the title or denomination in the connection, § % -■■ — ■ . the subscription or conclusion. 4. ■ the superscription , tlie name of the place or person in blank. To William II , King of the Netherlands. J. Sire. 2. Your Majesty \ in the third person , His Majesty. 3. Your Majesty s most Obedient Servant and Faith- ful Subject. 4. To His Majesty , the King of the Netherlands. To the Oownprince of the Netherlands. J, Serene Prince. 2. Your Royal Highness ; and in the third person , His Royal Highness. 198 BIJVOEGSK L. 3. Van Uwe Koninklijke Hoogheid de gehoorzaamste en onderdanigste dienaar. 4, Aan Zijne Koninklijke Hoogheid den Prins van Oranje, Kroonprins der Nederlanden. Aan Prins Frederik , den Broeder des Konings. 1. Doorluchtige Prins* 2. Uwe Koninklijke Hoogheid ; en in den der den per- soon j Hoogstdezelve, of Zijrie Koninklijke Hoog- heid. Z. K. H. 3. Van Uwe Koninklijke Hoogheid de gehoorzaamste en onderdanigste dienaar. 4. Aan Zijne Koninklijke Hoogheid Prins Fuederik der Nederlanden* Aan de Koningin der Nederlanden. L Mevrouw. 2. Uwe Koninklijke Majesteit: en in den derden per- soon , Hoogstdezelve , of Hare Koninklijke Hoog- heid. H. K. H. 3. Van Uwe Koninklijke Majesteit de gehoorzaamste dienaar en getronwe onderdaan. 4. Aan Hare Majesteit , de Koningin der Nederlanden. Aan de Kroonprinses der Nederlanden. 1. Mevrouw. 2. Uwe Koninklijke Hoogheid; en in den derden per- soon } Hoogstdezelve , of Hare Koninklijke Hoog- heid. H. K, H. 3. Van uwe Koninklijke Hoogheid de gehoorzaamste en onderdanigste dienaar. 4. Aan Hare Koninklijke Hoogheid, de Prinses van Oranje 3 Kroonprinses der Nederlanden. JfB. In den derden pvrsoon van het meervoud, Hunne Koninklpe Hoogheden. HE. KR. Hff. APPENDIX. 199 3. Prom Your Royal Highnesses most Obedient and most Humble Servant. 4. To His Royal Highness , tlie Prince of Orange , Crownprince of the Netherlands. To Prince Frederick, Brother of the Kin^. J. Serene Prince. 2. Your Royal Highness ; and in the third person , His Royal Highness. 3. Your Royal Highnesses Obedient and Humble Ser- vant. 4. To His Royal Highness, Frederick, Prince of the Netherlands. To the Queen of the Netherlands. J. Madam. 2. Your (Royal) Majesty ; and in the third person , Her Majesty. 3. Your (Royal) Majesty's most Obedient Servant and Faithful Subject. 4. To Her Majesty, the Queen of the Netlierlands. To the Crownprincess of the Netherlands. J. Madam. 2. Your Royal Highness ; and in the third person , Her Royal Highness. 3. Your Royal Highnesses most Obedient and most Humble Servant. 4. To Her Royal Highness the Princess of Orange, Crownprincess of the Netherlands. JVB. In the plural , Their Boxjnl Highnesses, 200 B IJ T E G S E L. Aan Graven. 1. Hoog-Geboren. 2. 3. Uw Hoog-Geboren , U. H. G. ; in den derden persoon , Zijn Hoog-Geboren, Z. H. G. 4. Aan den Hoog-Geboren Graaf van — Aan Vrijheeren en Jonkheeren ; en Baronnen. 1. Hoog Wel-Geboren Vrijheer of Jonkheer ; Hoog Wei Geboren Heer Baron van - — 2. 3. Owe Hoog Wel-Geboren, U. H. W. G., enz. ; in den derden persoon, Zijn Hoog Wel-Gebo- ren , den Vrijheer of Jonkheer , J. H. of den Heer Baron van — 4. Aan den Hoog Wel-Geboren Vrijheer of Jonk- heer ; of den Heer Baron van — Aan Vrouwen van Jiang. 1. Wel-Edel Geborene Mevrouw, of Mevrouw. AAN ONGEHUWDEN. Wel-Edel Geborene Freule, of Mejufvrouw. % 3. Uwe Wel-Edel Geborene, U. W. E. G.; in den derden persoon , Hare Wel-Edel Geborene , H. W. E. G. 4. Aan de Wel-Edel Geborene Freule , of Mevrouw — AAN ONGEHUWDEN. Aan de Wel-Edel Geborene Mejufvrouw — Aan eenen Minister van Staat ; Secretaris van Staat; Staatsraad ; Commissaris Generaal; Directeur Generaal ; Inspecteur Gene- raal; Luitenant Generaal. 1. Hoog Edel Gestrenge Heer. 2. Uwe Excellence , U. E. of Uwe Hoog Edel Gestrenge , U. H. E. G.j en in den derden persoon, Zijne APPENDIX, so? To Counts. J. [Most Highborn), My Lord. 2. 3- Your Lordship ; in the third person , His Lord- ship , or the Count or Earl of — 4. To the [Highborn) Count or Earl of — To Barons. J. Sir- (Very High Born Baron or Knight), 2, 3. Your (High Bom) Honor ; in the third person , Baron — or Sir — Bt. 4, To (the Very High Born) Baron — or Sir — Knight. To Ladies of Rank. J. (Very Noble Born Madam) Madam* TO VWMARRIEV, (Very High Born Miss,) Miss, 2. 3. Your (High Born) Ladyship ; in the third per- son ; Her Ladyship. 4. To (the Very High Born) Lady — or Madam — TO V1XM4KR1ED. To (the Very High Born) Miss — To a Minister of State ; Secretary of State ; Coun- cellor of State ; Commissary General ; Inspec- tor General ; Lieutenant General. J. (Very Noble and Equitable) Sir. 2. Your Excellency , or (Noble and Equitable) Sir ', in the third person ; His Excellency. $02 B IJ V E G S E L. Excellence, Z. E. of Zijn tfoog Edel Gestrenge, Z. H. E. G. 3. Van Uwe Excellence de gelioorzame dienaar. 4. Aan Zijne Excellence, den Minister van, enz., den Directeur Generaal van , -— enz. enz. Aan de Staten Generaal. 1. Edel Mogende Heeren. 2. Uwe Edel Mogenden ; en in den derden persoon , Hunne Edel Mogenden, H. E. M. 3. Van Uwe Edel Mogenden de gehoorzaamste en onderdanigste dienaar. 4. Aan de Edelmogende Heeren, Staten Generaal. Aan de Staten eener Provincie. L. Groot Edel Aclitbare Heeren. 2. 3. Uw Groot Edel Achtbaren; en in den derden persoon, Hunne Groot Edel Aclitbare, H. G. E. A. 4. Aan de Groot Edel Aclitbare Heeren van de Staat van ~- Aan de Burgemeesters eener stad. 1. Edel Achlbare Heeren, 2. 3. Uw Edel Achtbaren, U. E. A.; en in den der- den persoon, Hunne Edel Achtbare , H. E. A. 4. Aan de Edel Achtbare Heeren Burgemeesters der stad — enz. Aan de hooge Justitie-Collegien. 1. Hoog Edele , Hoog Gestrenge ; de mindere Wei Edel Achtbare, 2. 3. Uw Edele, Hoog Gestrenge, U. E. H. G. ; de mindere, Uw Edel Achtbare, U. E. A.; en in den derden persoon , Zijn Edel Hoog Ge- strenge, Z. E. H. G. 4. Aan den Hoog Edelen , Hoog Gestrengen Heer i— APPENDIX. S03 3. Your Excellency's Obedient Servant. 4. To His Excellency , t/ie Minister of — etc. etc, To the States General. J. Noble and Mighty Lords. 2: Your Noble and Mighty Lordships ; in the third person , Their Noble and Mighty Lordships. 8' Your Noble and Mighty Lordships' most Obedient and most Mumble Servant. 4. To the Noble and Mighty Lords, the States General. To the States of a Province. J. Very Noble and Worshipful Gentlemen. 2. 3. Your (Noble) Worships ; in the third person , Their (Noble) Worships. 4. To the (Noble and) Worshipful Gentlemen of the Province of — To the Mayors (Corporation) of a city. J. (Honorable) Worshipful Gentlemen* 2. 3. Your (Honorable) Worships; in the third person, Their (Honorable) Worships. 4. To the (Noble and) Worshipful Gentlemen , Mayers of the city of — To the High Courts of Justice. J. Most Honorable (Most Just), to subordinates, Very (Honorable) Worshipful. 2. 3* Your Most Honorable ; or Worshipful; in the third person, Their Most Honorable; or Worsldpfuls. 4. To (the Most Noble and Most Just) Mr. — 304 BIJVOBGSE L. Aan de Generaal Majoors. 1. Hoog-Edel Gestrenge Heer. 2. 3. Uw Hoog-Edel Gestrenge, U. H. E. G, ; en in, den .derden per soon , Zyn Hoog-Edel Gestrenge, Z. H. E. G. 4. Aan den Hoog-Edel Gestrengen, den Generaal Majoor , enz. Aan Kapiteins en Luitenants , alsmede aan Leden van Geregtshoven, Secretarissen , Regtsgeleerden enz. I. Wel-Edel Gestrenge Heer. % 3. Uw Wel-Edel Gestrenge , U. W. E. G. ; in den derden persoon , Zyn Wel-Edel Gestrenge , Z. W. E. G. 4. Aan den Wel-Edel Gestrengen Heer, den Kapi- tein, enz. Aan Hoogleeraren in de Godgeleerdheid. 1. Hoog Eerwaarde , Hoog Geleerde Heer. % 3. Uw Hoog Eerwaarde, Hoog Geleerde, U. H.E.H. G.; in den derden persoon, Zijn Hoog Eerwaarde, Hoog Geleerde , Z. H. E. H. G. 4. Aan den Hoog Eerwaarden, Hoog Geleerden Heer, den Hoogleeraar, enz. Aan andere Hoogleeraren. 1. Wei-Hoog Geleerde Heer. 2. 3. Uw Wel-Hoog Geleerde , U. W.H. G.j en in den derden persoon, Zijn Wel-Hoog Geleerde P Z. W. H. G. 4e Aan den Wel-Hoog Geleerde Heer , den Hoog- leeraar, enz. APPENDIX. 90S To Major Generals. J. [Most Noble and Just) Sir. 2. 3. Your Most Noble) you ; in the third person , (His Most Noble) he, 4. To (the Most Noble and Just) Mr. — Major General — To Captains , and Lieutenants , as also to Members of Courts of Justice, Secretaries, Law- yers , etc. J. (Very Honorable and Just) Sir. 2. 3. You (Your Honor) ; in the third person , (His Honor) , he, 4. To (the Very Honorable and Just) Mr. — or Captain. — To Professors of Theology. J. (Most Worthy, Most Learned) Sir. 2. 3. You (Your Worthy and Learned Honor) Your Reverence ; in the third person , His Reverence. 4. To (the Most Worthy and Most Learned) Mr. — Professor of, etc. To other Professors. J. (Very Honorable and Most Learned) Sir. 2. 3« You (Your Very Learned Honor) ; in the third person , (the Very Learned Gentleman.) he. 4. To (the Very Learned) Mr. — Professor of — 20C BIJVOE.GSEL. Aan Predikanten. 1. Wel-Eerwaarde , Zeer Geleerde. 2. 3. Uw Wel-Eerwaarde Geleerde, U. W. E. G. ; in den derden persoon , Zijn Wel-Eerwaarde Ge- leerde , Z. W. E. G. 4. Aan den Wel-Eerwaarden Zeer Geleerden Heer — Aan Advokaten en hoogere Geregts-ambtenaren. I. Wel-Edele Gestrenge Zeer Geleerde Heer, Mr* — 2. 3. Uw Wel-Edel Gestrenge, U. W. E. G. ; in den derden persoon, Zijn Wel-Edel Gestrenge, Z. W. E. G. 4. Aan den Wel-Edel Gestrengen , Zeer Geleerden Heer , Mr* — Advokaat (of Regter). Aan Geneesheeren. I. Hoog-Edele Zeer Geleerde Heer. 2. 3. Uw Hoog-Edele Zeer Geleerde Heer, U. H. E. Z. G.; in den derden persoon, Zijn Hoog-Edele Zeer Geleerde , Z. H. E* Z. G. 4. Aan den Hoog-Edelen Zeer Geleerden Heer — Med. Doctor. Aan eenen Heer; als , eenen Particulier , Handelaar , of Kassier t enz. 1. Wel-Edele Heer. 2. 3. Uw Edele, UEd. ; in den derden persoon, Zijn Edele, Z. E. 4. Aan den Wel-Edelen Heer den Heer — of den Heere. Aan eenen Burger-man. 1. Mijn Heer. 2. 3. U; in den derden persoon, Hij. 4. Mijn Heer — 0/Baas — (Meester) timmennan, enss. A P P U N 1) I X. 207 To Clergymen. J. (Very) Reverend (and Very Learned) Sir. 2* 3. You f or Your (Learned) Reverence ; in the third person , the Reverend Gentleman , or the Re' verend — 4. To the ( Very) Reverend (and Very Learned) Mr. — To Barristers , Advocates , and Higher Justiciaries. J, (Very Just Learned) Sir. 2. 3. Sir f (Your Learned Honor); in the third per- son , Mr. — or he* 4. To (the Very Learned) Mr, — Advocate (or Judge.) To Physicians. J. (Very Learned) Sir, 2. 3. (Your Learned Honor) ; in the third person , Dr, — or he. 4. To (the Very Learned) Dr. — To a Gentleman : as , a Private Gentleman , Merchant, or Banker, etc. J. (Honored Sir or) Sir. 2. 3. You (or Your Honor) ; in the third person, Mr. or he. 4. To Mr. — (the Honorable Mr. — ) To a Trades-man or Citizen. J. Sir. 2. 3. You; in the third person , Mr, — or / — B and he. 4, Mr, — or — Carpenter 206 A P P E N . D I X. KB. Achterde familienaamwordt MB. The christened paternel na- somtijds geplaatst de vaders doop me, abridged, is sometimes placed naam ♦ verkort , otn eene ver- after the family name, in order warring der personen van dezelve to avoid the confounding of in- familie te vermijden ; als , Ka- dividuah of the same name and rel Willemst Jz (Johan- family ; as, Charles W i l- nisEoon). I ems, Jz. {the son of John Willems). UPPEJTDIX II. It has been observed page J7* That words derived from the Latin , Greek, or from modern European languages , as the German , French , English, etc, are not readily incorporated into the Dutch language, and that } in the creation of new names , the compounding of words is more generally availed of; however , a prevailing fashion has given rise to the introduction and sanctioning of some words from these languages , and which are not inaptly termed bastard words, such as actie , ambitie , glorie , chemie , astronomie , geo- graphie , etc. which are infinitely more happily expres- sed by the words aandeel , share or action ; eerzucht , ambition; roem, glory; sclieikunde , chemistry ; sterre- kunde, astronomy , aardrijkskunde , geography. In the pronunciation of such like words , the follo- wing sounds are heard: Clia , sound ka , as in Clialdeers , Chaldeans. Ch , sounded sh , as in chirugijn , surgeon. Cie , sounds cie , as in beneficie . benefice. Gie , sounds ge , as in coilegie ; a college , asirologle, astrology. G, sounds soft like ge , as in chirugijn, surgeon; genie , enginery ; Georgius , George : except g in agent , agent ; in which it retains its guttaral sound as in Dutch. A P l> £ N D I X. 209 Ph , sounds like f, as in philosoof, philosopher. Til. In this combination , the h is mute , as in thee , tea; apotheek, apothecary. Tie, sounds she, as in natie , nation; ambit ie , am- bition. APPENDIX HI. Rules of Punctuation. The Rules of Punctuation , in all European langua- ges , are for the most part the same : in some minor particulars , punctuation is not resolvable into fixed rules but rests on the nature of the sentence and the judgment and taste of the writer. The following are the universally accepted general rules : Of the Comma, Coma (,). The comma f coma (,) marks the shortest rest , and is used as follows : J. IVlien a sentence is the nominative to a verb; as y dat hij u niet geroepen heeft, is mijne schuld, that he has not called you , is my fault. %. Before and after an interceptional phrase ; as , boosdoeners , welke verhard zijn in allerlei soort van misdaden , schroomen geenszins de wrekende arm der ge~ regtigheid , evildoers f who are hardened in every sort of crime , are no-ways afraid of the avenging arm of justice. 3. Two or more nouns are separated by a comma j as } de moeder , vader , en het kind, zijn gestorven , the mother , father , and child , are dead; except when only two nouns are used and closely connected by a conjunction ; as , de jongen en het meisje zijn vertrok- ken , the boy and girl are gone; however } when the 13 210 APPENDIX. parts connected are long , a comma may be employed ; a de Raadpensionaris be Witt, the Coun- sellor of state de Witt. A V P E X 1) I X. 211 7. Members of sentences , Connected by comparatives , are separated by a comma ; as , bij burgertwisten wordt vaak tneer bloed vergoten , dan bij geregelde oor- logeri , in civil wars there is often more blood slied , than in regular wars ; except when the sentences are short; as, dat glaswerk is minder schoon dan dit, that glass-work is less beautiful than this. 8* Words placed in opposition to each other t or with some marked variety , require the comma between them; as, deze man is rijk , maar niet trotsch, this man is rich , but not proud, 9. When a preposition is intercepted from the word to which it belongs , it is separated by a comma ; as , hij was tevreden met , en verheugd over uw gedrag , he was satisfied with , and rejoiced at your conduct. JO. A relative placed at a distance from its ante- cedent 9 is separated by a comma ; as , er is geene be- koorlijkheid in eeue vrouw , welke de plaats der deugd kan bekleeden , there is no charm in woman , that can supply the place of virtue ', but when the relative im- mediately follows the antecedent , the comma is not used I as , de grootste bekoorlijkheid welke eene vrouw bezit- ten kan , is , het betrachten der deugd , the greatest charm which a woman can possess , is , the practising of virtue. Of the Semicolon, Comapunt (;). The Semico Ion j Comapunt (;) is used when the members of a compound sentence have less dependance on each other than those connected by a comma ; as , wijsgeeren bekennen , dat de Natnur geene palen aan hare uitwerk- selen kent; dat zij onuitputtelijke , verborgene schatten bezit; dat kennis altijd voortgang zal maken ; en dat alle opkomende geslachten nieuwe ontdekkingen zullen doen , waarvan wij geen het minste denkbeeld hebben , philosophers assert that Nature is unlimited in her ope- 212 APPENDIX. rations ; that she has inexhaustible treasures in reserve; that knowledge will always be progressive - and that all future generations will continue to make discoveries t of which we have not the least idea. The Colon, Bubbelde Punt (:). The Colon , Dubbelde Punt (:) is used to divide a sen- tence into two or more parts , less connected than those separated by a semicolon ; as , dit kan. ik u voorzeggen, dat het u-aan geene gelegenheid zal ontbreken , om bij ondervinding te leereti, hoe moeijelijk het is Salomo na te zeggen : mijne wijsheid bleef mij bij , this I can pre- dict to you , that you will not want an opportunity to, learn by experience , how dificult it is to repeat after Solomon : my wisdom did not forsake me. Of the Period, Punt (.). The Period, Punt (.) is used after an entire sentence; as, wij zijn voor het kwade , doorgaans meer , dan voor het goede gevoelig. TVe are generally more sensible of evil than good. JJie Period is also used after abbreviations ; as Z. M. Zijne Majesteit, H. M. Her Majesty, APPENDIX IT On the use of Capitals. In the use of Capitals the Dutch observe for the most part the same rules as the English ', as , J. At the commencement of a paragraph y or sen- tence ; and at the commencement of every line of poetry, 2. The appellations of the Deity , as God., de Ai- re agtige ; Heilige Geest > etc. ' 3. All proper names of persons , or places ; as , APPENDIX, US Johannis , Amsterdam, etc. but nouns and adjectives derived from proper names of places, are not often written with a capital , in Dutch , as is done in English ; as , een amsterdammer , an Amsterdammer \ een Hollander, a Dutchman > de Hollands die taal, the Dutch language. 4. Pfords in the middle of a sentence , when re- markably emphatical , or the principal subject of the composition , may begin with a capital; as, Van En- geland willen wij niet eens kikken. Dat trotsche volk heeft geen beter gedagten van Hollandsch vernuft , dan wij van ik honde mij wel verzekerd , dat men, op alle onze geladene schepen , geen een eenige Baal met Hollandsche Boeken vinden zal. Bakker en Deken , Economische Liedjes. Of England we will not even mutter a word, That proud nation has no better idea of Dutch genius , than we have of / am well sure , that in all our laden ships , that not a single Bale of Dutch Books will be found. im LETTERKUNDE, EN iiiinim irsa^ DOOR DEN SCHRIJVER DEZES; In 2 Deelen, Post 8°. Waarvan de PROSPECTUS eerstdaags het Licht zal zien, kJj